Structural Bridge Design UK

November 2013
Example Manual
British Standards

ii

Legal Notices

Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014

2013 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
123D, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, AliasStudio, ATC, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD, Autodesk, the Autodesk logo, Autodesk 123D, Autodesk Homestyler,
Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Beast, BIM
360, Burn, Buzzsaw, CADmep, CAiCE, CAMduct, CFdesign, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content
Explorer, Creative Bridge, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, DesignKids, DesignStudio, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (design/logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DWGX, DXF, Ecotect, ESTmep, Evolver, FABmep, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Fl are,
Flint, FMDesktop, ForceEffect, FormIt, Freewheel, Fusion 360, Glue, Green Building Studio, Heidi, Homestyler, HumanIK, i-drop, ImageModeler,
Incinerator, Inferno, InfraWorks, Instructables, Instructables (stylized robot design/logo), Inventor LT, Inventor, Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer,
Lustre, MatchMover, Maya, Maya LT, Mechanical Desktop, MIMI, Mockup 360, Moldflow Plastics Advisers, Moldflow Plastics Insight, Moldflow,
Moondust, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA (design/logo), MPA, MPI (design/logo), MPX (design/logo), MPX, Mudbox, Navisworks, ObjectARX,
ObjectDBX, Opticore, Pipeplus, Pixlr, Pixlr-o-matic, Productstream, RasterDWG, RealDWG, ReCap, Remote, Revit LT, Revit, RiverCAD, Robot,
Scaleform, Showcase, ShowMotion, Sim 360, SketchBook, Smoke, Socialcam, Softimage, Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StormNET,
TinkerBox, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, T-Splines, ViewCube, Visual LISP, Visual, VRED, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.

iii

Table of Contents

v. Introduction

1. Setup and Configuration

2. Section Definition

3. Section Analysis

4. Beam Definition

5. Beam Design

6. Analysis - Model Definition

7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution

8. Transfer of Data

9. Specialist Analysis Techniques

10. Complete Examples

iv

v

Introduction

This manual is intended to act as a general guide to the solution of typical examples
that are applicable to Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014. There are ten

sections, each containing a number of workshop examples that the user can work
through using the program, by following the described procedures. Most workshops
are simple and intended for relatively new users to the system but there are also
some more detailed examples providing an insight into some of the more advanced
capabilities of the software.
The document is provided as a pdf file which can be accessed through the help menu
in the software and is generally displayed through a pdf reader such as Adobe

Reader
.
The main contents page gives the headings of the main sections. These are
hyperlinked in the document so clicking on a title will take the user directly to the
appropriate section. The first page of each section shows the contents for that
section, listing the workshops included. This is also a hyperlinked page.
Files
Some of the examples require data files to be loaded or opened. All these files can
be found in a compressed zip file located in the SBD\Examples\Version 6\BS Data
Files folder of the software installation. To use these files you must copy the BS
Examples.zip file to a suitable folder on your local hard drive and extract the files to
this location.
At the end of some examples the user is asked to save a data file which may be used
in a subsequent example. To prevent the overwriting of the supplied files different file
names have been used. These files can optionally be used as input instead of the
supplied data files if required.
Projects
An example of setting up a project is given in section 1 and this project template is
saved. All other examples assume that this project is used throughout, giving default
materials, units, titles etc. If you carry out example 1 in section 1 then the Version 6
Examples project will always be available in the list of projects when starting new
problems. If this is not the case or you wish to work on an example without setting up
your own examples project template then this can be loaded from the supplied file
Version 6 Examples.spj when in the Project Templates form.
Semantics
The procedure for each example is given as a series of step by step instructions,
making reference to data form names, field names, user input, menu items etc. To
enhance the readability of these instructions some basic rules have been followed
when preparing these instructions.
1. Text in Bold with a vertical bar separating words indicates a menu item (eg
Options | Project Templates...)
vi

2. Form names ,data field labels and drop down lists are indicated as coloured italic
text such as Define Beam Loading
3. Text in double quotation marks generally indicates a button found on a data form
or user input (eg ...click on the OK button)
Other Useful Information
Having Auto Redraw switched on will mean that the graphics displayed in the
graphics window will be updated automatically as you progress your work.
1-1

1. Setup and Configuration

Contents
1.1. Project Setup ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2. Templates for Multiple Design Codes ........................................................................ 1-7

1-2

1-3

1.1. Project Setup
Subjects Covered:
Design Code; Company Identity; Project Template Titles; Project Template Units;
Project Template Materials; Preferences; Material Properties
Outline
Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 may be used numerous times within a

project and certain data will be common to all jobs within this project. In fact some
data will be common to all projects. Much of this data can be set up as a default by
defining project templates and completing company information which will stored in
the system registry for each user.
In this example we set up the default company information and create two project
templates. One called Version 6 Examples with all the necessary titles, units and
materials and another with no settings for title and materials but with default units.
Procedure
1. Start the program.
2. Use the menu item Options|Design Code to select British Standards
3. Open the Set Company Identity form by using the menu item
Options|Company Identity.

4. Enter your Organisation Name and your Office address
5. Click on the Load button to select a bitmap to display as a logo in the
heading of any output that is produced by the program. Browse to the
examples folder and select the Autodesk logo. Alternatively use your own
logo bitmap.
1-4

6. Click on OK and confirm that the changes should be saved
7. Open the Preferences form using the menu item Options|Preferences and on
the general tab ensure that the box for Display Overview form when file is
opened is ticked and the other boxes are unticked.

8. On the Graphics tab of the Preferences form, tick the box for Reverse direction
of plotted Bending Moments , so that BM diagrams are plotted with sagging
moments (Positive) below the beam and switch on Auto Redraw so that
graphics displays are automatically updated. Note that the colours used for the
chart data series can be defined by the user on this tab.
9. Click on OK to close this form
10. Open the Project Template form using the menu item Options|Project
Templates. Create a new template by clicking the + button. This brings up
a secondary data form which should be set to Default settings before clicking
on OK. Rename the project template to Version 6 Examples by highlighting
the generated name in the Project Template field and re-typing it.

11. Use the same name in the Job Title field and set the Job Number to 1
12. Select the Units tab. Change the units for velocity to m/s and ensure that
units for acceleration are set to m/s
2
.
13. Select the Materials tab. Create a BS5400 concrete material by clicking on the
dropdown list in the first row of the Type column and select Concrete -
1-5

BS5400. By default this concrete has a characteristic strength of 40 N/mm
2

which is grade 40 concrete. Click on the OK button to accept this material.
14. Click in the Type column in the second row to create a second BS5400
concrete material, but change the characteristic strength to 50N/mm
2
. Click
on OK to accept.
15. Create a BS5400 reinforcement material using the default values. Click on
OK to accept.
16. Create a Prestressing Strand material for BS5400, again using the default
values. Click on OK to accept.
17. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.

18. Click on the Export Template button and save the file as My Version 6
Examples BS.spj.
19. Click on the OK button of the Project Templates form.
20. Close the program.
Summary
The data created in this example will be used as default values when any new job is
started. Of course this data may be changed at any time to reflect local requirements
without affecting the project settings. For example, the default value for the SLS
compressive stress limit factor is 0.5, which is ok for RC bending sections. However,
we would need to alter this if the section under consideration was a compression or
pre-stressed section.
1-6

1-7

1.2. Templates for Multiple Design Codes
Subjects Covered:
Default materials for different design codes; Templates from existing templates;
Saving templates.
Outline
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 may be used for projects that require design
checks to more than one design standard. It is convenient to set up a project
template that contains material data relating to design parameters pertaining to
specific codes of practice. In this way, when a structure, beam or section is defined
using one design code, and then the design code changes, the appropriate materials
are automatically re-assigned.
In this example we use the project template created in example 1.1, called Version 6
Examples, to provide the defaults for a new project template called Multiple Codes.
This contains materials relating to British Standards only. We then add additional
materials for Eurocode design. It is important to have the same number of materials
for each design code and they must be in the same order. Finally we export this
template to an external file so that it can be loaded by other users checking our work,
or as a backup.
Procedure
1. Start the program.
2. Use the menu item Options|Design Code to select British Standards
3. Click on OK on the information form.
4. Open the Project Template form using the menu item Options|Project
Templates. and make sure the current template is set to Version 6
Examples. Create a new template by clicking the + button. This brings up a
secondary data form which should be set to A Copy of Version 6 Examples
before clicking on OK. Rename the project template to Version 6 Examples -
Multiple Codes by highlighting the generated name in the Project Template
field and re-typing it. Also, change the Job Title to Multiple Codes in the Job
Title field.

1-8

5. Use the same name in the Job Title field and set the Job Number to 1.2.
6. Select the Materials tab and make sure the Design Code field in this form is
set to Eurocode then create a concrete material by clicking on the dropdown
list in the first row of the type column and select Concrete Parabolic
Rectangle. By default this concrete has a rect/parabolic stress strain
relationship and has a characteristic cube strength, f
ck
, of 50 N/mm
2
. Change
the cube strength to 40N/mm
2
. Ensure that the Design Code Section button
is set to EN 1992-2 and then click on the OK button to accept this material.

7. Create a second concrete material the same as the first but accept the default
characteristic cube strength of 50N/mm
2
. Click on OK to accept.
8. Create a (horizontal) reinforcing material using the default values. Click on
OK to accept.
9. Create a (horizontal) Prestressing Steel material, again using the default
values. Click on OK to accept.

accept.
1-9

11. Click on the Design Code drop down menu and select Australian and New
Zealand Standards from the list.
12. Create a concrete material and change the Characteristic Strength to
31.875N/mm
2
. Click on OK to accept. Create another concrete property and
change the Characteristic Strength to 40N/mm
2
13. Create a Reinforcement material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
14. Create a Prestress Strand material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
accept.
16. Click on the Design Code drop down menu and select AASHTO from the list.
17. Create a concrete material with a Characteristic Strength to 31.875N/mm
2
.
Click on OK to accept. Create another concrete property and change the
Characteristic Strength to 40N/mm
2
18. Create a Reinforcing Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
19. Create a Prestressing Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
accept.
21. To save this project template for use by other users click on the Export
Template... button and save as a file called Multiple Codes.spj in a suitable
location.
22. Click on the OK button of the project templates form.
Summary
The data created in this example is just an illustration of how project templates can be
used for multi-code projects. It also shows how project templates can be saved and
used by other users. This is particularly important when our work is being checked by
others as they may not have the same projects set up. This does not cause a
problem as all data is local to the data file but warning messages will be displayed
warning that the assigned project template could not be found.

1-10

2-1

2. Section Definition

Contents
2.1. Simple Edge Section .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2. Voided Slab ................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column ................................................................................... 2-11
2.4. Plate Girder .............................................................................................................. 2-15
2.5. Encased Steel Column............................................................................................. 2-19
2.6. Composite Section ................................................................................................... 2-23
2.7. Pre-stressed section ................................................................................................ 2-27

2-2

2-3

2.1. Simple Edge Section
Subjects Covered:
Titles; Material property changes; Section Definition; Parametric Shapes; Define
shapes; Inserting points; Arcs
Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric L section and then modify by
inserting points, changing vertex coordinates and changing segments to arcs. Grade
40 concrete is assigned to the section

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Grillage Edge Section with
a sub-title of Example 2.1. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data
item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties data form using the menu item
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel (Redundant
Property) and prestress properties (Prestress Strand) by clicking twice in the
Name field and then using the delete key. Click on OK to close the form.
5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section...
2-4

6. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from rectangle
to L and set the width to 1000mm, the height to 750mm, the thickness of
horizontal to 200mm and vertical to 250mm.
7. Click on OK to close this secondary form.

8. Using the dropdown list, change the Parametric Shape to Define Shape.
This will display a secondary form and a graphic showing all the vertices and
coordinates.
9. Click on the second point in the vertices (Y) list and notice that the circle
around the point at the bottom right of the L has turned red. This is the
current point. Select the + button to insert a point midway along the bottom
edge of the L.
10. Now click on the fifth point in the vertices list and use the + button to add a
point midway along the top of the bottom flange.
11. Now click on the eighth point in the vertices list and use the + button to add a
point midway along the top edge of the vertical.
12. Change the coordinates in the table to the following;

13. Double click on the Arc tick box for the point (as shown) at the centre of the top
of the vertical to create the curve on the top. Change the Name field to Edge
Section.
2-5

14. Click on OK to close the Define Element Shape form and then select the
grade 40 material from the dropdown list of properties in the Define Section
form.

15. Click on OK to close the Define Section form.
16. Used the menu item File|Save as to save the section with a file name My BS
Example 2_1.sam.
Summary
Section shapes can be created in a number of ways. There are many predefined
parametric shapes and standard beams stored in the program library, which can be
used unaltered. These can be converted to a general defined shape and modified.
This example shows how to do this and how to assign a particular material to a
section component.

2-6

2-7

2.2. Voided Slab
Subjects Covered:
Creating Voids, Continuous faces, Reinforcing faces, Manipulation of hook points
Outline
A hole can be created in a section by defining a second component, entirely
contained within the first component and assigning it a void property. If a section is
part of a larger section then the torsion property calculations need to know this, so the
continuous faces must be identified. Reinforcement can be defined relative to a face
with a specific diameter, spacing and cover. The section below can be created to
illustrate all these aspects.

Procedure
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section....
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Voided Slab Section with a
sub-title of Example 2.2. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data|Define
Material Properties... Delete the structural steel (Redundant property) and
prestress properties (Prestress Strand) by clicking twice in the Name field and
then using the delete key. Click on OK to close the Define Material Properties
form.
2-8

5. Open the Section Definition data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section...
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to select Rectangle (if it is not
selected automatically) and set the width to 1200mm and depth to 900mm.
Click on OK to close this secondary form.
7. Assign Grade 40 concrete to this component by using the drop down selection
of the Property field.
8. Click on the two vertical edges (once) and the solid lines change to dashed
lines. This signifies that these are continuous faces.

9. Create a second parametric component using the drop down list in the field
and change the shape to Circle (in the Shape Reference field) with a
diameter of 550mm. Close this form using the OK button.
10. Change the Hook point number for both components to 0.
11. Change the X Coord and Y Coord of both components to 0.
Click twice and press
the delete key to delete
this entry
Click once
to make
dashed
2-9

12. Leave the Property of the second component as Void as this will form the
hole and then close the Define Section form using the OK button.
13. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form from the Data|Define Bars... menu
item.
14. Change the Generate option to Reinforce Faces and change Position By to
Exact Spacing with a spacing of 100mm.
15. Set the Bar diameter to 40mm and then click on the bottom face of the
rectangle in the graphics window to display a data form allowing the definition
of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to 50mm and then close the form
using OK.

2-10

16. Note that the reinforcement material property is automatically selected (but
could be changed if a second reinforcement property is defined).
17. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using OK.
18. Save the data file using the File|Save as... menu item as My BS Example
2_2.sam.
Summary
Voided slab sections are often used to represent the longitudinal stiffness of a grillage
beams. It is important that the torsion properties are calculated correctly and that if
Cracked section properties are required then the reinforcement is correctly defined.

2-11

2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column
Subjects Covered:
Reinforcement to two covers; Snapping to reinforcement; editing reinforcement cover
and size
Outline
A simple reinforced concrete section is required to represent a section of a column
as shown below. Initially 25mm bars are placed in the positions shown below. This is
done by placing a bar in each corner, with the appropriate cover, and then using these
bars as snap points drawing a number of bars between them. This creates duplicate
bars in the corners but these are automatically deleted when the form is closed.

It is then realised that 32mm bars should have been used instead. The bars are
edited to change the diameter but then the cover needs adjusting back to 46mm.

Procedure
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as RC Column Section with a
Click on OK to close the titles form
4. Open the materials data form using the menu item Data|Define Material
Properties... Delete the structural steel and prestress properties by clicking
twice in the name field and then using the delete key. Click on OK to close
the Define Material Properties form
2-12

rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to select Rectangle and set the
width to 500mm and depth to 400mm. Click on OK to close this secondary
form.
8. Open the Define Bars... form from the Data|Define Bars... menu item.
9. Change the Generate option to 1 bar by 2 covers and change Diameter to
25mm.

10. Click on one of the corners of the rectangle in the graphics window to display a
data form allowing the definition of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to
46mm on both faces and then close the form using OK.

11. Repeat step 9 for the other three corners noting that the cover is automatically
set to the last defined.
12. Change the Generate option to Draw Bars and set Position By to Number.
Set the No. of bars to 4 and leave the Diameter as 25mm.
13. In the graphics window toolbar, set the snap option to Bar/tendon then click
on the bottom left hand bar in the graphics window followed by the bottom right
2-13

hand bar. This will create an extra 4 bars, 2 of which will be superimposed on
the corner bars.

14. Repeat this with the two top corner bars.
15. Change the No. of bars to 3 and draw in the bars along the remaining two
vertical edges in the same way.
16. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the OK button and a message
should be displayed saying Superimposed bars have been deleted.
17. Re-open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data|Define
Bars...
18. Click on the Edit bars.. button and then draw a window around all bars in the
graphics window by clicking once in one corner and then clicking again in the
opposite corner of the rectangular section. The bars should turn red and a
secondary Edit Reinforcement form should be displayed. Change the Edit
Option to Change bar diameter and set the Bar Diameter to 32mm. Close the
Edit Reinforcement form using the OK button and the bars are updated.

19. The cover to these bars has then been reduced to 42.5mm so we need to
move the bars to re-establish 46mm cover. This can also be done using the
Edit Bars... button but can only be done one face at a time. Click on Edit
Bars... and then window round the topmost row of bars. Change the Edit
First click
Second
click
Snap
mode
2-14

Option to Reset Cover in the Edit Reinforcement data form and set the cover
to 46mm before closing the form with the OK button. The cover to these
bars has now been adjusted.
20. This can be repeated for the bottom row of bars and each side row,
remembering to click on the Edit Bars... button each time before selecting the
appropriate bars. Close the Define Bars & Tendons form using the OK
button.
21. The data can then be saved, using the menu item File|Save as..., to a file
called My BS Example 2_3.sam.
Summary
This is a simple example that illustrates the creation of a reinforced section which is
then needed to be modified. This is a process that can happen frequently in a real
design cycle. For this simple section it would probably be just as simple to delete the
bars and re-specify them but for more complex sections this may be time consuming.

2-15

2.4. Plate Girder
Subjects Covered:
Multiple components; joining components; copying components; rotating components;
using Shove to locate components accurately; User defined library shapes.
Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric I section and then adding four
parametric Angle shapes as the cleats. Standard structural steel properties are
applied to all components. The section is edited using the join facility to combine the
components into one defined shape.

Procedure
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Cleated Plate Girder
Section with a sub-title of Example 2.4. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
Section...
2-16

rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from
Rectangle to I and set the width of both flanges to 500mm, the overall
height to 900mm, the thickness of top & bottom flanges to 40mm and the
thickness of the web to 20mm. Click on OK to close this secondary form.
6. Resize the graphics window to a reasonable size by clicking on the corner of
the window and with the mouse button held down, drag to the new position.
Zoom the graphics so that the shape fits the new screen size by clicking on the
fit view button in the toolbar of the graphics window.

7. In the second row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from rectangle to
L and set the width and height to 75mm and the thicknesses of both
horizontal and vertical to 12mm. Click on OK to close this secondary form.
8. The angle will appear in red with a circle shown at the reference point. Click
once on this little circle, releasing the mouse button, and drag the shape to a
new location beneath the top flange and to the right of the web, as show below.
Place the angle at this location by clicking the left mouse button again.

9. Use the rotate edit button to orientate the angle with the arms pointing to the
right and vertically down (This could be achieved by entering the angle in the
correct column in the table).
10. Now use the Shove Up and Shove Left edit buttons to locate the angle in its
final position.
11. Now use the Copy icon in the graphics toolbar to create a second angle
component and repeat 8, 9 and 10 to place it in the top left internal corner.
12. This can be repeated twice more to place angles into the bottom internal
corners.
Shove Left
Copy
Rotate
Fit View
2-17

13. At the moment, all components have a material property void, so apply the
Steel property to all components.
14. Although this section can be left as five separate components it may
sometimes be desirable to join these components into one shape. This is done
by selecting one of the angle components and then using the Join edit toolbar
button to combine it with the component touching or overlapping with it. This is
then repeated with the other three angles to give the one define shape
component. (The user may find that clicking just once on the Join button
simultaneously joins all of the components together).

15. Open up the Define shape form by clicking on define shape and re-selecting it
from the drop down list. Change the name to 500 by 900 plate girder then
click on the Add button to add it to a library file. This will open a file browser
form which will allow you to choose an existing library file, if it exists, or to
create a new one. We will create a new one by entering a library file name of
My Useful_Sections.lib and then clicking on the save button.
16. Close the Define Element Shape data form using the OK button.
18. Use the menu item File|Save as... to save the section with a file name My BS
Example 2_4.sam.
Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. For composite sections where the components have different
material properties then the components will remain as individual entities but if the
material is the same they may be joined to form a single shape. This will allow the
section to be stored as a single user defined library section.
The edit toolbar on the graphics window provides many tools for manipulating
components of a section.

Join
Rotate
Shove
2-18

2-19

2.5. Encased Steel Column
Subjects Covered:
Enclosing one section in another, adjusting material properties; Universal Columns;
Import shape from Autodesk
AutoCAD
; Copying components
Outline
An oval shaped concrete column casing, with major axis 800mm and minor axis
600mm is cast concentrically around a steel Universal Column (356x368x202) as
shown below. The concrete is grade 30 and the structural steel has a yield strength
of 355N/mm
2
and elastic modulus 205kN/mm
2
.
The oval outline has previously been created in AutoCAD and saved in a dxf file. This
can be imported into the program before adding the standard steel shape. This shape
is added twice, once with void properties (to create a hole in the concrete) and a
second time with steel properties.

Procedure
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Encased steel section with
a sub-title of Example 2.5. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data
item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data| Define
Material Properties... and then open the Property Details for the grade 40
concrete by clicking on it in the table. Change the Characteristic Strength to
2-20

30N/mm
2
and then click the OK button on both the Define Property Details
and Define Properties form to close the forms and ensure that any changes are
saved.
5. Open the Define Section data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section... . In the first row of the Library column select Import Shapes from the
dropdown list which will open a file browser. Navigate to the file called BS
Example 2_5 Elipse.dxf and open it. Click the Next button on the Import
Shapes form which has appeared on the screen. This will display the general
define shape in the graphics window and show the coordinates in the data
form. Enter a Name for this component as Encased Concrete in the Define
Element Shape form and close it with the OK button.
6. Assign a material property from the Property column drop down list as the
30N/mm
2
concrete.
7. In the second row of the Library column select Steel Sections from the
dropdown list which will open a secondary form in which British Sections are
chosen and a Universal Column is selected from the choice of Steel Section
Range. The serial size is set to 356x368 with a weight of 202kg. Close the
Define Section Details form with the OK button.
8. For both the section components change the hook point to number 0 and set
the coordinates to (0,0). Zoom the image in the graphics window to fit the
screen using the Fit View toolbar button.
9. If the steel section is not already set, then set the focus on the steel section by
clicking on it (it will turn red if a line becomes a dashed line then click on it
again to make it a solid line). Use the Copy toolbar button to create a
second instance of this shape
. Set the Property of this
second shape to be that of Steel and again set the Hook point to 0 and the
coordinates to (0,0).

10. Close the Define Section form using the OK button and then use the menu
item File|Save as... to save the section with a file name My BS Example
2_5.sam.
2-21

Summary
This method is the easiest way of enclosing one shape within another as the Merge
facility used in example 2.7 only works when boundaries overlap with each other.
This process can be repeated several times to create sections such as a concrete
tube enclosed between two concentric steel tubes of different radii.
A second method, which may be necessary in some circumstances, is to create the
encasing component as a single component, without a void component, by applying a
split between the external and internal surfaces (look at the parametric shape of an
annulus as an example). Alternatively the encasement can be made up of a number
of separate components, touching at the boundaries (e.g. a box section made up from
two rectangular webs and two rectangular flanges), although this would not represent
the torsion properties correctly.
2-22

2-23

2.6. Composite Section
Subjects Covered:
Multiple components with different materials; Standard steel library shapes; Reinforce
faces; Hook Points
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below. The slab is 200mm thick
and the effective width is 1500mm. Reinforcement is placed in the bottom of the slab
using 12 no. 25mm diam. Bars, equally spaced with 50mm cover to the bottom face.
The steel girder is a standard steel universal beam section classified as UB
914x419x388. Grade 40 concrete is used for the slab and the standard steel and
reinforcement materials are applied respectively. The slab is part of a wider
continuous slab.

Procedure
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Composite steel/concrete
Section with a sub-title of Example 2.6. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
Section...
rectangular shape. Set the width to be 1500mm and the height to 200mm,
and then click on OK to close this secondary form. The slab is to be
positioned so that the midpoint of the bottom face is to be at the origin. This is
2-24

done by changing the Hook Point to be -1 and then setting the coordinates to
(0,0).
6. The two short edges of the slab are identified as continuous faces by clicking
once on each (they turn to dashed lines) and the material for the slab is set to
grade 40 concrete by using the drop down list in the Property column.
7. In the second row of the Library column select Steel Sections from the
dropdown list. Use the dropdown list to ensure that the Steel Sections Library
is set to British Sections and the Steel section range to Universal Beam.
Then select the Serial size as 914x419 and the weight to 388kg. Select
Steel from the Property dropdown menu. Close the form by clicking on the
OK button.
8. To locate the top of the flange at the centre of the underside of the slab,
change the Hook Point of the steel section to -5 and set the coordinates to
(0,0). The material of the steel beam should be set to the structural steel
property.

9. Close the Define Section form by clicking on the OK button.
10. Open the Define Bars form using the menu bar item Data|Define Bars. Set the
Generate field to Reinforce face(s), set the number of bars to 12, set the bar
diameter to be 25mm and then click on the bottom edge of the slab, which will
open a secondary data form.

Click on
Bottom
Face
2-25

11. In this form set the cover to be 50mm and the number of faces to be 1 and
then click on OK to draw the bars.

12. Close the Define Bars and Tendons data form using the OK button.
13. Use the menu item File|Save as to save the section with a file name My BS
Example 2_6.sam.

Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. Special libraries have been built containing the major shapes for
steel sections which can be used to build up the section. This covers UK, American,
Australian, European and Japanese standard sections
2-26

2-27

2.7. Pre-stressed section
Subjects Covered:
Precast concrete beams; Tendon definition and placement; Section outline from text
file; Initial Prestress forces; Arcs; Merging; Hook points;
Outline
It is required to generate a section of a precast edge beam comprising of a standard
YE3 precast beam (Grade 50 concrete) and an insitu slab and edge detail (Grade 40
concrete) as shown below. The section is created using 3 components, 1) a standard
precast section from a built in library, 2) a parametric rectangular section for the slab
and 3) a general defined shape with specific coordinates for the edge detail. These
sections will overlap so they must be merged to eliminate the duplicated material.

Two rows of tendons are placed in the bottom of the beam (11 in the bottom row and
14 in the second) together with two tendons in the top. The bottom row is placed
60mm from the bottom face of the beam with the end tendons 100mm from the
vertical faces. The second row is placed 110mm from the bottom face of the beam
with the edge tendons 60mm from the vertical faces. The top two tendons are placed
800mm from the bottom face and 72mm from the edge faces. Each tendon (Grade
1776) consists of one strand of 15.2mm diameter and is initially stressed to 225kN.

X Y
1 -100 1350
2 -350 1350
3 -400 1100
4 -550 850
5 -554 753
6 -450 690
7 -100 690
8 -100 1350

2-28

Procedure
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestressed Section with a
Click on OK to close the titles form.
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel by clicking twice
in the name field and then using the delete key. Open the data form for the
prestress material and set the characteristic strength to 1776N/mm
2
. (This
gives a force of 225kN when 70% is applied to a 15.2mm diameter strand).

5. Click the OK button on both the Define Property Details and the Define
Material Properties form to close both forms and ensure that any changes are
saved.
6. Open the Define Section data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section...
7. In the first row of the Library column select Concrete Beams from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic showing a
standard bridge beam). Use the dropdown list Concrete beam range to select a
YE beam and set the Shape no. to YE3. Click on OK to close this
secondary form.
2-29

9. In the second row of the Define Section form create a second component by
picking Parametric Shape from the dropdown list. Set the width to 600mm
and the depth to 160mm. Assign Grade 40 concrete to this component.
10. Now manipulate the positions of the components so that the origin is at the
midpoint of the bottom face of the beam. This is done by setting the hook point
of the concrete beam section to -1 and setting the coordinates to (0,0). The
insitu slab can be positioned by also setting the hook point to -1 and the
coordinates to (200,870) (allowing 20mm for permanent formwork above the
rebate).

11. The two components overlap, so, to cut out the insitu slab around the beam,
select the slab in the list of components and, in the graphics window toolbar,
click on the Merge button.
12. The insitu edge detail now needs to be defined. Create a third component,
using the dropdown list in the Library column, as a define shape. The
coordinates, as defined in the table above, can be entered by either typing the
coordinates directly into the shape coordinates table (using the + button to
add a row), or by entering the coordinates into a text file such as notepad,
copying them to the clipboard (Control/C) and then using the right mouse
button menu option in the coordinate table, pasting them in. Set the section
name to Edge Detail.
Merge
2-30

13. A more accurate shape can be given by fitting arcs where appropriate. Tick
the arc box in rows 3 & 5 and click on OK to close the Define Shape form. A
form appears telling you that the sections intersect. Click the OK button on
this form.

14. Assign Grade 40 concrete to this component.
15. Again the two components overlap, so, to cut out the edge detail around the
beam, select the Edge Detail in the list of components and, in the graphics
window toolbar, click on the Merge button. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Section form.
16. Click No on the confirm form. To define the tendons select the menu item
Data|Define Bars.
17. Select 1 tendon by 2 covers from the dropdown list in the Generate field and
set the area of strand to 181mm
2
(the area of a 15.2mm diameter strand). In
the graphics window click on the left vertical face of the precast beam
(becomes bold) and then on the bottom face which displays a secondary form.
Set the Cover to face 1 to 100mm and Cover to face 2 to 60mm. Click OK
on the Locate Tendons form. Notice that the force in the tendon is 225kN (but
this could be changed as necessary). Repeat this for the bottom right corner of
the beam. Repeat on the bottom right corner with covers to face 1 and 2
60mm and 110mm respectively and then again on the bottom left.

18. Select Draw tendons from the dropdown list in the Generate field and change
the snap option in the graphics window toolbar to bar/tendon. Set Position By
to Number and No. of tendons to 11. Now click on the bottom left hand
tendon in the graphics window and then again on the bottom right (generating
Face 1
Face 2
2-31

11 extra tendons with superimposed tendons in the corners). Repeat this for
the second row but setting the No. of tendons to 14.

19. The top two tendons are created by using 1 tendon by 2 covers option and
selecting the vertical and bottom edges with covers of 72mm and 800mm for
both corners.
20. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the OK button. An
information message is displayed informing that superimposed tendons have
been automatically removed.
21. Use the menu data item File|Save As to save the data file as My BS Example
2_7.sam.
Summary
This section is now ready for section property calculations and stress analysis. The
example shows the build up of components, using merge, arc, and hook point
facilities as well as illustrating the use of standard library shapes. The edge detail
illustrates the ability to cut and paste geometry from a spread sheet or text file.
Inserting tendons demonstrated that a tendon could be placed with respect to two
faces (which dont have to be contiguous). The default tendon force is calculated
from the characteristic strength, the initial percentage and the tendon area, although
this will generally be adjusted to take care of losses.

2-32

3-1

3. Section Analysis

Contents
3.1. General Section Properties ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.2. Torsion & Shear Section Properties ...................................................................... 3-13
3.3. Differential Temperature ....................................................................................... 3-19
3.4. Early Thermal Cracking Calculations .................................................................... 3-23
3.5. ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section ....................................................... 3-29
3.6. Crack Width & Stress Calcs of an RC Section ...................................................... 3-41
3.7. General Stress Strain Analysis .............................................................................. 3-47
3.8. Stresses at transfer of a prestress section ............................................................ 3-53
3.9. Staged Construction of a Composite Section ........................................................ 3-59
3.10. Interaction Curves for Columns ............................................................................. 3-65

3-2

3-3

3.1. General Section Properties
Subjects Covered:
Gross section properties; Transformed section properties; Net Transformed section
properties; Full plastic moments; Moving the section origin; Reinforcement bar
translation.; Results viewer; PDF results viewer
Outline
The calculation of section properties for three of the sections defined in section 2 will
be considered as follows:

Example 2.6

Calculate
Section properties of the gross section (neglecting
any difference between material properties).
Section Properties of the transformed section
(transformed to grade 40 concrete).
Transformed bending Inertia Ixx about an axis
200mm below the bottom of the slab (the global
centroid axis of the complete bridge deck cross
section).

Example 2.2

Calculate
Net transformed Ixx (cracked section properties)
transformed to grade 40 concrete.

Example 2.4

Calculate
Full plastic moment of the section according to
BS5400 Part 3.

3-4

Procedure

1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file BS
Example 2_6.sam created in example 2.6.
2. Use the menu item Data Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title to
Example 3.1a and the Job Number to 3.1a. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
3. Ensure that Analysis Type is set to Section Properties by using the menu item
Data |Analysis Type then use the menu Calculate |Analyse to open the
Calculate Section Properties form.
Gross Section Properties
4. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Gross Section from
the list. This will display the results shown below.

5. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results as a text file. This can
be saved as a Rich Text Format (rtf) file if required
6. Click on the PDF View tab at the bottom of the results viewer to display the
results with the graphics in the form of a PDF document. This can then be
saved as a PDF file if required. Page numbering, User defined titles and
margins can be configured using the Preferences button at the top of the
viewer.

3-5

7. Close the results viewer using the green EXIT Button at the top.
Transformed Section Properties
8. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Transformed section.
This will display the results shown below.

3-6

9. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results.
10. Close the results viewer.
11. Click on OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
Section Properties about a specified axis
For properties about a specific axis we need to define the origin of the section
at the level of the required axis. One set of properties calculated are about the
global axes.
12. Use the Data |Define Section... menu to open the Define Section form.
13. In the first row, change the Y coordinate to 200.
14. In the second row, change the Y coordinate to 200.

15. Click OK to close the Define Section form.
16. Use the Data |Define bars menu to open the Define Bars and Tendons form.
17. Click on the Edit bars... button.
18. Click once on the graphics window to the bottom left of the section, then move
the mouse until the selection box contains all the bars. Click again to select
the bars which will be highlighted in red. The Edit Reinforcement form will
open.

3-7

19. Click on the Edit Option drop down menu and select X-Y Translation.

20. Change the value in the Translation dimensions y field to 200.
21. Click on OK to move the tendons and close the Edit Reinforcement form.
22. Click on OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
23. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties
form.
24. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Transformed section.
This will display the results shown below.

3-8

25. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results and scroll down the page
until the table for Transformed Section area & Properties about global axes (through x=0,y=0):
is shown

28. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save As form.
29. Change the filename to My BS Example3_1a.sam And click on the Save
button.
Net Transformed Section Properties
30. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file BS Example 2_2.sam created
in example 2.2.
31. Use the menu item Data |Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title
to Example 3.1b and the Job Number to 3.1b. Click on OK to close the
Titles form.
32. Select the menu item Data |Analysis type |Section Properties.
33. Use the menu Calculate |Analyse to open the Calculate Section Properties
form.

3-9

34. Click on the Section properties for drop down list and select Net transformed
Section (BS5400).
35. Click on the Transformed to drop down list and select MP1: C40 Es 31.0 fcc
0.5. This will display the results shown below:

36. Click OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
38. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_1b.sam And click on the Save
button.
Plastic Section Properties
in example 2.4
40. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.1c and
the Job Number to 3.1c. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
41. Select the menu item Data |Analysis type |Section Properties. Use the
Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties form.
42. Click on the Section properties for: drop down and select Plastic section.
Also set the Transformed to: field to the Structural Steel material. The form will
now display the results shown below.

3-10

43. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results for the Plastic Modulus
of the Section.
The top of the results file is shown below

This indicates that to obtain the correct results for Plastic Moment and Plastic
Modulus, according to the rules in BS5400 part 3 (9.7.1), we should change the
gamma value for structural steel in the defined material properties from 1.05 to
1.0
44. Close the results viewer and the Calculate Section Properties form by clicking
the OK button on the Calculate Section Properties form.
45. Use Data |Define Material properties... to open the Define Material Properties
form and click on the Structural Steel property. Change the Material Partial
Factor to 1.0 and then close both of the open forms with the OK button on
each form.
46. Click on the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section
Properties form. The form now displays the correct results.

3-11

49. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_1c.sam And click on the Save
button.
Summary
The calculation of section properties is very easy, but very powerful as gross,
transformed and cracked section properties can be obtained. The choice of which
property to use will depend on the type of analysis to be performed using these
properties.

Reinforced concrete sections for Ultimate Limit State calculations will generally use
gross properties whereas Composite steel and Prestressed concrete sections will
normally be transformed. Net transformed properties (cracked) are most useful when
considering the deflections of a reinforced concrete structure.

Fully Plastic Moments and Modulus of a steel section are useful as input to a plastic
hinge analysis of a structure and would be applied as Member Limits to a the
program structural analysis.

3-12

3-13

3.2. Torsion & Shear Section Properties
Subjects Covered:
Torsion Constant; Shear Area; Shear Centre;
Outline
It is required to calculate torsion and shear section properties for three of the sections
defined in section 2 as follows:

Calculate
The torsion constant for this voided slab section (taking
50% of the beam value as it is to be used in a grillage)
The torsion constant as above but ignore the
continuous edges
(Use a torsion grid of 20 by 20)

Calculate
The transformed torsion constant for this encased
column (transformed to concrete units)
(Use a torsion grid of 100 by 50 for the
concrete and 100 by 200 for the steel column)

Calculate
The shear areas in both x and y direction
The shear centre coordinates
(Use a grid of 100 by 100)
Poissons Ratio = 0.3

3-14

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File|Open to open the file BS
Example 2_2.sam created in example 2.2.
Voided Slab
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title to
Example 3.2a and the Job Number to 3.2a. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
3. Use the menu Data|AnalysisType to set the analysis type to Torsion and
shear.
4. Use the menu item Calculate|Analyse to open the Calculate Torsion and
Shear form.
5. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 20. Click in the Y
direction field and enter a value of 20.
6. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select Torsion Stress
Function from the list. Click on the Analyse button.

7. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer. Note that 50% of C =
1.3069E11mm
4
. Close the viewer.
8. Click the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion And Shear form.
9. Use the menu item Data|Define section to open the Define Section form.
10. On the first row of the table, click in the Library column and select Parametric
Shape from the drop down list. This will open the Define Section Details form.
Click on the OK button to automatically change the section to a discontinuous
section.
11. Click on the OK button to close the Define Section form.

3-15

12. Use the Calculate|Analyse menu to open the Calculate Torsion And Shear
form. Click on the Analyse button. Click on the Results button to display the
Results Viewer.
Note that 50% of C = 0.66865E11mm
4

13. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion And Shear form.
14. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
15. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_2a.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.
Elliptically Encased Steel Column
following the steps in example 2.5.
17. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.2b and
the Job Number to 3.2b. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
18. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to Torsion
and Shear.
19. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Torsion And Shear
form.
20. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 100. Click in the
Y direction field and enter a value of 50.
21. Click on the Analyse button.
Note that the value of C in Concrete units is 1.89E10mm
4
.

3-16

22. Click in the Y direction field and enter a value of 200. Click in the Element to
be analysed field and enter a value of 3 (this is the steel column).
23. Click on the Analyse button. Note that the value of C in Steel units is
5.57E6mm
4
. To convert this to concrete units we multiply by the modular ratio
of the elastic modulus = 205/28 = 7.32
Therefore C of steel section in concrete units is 4.08E7
The combined C is the sum of the two components = 1.89E10
This is a lower bound value as it is assumed that in torsion, the two
components are not acting compositely and warping is not constrained.
24. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion and Shear form.
26. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_2b.sam and click on the Save
Shear Centre & Area of RC Edge Section
following the steps in example 2.1.
28. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.2c and
the Job Number to 3.2c. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
29. Use the menu Data |Analysis Type to set the analysis type to Torsion and
shear.
30. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse, to open the Calculate Torsion and
Shear form.
31. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 100. Click in the
Y direction field and enter a value of 100.

3-17

32. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select Shear Stress
Function from the list. Click on the Analyse button.

Note that the shear centre is given on the analysis form at coordinates (209,
207) and is shown by a symbol on the graphic display.
The shear area calculated, 63139mm
2
, is that associated with a shear force
applied parallel to the y (vertical) axis.
The shear stress distribution due to a vertical force of 1kN can be shown
graphically by changing Display results for: to Shear stress YZ (for vertical
shear stresses) or Shear Stress XZ (for horizontal shear stresses) and clicking
the Analyse button.
Close the Calculate Torsion And Shear data form with the OK button
To calculate the shear area in the X (Horizontal) direction, the section must be
rotated around by 90 degrees. This is simply done by opening up the Define
Section form using the menu Data | Define Section.... and entering 90
degrees in the Rotation column of the single component. The Hook point
coordinates should also be set to (250, 0) so that the origin is in the same
relative place. Close the Define Section form with the OK button.
33. Open up the Analysis form again, set Display results for: to Shear Stress
Function and click on the Analyse button.

3-18

Note that the shear centre is given as (207, -209) which is the same as before
except rotated by 90 degrees.
The shear area is, 92476mm
2
, and is that associated with a shear force applied
parallel to the horizontal axis in the original section orientation.
Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion and Shear form.
Use the File|Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
Change the filename to My BS Example 3_2c.sam and click on the Save

Summary
The first example shows the effect on the torsion constant of including the
specification of continuous edges. This almost doubles the value. The 50% value
would be used in a grillage analysis because the transverse members would also
have a torsion stiffness so the total torsion stiffness is split between longitudinal and
transverse members (hence 50%).
The second example illustrates how to deal with sections made up from multiple
components having different material properties. (If they were of the same material we
could have just joined them). The program cannot deal with composite sections
directly in one pass but if we make a few assumptions, many sections can be
analysed by considering both sections separately and using a modular ratio to
combine them into one torsion constant transformed to one of the materials.
The third example illustrates how to obtain shear stress distribution in a section with
the shear centre coordinates and shear areas.

3-19

3.3. Differential Temperature
Subjects Covered:
BS5400 Temperature Profile; Restraining Moments; Primary differential temperature
stresses; User defined profile.
Outline

The composite section shown above has been defined and saved in example 2.6 with
a slight modification to include a 200mm by 200mm upstand on the left hand edge
constructed with grade 40 concrete. The previously defined continuous face on this
edge is made non-continuous. A standard temperature gradient, according to
appendix C of BS5400, is applied to the section but it requires modifying it to take
account of the upstand, as shown above. It is assumed that the temperature in the
upstand will be constant and at the same value as that at the top of the slab. The
effect of the reinforcement is to be included in the calculations.

It is required to determine:
The overall restraining moments and axial forces for both positive and
negative cases.
The unrestrained (self equilibrating) primary stresses at the top and
bottom of each of the three components for both positive and negative
cases.
Procedure
1. Start the program and click on the menu item File |Open... to open the file BS
Example 2_6.sam created in section 2.6 of this guide.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.3 -
Differential Temperature and the Job Number to 3.3. Click on OK to close
the Titles form.

3-20

3. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data | Define Section...
Add Upstand Edge Detail
4. In the third row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
rectangular shape. Set the width and depth to 200mm then click on OK to
close the form. The edge detail is positioned by setting Hook point 1
coordinates to (-750,200).
5. The material for the edge detail is set to grade 40 concrete using the drop
down list in the Property column.
6. The left hand edge of the slab is made non-continuous by clicking on the slab
component in the table, to get focus, then clicking on the left hand edge of the
slab. This will change it from a dashed to a solid line. Click on OK to close
the Define Section form.
7. Use the menu item Data |Analysis Type to set the analysis type to Differential
Temperature.
Apply Temperature Profile
8. Select the menu item Data |Define Loads |Temperature |BS 5400 Part 2
Appendix C...
9. Click on the Group drop down and select Concrete deck on steel box, truss or
plate girders. Set the Surfacing thickness to 0.05m. Click on OK to close
the BS 5400 Part 2 Appendix C Temperature Profile form.

This shows a profile as defined in BS5400 Appendix C but the program
assumes the top of the section is the top of the upstand. We therefore need to
lower this profile so the top of it is aligned to the top of the slab. We also need
to add a constant temperature portion from the top of the slab to the top of the
upstand.
10. Select the menu item Data |Define Loads |Temperature |Defined Profile...
This allows the temperature profile to be modified.

3-21

11. In the Positive Temperature Diff and Reverse Temperature Diff columns,
change the height and temperature values to those shown below. It is easiest
to start at the bottom of the list and work your way up.

Click on OK to close the Define Differential Temperature Profile form.
12. Select the menu item Calculate |Analyse and the program will automatically
calculate the Relaxing moments and Axial loads, showing them on the
displayed form. Untick the Ignore reinforcement? check box to include the
effect of reinforcement in the calculations.

13. Click on the Results button to see all the results including the self equilibrating
stresses.

3-22

14. Close the results viewer and click on OK on the Calculate Temperature
Stresses form to close it.
15. Select the File |Save As... option and change the filename to My BS Example
3_3.sam then click on the Save button to save the updated section file.
Summary
This example shows how to define a user specific temperature profile on a composite
steel/concrete section.

If a beam, made up from this section and temperature profile, was fully constrained
along its length then the following forces and moments would be induced along the
span:
Temp rise Temp fall
M Sagging F Comp M Sagging F Tension
370kNm 1228kN 269kNm -798kN

The self equilibrating Primary Stresses at the top and bottom of each component can
be seen in the results shown above.

3-23

3.4. Early Thermal Cracking Calculations
Subjects Covered:
Thermal Strains; Restraint Factor; BD28/87; Reinforce faces on an elliptical surface;
Short & Long term Temperature Fall.
Outline
The RC column section below is required to resist early thermal cracking stresses
according to BD28/87.

The section is the outline of the encased column generated in Example2.5. It is
necessary to remove the steel column (and void) before adding the 16 no 25mm
reinforcing bars equally spaced around the perimeter with 50mm cover. To position
the reinforcement symmetrically about the X axis, as shown, it is necessary to
reinforce faces with 16 equally spaced bars, choosing the first face as one with a
vertex on the x axis.

Early thermal cracking calculations are to be done according to design guide BD
28/87 with the following parameters:
Short term temperature fall to represent that which would occur using
350Kg/m3 cement content and forming the section with 18mm plywood in the
winter (Use the help file here)
Long term temperature fall in the winter
A restraint factor of 0.5 (Internal restraint)
Permissible Crack width for severe environment (Table 1 BS5400 part 4)
Ribbed bars are used for all reinforcement (Type 2 Deformed)
Shrinkage strain (modified by creep) has been calculated as -0.000085
Use recommended values for Ultimate tensile strain (-0.0002)

What is the reinforcement requirement to resist early thermal cracking?

3-24

Procedure
1. Start the program and click on the menu item File |Open to open the file BS
Example 2_5.sam created in Example 2.5 of this guide.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Elliptical
Reinforced Column, the Sub-title to Example 3.4 - Early Thermal Cracking
and the Job Number to 3.4. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
Modify section and check vertex locations
4. Click on the second row in the Library column and press the Delete key on
your keyboard to delete the void. Press the Delete key again to remove the
steel beam.
5. Click on the first row in the Library column and select Define Shape from the
drop down list. This opens up the Define Element Shape sub-form. Note the
location of the vertex on the x axis.

6. Click on Cancel to close the Define Element Shape sub-form.
Define Bars Around Perimeter
8. Use the Data|Define Bars... menu item to open the Define Bars and Tendons
form.
9. Click on the Generate drop down and select Reinforce face(s). Put 16 in the
No. of bars field and set the Diameter to 25mm.
10. Click on the graphics window where there is a vertex on the x axis as shown
below. Enter a value greater than the no. of segments in the boundary (100
say) in the No. of Faces field. Click on the OK button and a symmetrical
pattern of reinforcement is created. Click on OK to close the Define Bars and
Tendons form.

3-25

11. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Early Thermal
Cracking. The program displays the following warning message:

Click OK to close the warning message.
Remove Unused Material Properties
12. Use the Data |Define Material Properties menu to open the Define Material
Properties form.
13. Double click on the fifth row in the Name column and press the Delete key on
your keyboard to delete the structural steel material property. Click the OK
button to close the Define Material Properties form.
14. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Early Thermal
Cracking.
Set the Analysis Parameters
15. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Early Thermal Cracking form.
16. Click on the Design Code drop down and select BD 28/87 from the list of
available design codes.
17. Click on the Help button to open the help page for the form.

3-26

18. Click on the Locate Field Help button and select Short Term temp. fall T1
from the list. This will display the table below:

The value of T1 for 18mm plywood in winter with a cement content of 350kg/m
3

is 27.
19. Look at the next section of the Help headed Long term temp. fall T2. It is
recommended to use 10 degrees for winter concreting.
20. The field help for Permissible crack width suggests that Table 1 in BS5400 part
4 will give values for appropriate environmental conditions. For severe
conditions the value is 0.25mm.
21. Close the Help window
22. Enter 27 in the Short term temp. Fall T1 field.
23. Enter 10 in the Long term temp. Fall T2 field.
24. Enter 0.5 in the Restraint Factor R field.
25. Enter -0.000085 in the Shrinkage Strain: field.
26. Enter 0.25 in the Permissible Crack Width: field.
27. All other values should be left at the default values.
28. The reinforcement area required is automatically calculated and shown on the
Early Thermal Cracking form. The value is 1430mm2 as shown on the Early
Thermal Cracking analysis form below. More detailed results can be obtained
by clicking on the Results button and these can be printed or saved

3-27

29. Click on the OK button to close the Early Thermal Cracking form.
30. Use the File|Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
31. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_4.sam and click on the Save
Summary
The area of reinforcement calculated here is based upon the recommendations of
DMRB document BD 28/37 and assumes a basic core of concrete 250mm from the
surface of the section. This value can be changed if necessary.

The restraint factor R has been chosen for an internal restraint (0.5) but this is not
strictly correct as the least dimension of the column is greater than 1.0m, but if we
assume it is correct for this exercise the process shows the basic principles that may
be adopted.

As this is an internal restraint the calculated reinforcement should be provided in both
horizontal and vertical directions, but this can be provided by the reinforcement
designed for other reasons. The vertical reinforcement is provided adequately by the
main bars in the column. The horizontal bars would be provided in the form of links.
If the column is 4.0m high and 10mm diameter links are used then the minimum link
spacing required would be 4000/(1430/(pi*25)) = 220mm.

3-28

3-29

3.5. ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section
Subjects Covered:
Reinforce faces; 1 bar by 2 covers; Nominal Load; Gamma factors; Biaxial bending;
ULS Shear design; Iterations fail to converge
Outline
Ultimate limit state section capacities, for moments and axial force, are to be
calculated for two of the sections defined in section 2 as follows:

This precast section has 7no. 25mm bars in the
bottom faces with 50mm cover. The end bars have
50mm cover to the vertical faces. Additionally, 2no.
16mm bars are placed in the top of the upstand
with 50mm cover to both faces.
The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the
centroid of the section which generates a nominal
Mx bending moment of 218kNm due to its self
weight (
fl
= 1.2
f3
= 1.1). Check that the Mx ULS
capacity of the section exceeds this. What is the
angle of the neutral axis?
The precast beam is stitched to a continuous insitu
slab which forces the neutral axis to be horizontal.
What is the Mx ULS capacity now?
By keeping the neutral axis horizontal there is an
out of balance My moment which is resisted by a
transverse membrane force in the slab. What is the
value of this force if the beam is 10m long?
Save this section for use in other examples.

This column has a nominal concentric axial load of
1000kN together with a nominal My moment of
100kNm. What is the maximum additional nominal
Mx moment that can be applied at ULS. (
fl
= 1.2
f3

= 1.1)
The design moments and forces at ULS are
Mx = 350kNm
Axial = 1320kN
Shear along y = 180kN
What links of 10mm diameter are required? At what
value of shear force will it be necessary to have
additional links?

3-30

Procedure
Example 2_1.sam created in section 2.1 of this manual.
Section 1
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Grillage Edge
Section with Reinforcement, the Sub-title to Example 3.5a and the Job
Number to 3.5a. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Change the analysis type using the Data |Analysis Type |Bending, Axial and
Shear menu item.
Define Reinforcement
4. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data |Define
Bars...

5. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select Reinforce Face(s) from the
list.
6. Click in the No. Of bars field and enter a value of 7.
7. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 25mm.
8. Click on the sloping bottom face of the section on the graphics window. The
face will be highlighted in black and the Reinforcement along face(s) form will
open.

3-31

9. Click in the No. of faces field and enter a value of 2 (the default cover of
50mm is assumed) then click OK.
10. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select 1 bar by 2 covers from the
list.
11. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 16mm.
12. Click on the left hand vertical and the top curved faces of the section on the
graphics window. Both faces will be highlighted in black and the Locate bar by
2 covers form will open.
13. Enter values of 50mm in both the Cover to face 1 and Cover to face 2 fields
then click OK.
14. Repeat 12 and 13 for the top right hand corner.
15. Click on OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
Define Applied Forces
16. Open the Define loads form using the Data Define
Loads |Applied Forces... menu item.
17. Click on the Insert record button to add a load case.
Then click on the other Insert record button near the
bottom of the form to add a row to the table at the
bottom of the form.
18. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and select X Moment
from the drop down list.
19. Enter a value of 218kNm in the Nominal Load column.
20. Enter a value of 1.1 in the Ultimate f3 column.
21. Enter a value of 1.2 in the Ultimate fL column.

3-32

22. Click on OK to close the Define loads form.
Calculate Capacity
23. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
The program displays the following Reinforcement is not fully yielded warning
message:

This suggests that the section is over reinforced and the section fails at ULS by
the crushing of the concrete
24. Click on the OK button to close this message.
25. Ensure that the Analysis type field is set to BS 5400 Ultimate Limit State.
Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select Loadcase: 1 from the list.
26. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select X Moment Positive from
the list.
27. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Free from the list.
28. The limiting additional load is 177.417kNm. The neutral angle axis is 35.3527.

3-33

29. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Fixed horizontal
from the list. The Reinforcement is not fully yielded warning message will
appear again. Click on the OK button.
30. The limiting additional load is now 493.424kNm.
31. The associated My moment is -552.37kNm but this bending will be restrained
by the membrane action in the adjoining slab. If the beam is 10m long and we
assume a uniformly distributed membrane force acting in the interface between
the edge beam and slab it will be 8* My/L
2
= 44.2kN/m and will be
compressive.
32. Click on the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
33. Use the File |Save As menu to open the Save File form.
Section 2
in section 2.3 of this manual.
36. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the the Sub-title to Example 3.5b
and the Job Number to 3.5b. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
37. Change the analysis type to Bending, Axial and Shear using the Data
|Analysis Type | Bending, Axial and Shear menu item.
Define Applied Forces
38. Open the Define loads form using the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces...
menu item.

3-34

39. Click on the Insert record button to add a load case. Click on the other Insert
record button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table at the
bottom of the form.
40. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and select Axial from the
drop down list. This will display the Eccentric Axial Loads form.
41. Click in the Axial load value: field and enter a value of 1000kN. For this
exercise we are going to assume a short column with effective length of 0.0 so
that no slenderness moments are generated. No eccentricity moments will be
applied either.

42. Click on the OK button to close the Eccentric Axial Loads form.
It can be seen that applying an axial load also generates moment in both
direction (0.0 in this case) to represent the slenderness and eccentricity
moments.
43. Click on the Insert record button near the bottom of the form to add a fourth
row to the table at the bottom of the form. On the new fourth row of the table on
the Define loads form, click in the Type column and select Y Moment from the
drop down list. Enter a value of 100kNm in the Nominal Load column.
44. For all rows in the table, enter values of 1.1 in the Ultimate f3 column and
1.2 in the Ultimate fL column.
Ensure that the Analysis type field is set to BS 5400 Ultimate Limit State. The
Reinforcement is not fully yielded warning message will appear again. Click
on the OK button.
47. Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select Loadcase: 1 from the list.
Click the OK button on the warning message.
48. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select X Moment Positive from
the list. Click the OK button on the warning message.

3-35

49. The maximum additional Design Mx moment that can be applied is
441.21kNm. The max nominal moment is therefore 441.21/1.1/1.2 =
334.25kNm
51. Open the Define loads form using the Data|Define Loads|Applied Forces
menu item.
52. Click on the Insert record button near the top of the form to add a load case
and decline to copy the active load case.
53. The ULS design moment (as opposed to nominal moments) are entered
directly into the top part of the table. In the second row, in the Mx column
(under the Ultimate group) enter 350. Enter 1320 in the Ax column and
enter 180 in the Vy column.

56. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select *Not used* from the list.
57. Tick the Shear Force Calcs check box.
58. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.
59. Scroll to the bottom of the Results Viewer to find the Link arrangement. The
links of 10mm diameter that are required are 314.316 for 2 legs and
628.633mm for 4 legs.

3-36

The output shows the maximum spacing for columns is 384mm so we would
use single links at 300mm spacing.
60. The links defined above are minimum reinforcement requirements as the actual
shear stress v (1.0651N/mm
2
) is less than the value of v
crit
(1.5372N/mm
2
).
This value of v
crit
corresponds to a shear force of 259.78KN as shown on the
Bending, Axial and Shear form. If the actual shear force exceeds this value
then additional links will be required. The shear force must always be below
801.64kN no matter how much shear reinforcement is required

63. Change the filename to My BS Example 3_5b and click on the Save button
to save the data file.
Section 3
64. Use the menu item File | Open to open the pre-prepared data file BS Example
3_5c.sam.
65. Ensure that the analysis type is set to Bending, Axial and Shear using the
Data | Analysis Type menu item.
66. Use the Calculate | Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Ensure that Analysis type is set to BS 5400 Ultimate Limit State.

3-37

67. Click on the Capacity field and set it to Y Moment-Positive. Click on the
Loadcase drop down and select Loadcase 1.
68. The iterative procedure fails to converge and a warning message is displayed.

69. Click on the OK button in the warning window and the Control Iterations form
is displayed. In some cases the iterations process is unable to converge to a
solution using the strain compatibility methods. A close approximation can be
achieved by manually controlling the iterations as follows.
70. We need to reduce the out of balance Mx bending moment and axial force to
values that are as close to zero as possible in order to give the iterations
process a point to start from. Input a value of 0.01 in the N.A. Angle / Spin
Increment field and click on the arrowed buttons to increase the N.A Angle /
Reset value. You will see the section rotating and the residual Mx bending
moment reducing. Continue with this until the Mx bending moment just
changes sign as shown below.

71. Click on the arrowed buttons to reduce the minimum strain until the residual
axial force changes sign as shown below.

3-38

72. The increment needs to be reduced so that more refined adjustments can be
made to the residual Mx bending moment. Input a value of 0.001 in the N.A.
Angle / Spin Increment field and click on the arrowed buttons to increase the
neutral axis angle and reduce the residual Mx bending moment until it changes
sign as shown below.

73. The increment needs to be reduced so that more refined adjustments can be
made to the residual axial force. Input a value of 0.000001 in the Strain / Min /
Spin Increment field and click on the arrowed buttons to reduce the axial force
until it changes sign as shown below.

3-39

74. Input a value of 0.0001 in the N.A. Angle / Spin Increment field and click on
the arrowed buttons to decrease the neutral axis angle and reduce the residual
Mx bending moment until it is within 5kNm of zero as shown below.

75. Ideally the residual axial internal force would be reduced to a value closer to
zero, such that is within the default tolerance of 2kN. However, for this
example we will accept that we have reduced the residual Mx bending moment
to within 5kNm of zero and the axial internal force to within 5kN of zero and
adjust the convergence tolerance. Select the menu item Options | Tolerance
to open the Convergence Tolerance form. Set the value in the X Moment and
Axial fields to 5 and click OK to close the form.
76. We now have a starting point for the iterations to begin from. Click on the
Analyse button. The iterations converge to a solution. The remaining My
capacity, in addition to that required to resist the applied loadcase, is the
Limiting additional load. We can click OK on the Bending, Axial and Shear
form when we have finished looking at the results.

3-40

Summary
This example illustrates four techniques
a. How to calculate section capacities of a non symmetrical section where
natural bending occurs about a principle axis.
b. How to restrain a section so that bending occurs about a given axis and
the resultant (out of balance) moments about a perpendicular axis can
be determined.
c. Consideration of biaxial bending combined with axial forces when
applying a given set of forces and moments to a section and being able
to calculate the allowable addition forces and moments.
d. How to design shear link requirements in a column.
e. The control iterations process.

3-41

3.6. Crack Width & Stress Calcs of an RC Section
Subjects Covered:
SLS Limiting stresses; Defining Load Effects; BS5400 part 4 Equation 24 and 26;
Interpolation between long and short term modulus; Maximum crack widths; Crack
widths between specific bars.
Outline
The calculation of Serviceability limit state stresses and maximum crack widths are to
be calculated for the edge section, with reinforcement defined in section 3, under two
load/design situations.

Design situation 1
The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the centroid of the section which
generates a nominal Mx bending moments of 218kNm due to the dynamic
effect on its self weight (
fl
= 1.0 and it is a live load). Check that the concrete
and steel stresses do not exceed the SLS limits
Check the crack widths for this design situation (not normally a requirement for
this design situation but shown for completeness)
Design situation 2
When the section is attached to the insitu slab the Neutral axis is forced to be
horizontal. The dead load nominal moment is 126kNm (
fl
= 1.0) and the live
load moment is 254kNm (
fl
= 1.2). What are the concrete & reinforcement
stresses for this case if an interpolated elastic modulus is used?
What is the max crack width (Equ. 24) for this case.
What is the crack width (Equ. 24) between the two left most bars in the bottom
face.

3-42

Procedure
Example 3_5a.sam created in section 3.5 of this manual.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.6 and
the Job Number to 3.6. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Bending, Axial
and Shear.
Design Situation 1
Define Load Effects
4. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.
5. Double-click in the Serviceability fL field and enter a value of 1.0. Click
OK to close the Define loads form.
Calculate Stresses
The program will produce a warning. Click on the OK button to close the
message. Set the Analysis type to BS 5400 Serviceability Limit State. Click on
the OK button to close the message.
7. Click on the Loadcase drop down and select Loadcase: 1 from the list. Click
OK on the warning message form.
8. Click on the Capacity drop down and select Not used from the list. The
program will produce a warning message saying No permanent load tension
stiffening ignored. Click on the OK button to close the message.
9. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Free from the list.
Again, click OK on the messages form.

3-43

10. Untick the Crack Width Calcs tick box (if it is already ticked) and then click on
the Results button. The tables of Maximum and Minimum Strains show the
concrete and steel stresses to be 19.65N/mm
2
and -220.96N/mm
2

respectively. This is less than the allowable limits of 20N/mm
2
and -375N/mm
2

Crack Width Checks
11. Tick the Crack Width Calcs tick box and note that the crack widths are
0.287mm using equation 24 and 0.337mm using equation 26. Click OK to
close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Design Situation 2
12. Use the Data|Define Loads|Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.

13. Click on the Insert record button to add a load case. A Confirm form will open
asking if you want to copy the active loadcase. Click on No to create a new
loadcase.
14. Click on the other Insert record button near the bottom of the form twice to
add 2 rows to the table at the bottom of the form. On the first row of the table,
click in the Type column and select X Moment from the drop down list.
16. Click on the Perm/Live drop down and select Perm from the list.
17. Enter a value of 1.0 in the Serviceability fL column.
18. On the second row of the table, click in the Type column and select X
Moment from the drop down list.

3-44

20. Enter a value of 1.2 in the Serviceability fL column. Click OK on the
message.
21. Leave the Perm/Live drop down set to Live.
22. Click on OK to close the Define Loads form.
Stress Checks
23. Use the Calculate| Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Ensure that BS 5400 Serviceability Limit State is selected in the Analysis type
field.
24. An error message saying Section capacity exceeded overstress factors
given in stress analysis Results printout may appear. Click on the OK button.
25. Click on the Capacity drop down and select *Not used* from the list. Click
26. Click on the Loadcase drop down and select Loadcase: 2 from the list. Click
27. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down and select Fixed horizontal from
the list.
28. Click on the Set Parameters for drop down and select Serviceability
Calculations BS 5400 from the list. This will open the Design Data for
Serviceability Calculations form.
29. Confirm that the Elastic modulus used field is set to Interpolated. Click OK
to close the form.
30. Untick the Crack Width Calcs tick box and click on the Results button to open
the Results Viewer.
31. The concrete and reinforcement stresses are shown in the MAXIMUM and
MINIMUM Strains table. The concrete stress is 19.751N/mm
2
and the
reinforcement stress is -237.797N/mm
2
. Close the Results Viewer using the
green Exit button.

3-45

Crack Width Checks
32. Go to the Bending, Axial and Shear form and tick the Crack Width Calcs tick
box. The crack widths calculated according to equations 24 and 26 are shown
on the form. The maximum crack width according to equation 24 is 0.302mm.

33. It is also possible to find the crack width between specified bars. We want to
find out the crack width between the two outermost bars at the left hand side of
the beam. To do this draw a box around the two bars. The Results Viewer will
automatically open to show the crack width calculations for those bars. The
maximum crack width using equation 24 for those bars is 0.197mm.

34. Close the Results Viewer and click OK to close the Bending, Axial and Shear
form.

3-46

Summary
The first design situation considers the lifting of the beam where it will bend about the
principle axis. The value of the bending moment is greater than just the dead load
bending moment to take into account the dynamic effects of the lifting.

The max concrete stresses can be obtained from the graphics, but the steel stresses
can only be obtained from the results output.

The second design situation illustrates the calculation of stresses and crack widths at
SLS when some of the load is long term permanent load and the rest is instantaneous
live load. The method used is an interpolation between the long and short term
modulus so the stresses calculated are those that would occur at the end of the
structure life. To check the stresses just after construction, the long term modulus
would need to be modified, so as to represent the correct amount of creep, or the user
can choose to use the short term modulus only.

3-47

3.7. General Stress Strain Analysis
Subjects Covered:
General stress strain materials
Outline
For the Steel/Concrete composite beam, defined in section 2, it is required to
calculate the section capacity for bending (sagging and hogging) about the horizontal
axis and to examine the stress distribution due to an axial tensile load of -4000kN and
a sagging bending moment of 4000kNm.

This is done using the General Stress Strain analysis type, but, before this can be
carried out the material properties need to be defined as general stress strain type
material with specific strain limits.

The concrete has the same configuration and strain limits as BS5400 concrete.

The structural steel is defined as elastic-plastic with a stress limit set to 355/1.05 =
338N/mm
2
and a strain limit of 0.01. The yield strain is set to give an elastic modulus
of 205kN/mm
2
.

The reinforcement is set as an elastic-plastic with offset and the stress and strain
limits should be set as the same as BS5400 reinforcement but with a strain limit of
0.01.

3-48

Procedure
1. Open the program and open the data file BS Example 2_6 saved in section
2.6, using the File |Open menu item.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to General Stress
Strain Analysis, the Sub-title to Example 3.7 and the Job Number to 3.7.
Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Using the Data |Analysis Type menu item select General Stress / Strain.
Open the Define Material Properties form using the Data |Define Material
Properties menu item. Add an additional material property in the next
available row as a Defined Stress-Strain type. This should open the Defined
Property Details form.
4. Change the Factored Strength to 26.6666 (ie 40.0/1.5) and choose
Parabolic-Rectangular from the dropdown in the Defined Stress-Strain Type
field. This opens a secondary form in which the Set Curve Default to: field
should be set to BS5400. Close this secondary form and note that the
Modulus of Elasticity-Short Term is automatically set to 14.1798. Now change
value of Modulus of Elasticity-Short Term to 31. Set the Property Name to be
Defined grade 40 Concrete before closing the Define Property Details form
with the OK button.

5. Add another material in the next available row as a Defined Stress-Strain
type. Set the Factored strength to 338N/mm
2
(ie 355/1.05) and the Defined
Stress-Strain Type to Elastic Plastic. Note the default strain at yield is +/-
0.00169 ( giving an elastic modulus of 200N/mm
2
.) Change both tension and
compression values to +/- 0.00164878 to give an elastic modulus of
205kN/mm
2
. Close the secondary form and ensure the Strain Limit is set to
0.01. Set the Property Name to Defined Structural Steel before closing the
Define Property Details form with the OK button.

3-49

6. Add a third new material in the next available row as a Defined Stress-Strain
type. Set the Factored strength to 434.783N/mm
2
(ie 500/1.15) and the
Defined Stress-Strain Type to Elastic-Plastic with offset. For reinforcement to
BS5400 the compressive full yield stress is reduced to 357.143 at a strain of
0.002. Enter this information in the Define Stress-Strain Relation data sub form
and then close this sub form using the OK button. Note that when the sub
form is closed the Factored Strength automatically changes to a value of
357.143. Now set the Strain Limit to 0.01 and the Property Name to Defined
Reinforcement before closing the Define Property Details form. Click OK on
the Define Property Details form.

7. This has now completed the new material property definition so close the
Define Material Properties form with the OK button.
8. Open the Project Templates form using the menu item Options |Project
Templates Click on the Create new Project Template
button. This will display the New Project Template form,
check the Copied current model settings radio button
and click on OK to close the form.
9. Click in the Project Template field and type Version 6 Examples 3.7. Click on
the Export Template button to open the Export the program Project
Template File form. Change the filename to Version 6 Examples 3.7.spj and

3-50

click on the Save button to save the Project Template file. Click OK on the
Project Templates form.
10. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data |Define Section...
and set the parametric shape to have the Defined Grade 40 Concrete
property and the Steel Sections to have the Defined-Structural Steel property.
Close this form with the OK button.

Bars... and click on the Edit bars... button. Click in the graphics screen to
place a window around all the bars (they will turn red) and a secondary Edit
Reinforcement data form will be displayed. Change the Edit Option to Change
Property and set the Bar property to Defined-Reinforcement. Close both
forms with the OK button.
12. Change the Analysis type to General Stress/Strain using the Data |Analysis
Type menu item.
13. Open the Define Loads data form using the Data |Define Loads |Applied
Forces menu item. Click on Insert Record button to create a new load
case. Then enter 4000 and -4000 in the MX and AX fields in the Ultimate
LS sections of the top table. Close the Define Loads data form using the OK
button.

14. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the General Stress / Strain
form. Ensure that the Analysis type field is set to General Stress/Strain. Set
the Loadcase to Loadcase 1 and Capacity to *Not used*. The maximum
and minimum stresses can be obtained from the results viewer by clicking on
the Results button. Produce a print preview of the combined text output and
graphics by using the Print Preview menu item on the Results Viewer.
Alternatively, it may be found under the More Buttons tab located immediately
to the right of the Save as... button on the Results Viewer form. Both the print
Preview and results viewer windows can be closed.

3-51

15. To obtain the sagging bending moment capacity set the Loadcase field to
None and the Capacity to X Moment Positive. The capacity will be shown
as the Limiting Additional Load on the Bending, Axial and Shear form.

16. Close all the data forms and save this data file as My BS Example 3_7.sam
using the File |Save As... menu item.
Summary
This example shows how any material with a known stress strain relationship can be
defined. These materials can then be assigned to components of a section and a
general strain compatibility analysis carried out to obtain limiting capacities or stresses
for a given set of loads.

3-52

3-53

3.8. Stresses at transfer of a prestress section
Subjects Covered:
Prestress Tendons; Relaxation loss; Elastic Loss; Interpolated/short term Modulus;
User Notes; Stress/Strain calculation Reports; Inverted Neutral Axis for Hogging.
Outline
The pre stressed section defined in Chapter 2 is opened and the slab and edge
section are removed from the section definition.

The section represents the mid span section of a 25m long beam which has been cast
and stressed and is about to be released from its mould. The concrete strength at
this stage is based on grade 40 concrete and the relaxation loss in the tendon force is
assumed to be 1.25%. The self weight moment is calculated based upon a weight
density of 23.6kN/m
3
and applied in the load table.

An SLS stress analysis is carried out assuming that the neutral axis remains
horizontal, and the elastic modulus is set to the short term modulus.

The stress results are the stresses in the concrete taking into account the losses in
the tendons due to the elastic deformation of the concrete. By temporarily setting the
elastic modulus of the concrete to a very high value (say 10000kN/mm
2
) the resulting
stresses are those without elastic deformation losses.

Procedure
Example 2_7.sam created in Chapter 2 of this manual. If an Information form
appears containing information about the project template, then click OK on
this form.

3-54

2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Prestressed
Section Analysis, the Sub-title to Example 3.8 and the Job Number to 3.8.
3. Open the Section Definition data form using the menu item Data |Define
Section... Delete the edge detail by clicking in the Library field of the third row
and using the delete key. Delete the slab section by clicking in the Library field
of the second row and using the delete key.
4. Assign Grade 40 concrete to concrete beam component by using the drop
down selection of the Property field. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Section form.
5. To find the cross-sectional area of the beam, use the Data |Analysis Type
menu to set the analysis type to Section Properties. Use the Calculate
|Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties form.

6. The cross-sectional area is 0.522m
2
. The weight density is 23.6kN/m
3
and the
length of the beam is 25m, therefore an Mx bending moment of 962.4375kNm
(i.e 0.52223.625x25/8) must be applied to the beam.
7. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
8. Delete the Structural Steel Material using the Define Material Properties form (if
it is still present).
9. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Bending, Axial
and Shear.
10. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.
11. Click on the Insert record (+) button to add a load case. Click on the other
Insert record button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table at
the bottom of the form. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column

3-55

and select X Moment from the drop down list. Enter a value of
962.4375kNm in the Nominal Load column. Set the Perm/Live field to Perm.
Change all serviceability Gamma factors to 1 by clicking in relevant fields and
entering a value of 1.0.

12. Click on the OK button to close the Define Loads form.
13. The relaxation loss in the tendon force must be accounted for before analysing.
Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data | Define
Bars...
14. The tendon forces are 225kN and must be reduced by 1.25%. Click on the
Edit Tendons button. Window around the whole section in the graphics
window to select all of the tendons. This will open the Edit Reinforcement sub
form. On the sub form set the Edit Option field to Change force and enter a
value of 222kN in the Tendon Force field. Click OK on the sub form.
15. Click on the OK button to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
16. It is useful to make a note of this in the User Notes form which can be opened
up using the menu item Data | Notes... Enter the following text Tendon forces
have been reduced from 225kN to 222kN to represent relaxation losses at
transfer. Then close the form with the OK button.
18. Click on the No button. Set the Analysis type field to BS 5400 Serviceability
Limit State.
19. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down and select Set angle to from the
list. Click in the corresponding edit box and enter a value of 180.
20. By default the elastic modulus used in the calculations will be interpolated
between the long and short term values and as the load is totally Permanent
the modulus will be equal to the long term value. To force the short term value

3-56

to be used we use the Set Parameter for: field to Serviceability Calculations
BS5400 and in the displayed sub-form set Elastic Modulus used: to Short
Term. Close the sub-form with the OK button.

21. The iterations now converge and the graphic display is shown as:


23. The maximum stress in the tendons is -1123.779N/mm
2
. The minimum stress
is -1194.24N/mm
2
.

3-57

The full stress in the tendon should be the tendon force divided by the tendon
area = 222000/181 = 1226.5N/mm
2
. The difference in these values is due to
elastic deformation losses.
25. Use the Data |Define Material Properties menu to open the Define Material
Properties form. Open the data form for the Grade 40 concrete by clicking on
the Name field in the first row of the table. On the Define Property Details form,
click in the Elastic Modulus Short Term field and enter a value of
10000kN/mm
2
. The program will display a warning message saying Outside
expected range. Click on the OK button.
26. Click on OK on both the Define Property Details and the Define Material
Properties forms to close both forms and save the changes.

Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.
28. The maximum and minimum stresses without elastic deformation losses are
now -1226.155N/mm
2
and -1226.432N/mm
2
respectively.
29. Close the Results Viewer and click on the OK button to close the Bending,
Axial and Shear form.
30. Change the material back to default grade 40 concrete by opening the Define
Material Properties form, clicking on the grade 40 concrete and then clicking on
the Default button on the Define Property Details form. Confirm that you want
to reset to default values by clicking on Yes on the form that appears. Close
both material forms with the OK button.
32. Change the filename to MY BS Example 3_8.sam and click on the Save

3-58

Summary
This example demonstrates the effect of including prestress tendons in a section.

The resultant stresses are due to the prestress force and the moments from the dead
weight of the beam. If it was required to see the stresses from the prestress only,
then a very small dead load could be applied.

It should be noted that although relaxation losses are included in the material form for
pre-stressing tendons, this data is not used as the section analysis is not fixed to a
given time. This is why the tendon forces were modified manually to set the
relaxation loss to 1.25%.

The stress diagrams are always produced with compressive forces at the top. If a
hogging moment is applied to a section it automatically inverts the section. In the
prestress case the applied moment is sagging but the prestress provides higher
compressive stress at the bottom of the beam. This is why the neutral axis needed to
be inverted manually.

3-59

3.9. Staged Construction of a Composite Section
Subjects Covered:
Section Stages; Saving Intermediate Files; Initial Strains; General Stress/Strain
Analysis
Outline
A 30m long composite beam is constructed in two stages. 1) The steel beam
supports its own weight plus the weight of the wet concrete (23.6kN/m
3
density of
concrete 77kN/m
3
density of steel). 2) The beam becomes composite and supports
an additional mid-span design moment of 1500kNm due to surfacing. Determine the
as-built stresses due to this loading.

Use the composite section saved in the General stress strain example. Determine the
areas of both beam and slab so that the dead load mid-span moments can be
determined. Delete the slab and reinforcement element from the section and apply
the dead load moment. Carry out a general stress strain analysis to determine the
strains in the steel beam. Add back the slab and reinforcement elements and apply
the strains from the first analysis as initial strains. An additional bending moment of
1500kNm is then applied before carrying out a second general stress strain analysis
of the whole section to determine the stresses.

Procedure
Example3_7.sam created in section 3.7 of this manual. If an Information form
this form.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Composite
Section Staged Construction, the Sub-title to Example 3.9 and the Job
Number to 3.9. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
Determine and Define Dead Loads
3. To find the cross-sectional area of the beam and slab, use the Data |Analysis
Type menu to set the analysis type to Section Properties. Use the Calculate
|Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties form. Click on the

3-60

Results button to open the Results Viewer. The area of the slab is 0.3m
2
. The
area of the beam is 0.04942m
2
.

4. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
5. The dead load moment to be applied for the concrete slab is 796.5kNm
(0.323.630
2
/8). The dead load moment to be applied for the steel beam is
428.1kNm (0.049427730
2
/8).
6. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to General
Stress/Strain.
7. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define
Loads form. Click on the Clear All button and confirm that you want to clear all
loads by clicking Yes on the form that appears. Click on the Insert Record
button to add a new load case. Click twice on the other Insert Record button
near the bottom of the form to add 2 new rows to the table at the bottom of the
form. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and select X
Moment from the drop down list. Enter a value of 796.5kNm in the Nominal
Load field. On the second row of the table, click in the Type column and select
X Moment from the drop down list. Enter a value of 428.1kNm in the
Nominal Load field. Select Perm from the Perm/Live drop down list in both
rows. Change all the Gamma factors to 1 by entering 1.0 in the relevant
fields. Click on the OK button to close the Define Loads form.

8. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form. Change the
filename to My BS Example 3_9 Stage 2.sam and click on the Save button

3-61

Remove Slab & Reinforcement
Click anywhere on the first row of the table and use the delete key to remove
the concrete slab. Click on the OK button to close the Define Section form.
Bars... Click on the Clear button to remove all the bars. Click Yes on the
confirm form. Click on the OK button to close the Define Bars and Tendons
form.
Determine strains on Steel Beam
11. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the General Stress/Strain form.
Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer. The maximum and
minimum strains in the beam are 0.0003841 and -0.0003841 respectively.
Close the Results Viewer and click on the OK button to close the Calculate
General Stress/Strain form.

12. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form. Change the
filename to My BS Example 3_9 Stage 1.sam and click on the Save button
Apply Stage 1 Strains as Initial Strains in Stage 2
13. To apply the strains from the first stage to the components in the second we
must first open the second stage file saved in step 8 above. Use File |Open...
to do this.
14. Use the Data |Define Loads |Initial Strain menu to open the Define Loads
form. On the first row of the table, click in the Maximum field and enter a value
of 0.00038411. Click in the Minimum field and enter a value of -0.00038411.
To assign these values to the steel beam, click in the Element field and enter a
value of 2. If the Enter key is pressed the graphics displays the applied
strains and resultant stresses.

3-62

Apply Moment Due To Surfacing
16. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define
Loads form. Click on the Insert record button near the bottom of the form to
add a third row to the table at the bottom of the form. On the third row of the
table, click in the Type column and select X Moment from the drop down list.
Enter a value of 1500kNm in the Characteristic Effect field. Select Perm
from the Perm/Live drop down list. Change all the Gamma factors to 1 by
entering 1.0 in the relevant fields.
NB. Although, strictly speaking, the strains resulting from the first two loads
have already been added, the loads must remain in the table for the program to
perform the calculations correctly.
Calculate Final Stresses/Strains
The general stress strain distribution can be seen on the graphics.

3-63

19. Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer.
The maximum and minimum stresses for the concrete slab are 5.22799N/mm
2

and 2.7192N/mm
2
respectively.
The maximum and minimum stresses for the steel beam are 99.2097N/mm
2

and -153.076N/mm
2
respectively.
20. Close the Results Viewer and click on the OK button to close the General
Stress/Strain form.
Compare with Non-Staged Construction Analysis
23. To compare the as-built stresses to those that result from applying the load
cases to the whole section at once, use the Data |Define Loads |Initial
Strain menu to open the Define Loads form. Click on the Clear button to
remove the initial strains. Click the Yes button in the confirmation box that
appears. Click on the OK button to close the Define Loads form.
Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer. The tables below
show the comparative stresses:
In Stages Composite
Max Stress 5.22799N/mm
2
9.1N/mm
2
Min Stress 2.7192N/mm
2
5.02N/mm
2
Stress comparison table for Defined grade 40 Concrete

3-64

In Stages Composite
Max Stress 99.2097N/mm
2
39.3N/mm
2
Min Stress -153.076N/mm
2
-136.2N/mm
2
Stress comparison table for Defined Structural Steel
25. Close the Results Viewer and click on the OK button to close the General
Stress/Strain form.
26. Save this data file as My BS Example 3_9.sam using the File |Save As...
menu item.
Summary
A staged construction must be carried out as two or more separate analyses. The
first analysis considers the first stage section components only and a load applied to
represent the total load at this stage. From this analysis the max & min strains of the
first stage components can be determined.

The second analysis includes stage 1 and stage 2 section components and the full
load at this stage applied. Stresses and strains at this stage are then available.

If required, the strains at this stage can be used as input to further stages.

Also note that the strains shown on the graphic are the additional strains due to the
additional load not the total strains these are shown in the text results. The
stresses on the graphics are the total stresses but can also obtained from the printed
results.

3-65

3.10. Interaction Curves for Columns
Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete column; General Stress/Strain Sections; Effective lengths;
slenderness moments
Outline
Using two sections defined in Chapter 2 of this manual, shown below, produce
bending/axial interaction curves for each, using 50 points on each curve, as follows:

Example 2.3
Using BS5400 ULS calculation determine the
design MY bending capacity of the section.
Create Interaction curves for the section
assuming an effective length of 0.0 in both
directions. This assumes the section is a
beam and that no slenderness or tolerance
moments will be considered.
The curves should be for MX (hor) against
AXIAL (vert) for values of MY ranging from
0.0 to just below MY capacity in increments of
50kNm.
Examine the effect on the interaction
diagrams when an effective length of 3.0m is
used.

Example 2.5

Using General stress strain calculations and
materials determine the ultimate axial
capacity of the section.
Create an interaction curve of MX (hor)
against MY (vert) for axial ranging from 0.0 to
capacity so that there are 10 curves.

3-66

Procedure
RC Column
1. Start the program and use the File |Open menu item to open the file BS
Example 2_3.sam created in Chapter 2 of this manual. If an Information form
this form.
2. Use the Data |Titles menu item to change the Section Title to Interaction
Curves for RC Column, the Sub-title to Example 3.10a and the Job Number
to 3.10a. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
3. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to Bending,
Axial and Shear.
4. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the Bending, Axial and Shear
form. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select Y Moment Positive
from the list. Click on the Analysis type drop down menu and select BS 5400
Ultimate Limit State from the list.

5. The design MY bending capacity of the section is 564.811kNm.
6. Click the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
7. Use the menu item Calculate |Interaction Curves to open the Interaction
Curves form.
8. Click on the Required Curves y-axis drop down menu and select Axial from
the list. Click on the Required Curves x-axis drop down menu and select Mx
from the list.

3-67

9. On the Tab Increments panel, click on the From field and enter a value of
0kNm. Click on the To field and enter a value of 550kNm. Click on the
Increment field and enter a value of 50kNm.
10. Click on the Add Tab by Increments button.
11. Click on the Points per Curve field and enter a value of 50.
12. Click on the Effective column length about X= field and enter a value of 0.0m.
Repeat for the Y= field.
13. Click on the My=0 tab of the Interaction Curves form. Click on the Analyse
All button. Click the OK button on any warning messages that appear.

15. Click on the tab My = 500 on the Interaction Curves form and then the My =
550 tab and examine the graphics displayed.

3-68

We can see that the bottom part of the curve for both My =500 and My = 550
are unusually shaped . Sometimes this indicates that the results in these
regions of the curves are not correct and are not useable. This is because that
when My tends towards its capacity the solution becomes unstable at a
number of points, especially at small values of Mx. To examine where points on
the curves may be unstable we can inspect the results file and determine which
part of the curve is usable.

If we scroll to the bottom of the results file we can see that in the case of this
particular example there are no interpolated points. In those files where a user
does encounter interpolated points, then such points indicate that a solution
has failed to converge at that point. Such areas would be unreliable and
should not be used.
The procedure for a case where a solution has failed to converge for small
values of Mx and high values of My would be to consider a change in the axes
and plot My against Axial for a range of small Mx values. Such a procedure is
demonstrated in the following steps. Close the Results Viewer.
16. Change the x axis to My ( all the My tabs should disappear) and then create
tabs for Mx = 0 to 20 in increments of 1. (See steps 9 and 10).
17. Click on the Analyse All button to produce the curves. Click OK on any
warning message that appears. We can see from the graphics that this has
then produced stable results in this region of the 3D interaction.

3-69

18. Click in the Mx = 0 tab and note the Critical value of Y on the Interaction Curve
form when X = 0. The value shown on the Interaction curves form is
6301.954kN.

19. Change the effective column length to 3.0m in both the X: and Y: directions
and then click on the Analyse All button. Click OK on any warning message
that appears. The same critical value is now 5679.166kN which is less than the
6301.954kN value above. This is because a non-zero effective length
indicates the section is a column and that both tolerance and slenderness
moments will be considered in the analysis, thus reducing the design axial
capacity for a given set of design moments
20. Close the Results Viewer and click the OK button to close the Interaction
Curves form.
21. Use the File |Save As... menu item to open the Save File form.
Encased Column
23. Use the File |Open menu item to open the file BS Example 2_5.sam created
in Chapter 2 of this manual.
24. Use the Data |Titles menu item to change the Section Title to Interaction
Curves for Encased Column, the Sub-title to Example 3.10b and the Job
Number to 3.10b. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
25. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to General
Stress/Strain.
26. Use the Options| Project Templates menu item to open the Project
Templates form. Click on the Import Template button and open the file
Version 6 Examples 3.7.spj created in section 3.7 of this guide. Click the
Yes button on any Confirm forms that appear. Click on the OK button to
close the Project Templates form.

3-70

27. Use the Data |Define Material Properties menu item to open the Define
Material Properties form. Click on the Apply Template button. The Project
Template Materials form will appear, click on the Replace current ones radio
button and then click the OK button to close the form. Click on the OK
button to close the Define Material Properties form.
28. Use the Data |Define Section menu item to open the Define Section form.
29. Click in the Property field on the first row of the table and select Defined grade
40 Concrete from the drop down menu.
30. Click in the Property field on the second row of the table and select Defined
Structural Steel from the drop down menu.
The third row is the void section to make the hole in the concrete to take the
steel.
31. Click on the OK button to close the Define Section form.
32. In order for the program to perform the calculations, some nominal reinforcing
bars must be included in the section. Use the Data |Define Bars menu item
to open the Define Bars and Tendons form.
33. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select Draw Bars from the list.
Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 1mm. A warning message
appears saying this is a non standard size. Click on OK to close this.
34. On the Define Bars and Tendons graphic display, click on the 4 grid points
nearest the edge of the concrete section that lie on the X or Y axis as shown
below.

3-71

35. Click on the OK button to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
36. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the General Stress / Strain
form. Ensure that the Analysis type field is set to General Stress/Strain. Click
on the Capacity drop down menu and select Axial from the list.

37. The ultimate axial capacity of the section is 14951.2kN.
38. Click the OK button to close the General Stress / Strain form.
39. Use the menu item Calculate |Interaction Curves to open the Interaction
Curves form.
40. Click on the Required Curves y-axis drop down menu and select My from the
list. Click on the Required Curves x-axis drop down menu and select Mx from
the list.
41. On the Tab Increments panel, click on the From field and enter a value of
0kNm. Click on the To field and enter a value of 14500kNm. Click on the
Increment field and enter a value of 1600kNm. Click on the Add Tab by
Increments button.

3-72

42. Click on the Points per Curve field and enter a value of 50.
43. Click on the Analyse All button to produce the curves. Click OK on any error
messages that may appear.
44. Click on the OK button to close the Interaction Curves form.
Summary
This example shows how multiple interaction curves can be created in one analysis
and that the interaction variables can be changed.

It also highlights that you need to be careful when interpreting the results, especially
when large slenderness moments exist due to the effective lengths of columns, as
failure to converge at some points may occur.

It was demonstrated that when the tabbed value approached the section capacity for
that component alone then the solution for the other two components becomes
unstable. In this case it is better to change the tabbed component to a different
component and investigate the interaction between the others.

The second example shows that by using general stress strain methods, interaction
curves can be drawn for any section, not just RC sections.

4-1

4. Beam Definition

Contents
4.1. Steel Composite Beam Definition .............................................................................. 4-3
4.2. Steel Composite Beam Definition (Advanced) ........................................................... 4-7
4.3. Prestress Beam Definition (Simple) ......................................................................... 4-15
4.4. Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced) .................................................................... 4-19
4.5. Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition ...................................................................... 4-27
4.6. Post-Tensioned Beam Definition (Simple) ............................................................... 4-37

4-2

4-3

4.1. Steel Composite Beam Definition
Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; outer beam; rolled steel UB; concrete haunch; concrete edge;
edge cast with slab;
Outline
Create a simply supported composite steel/concrete beam 26m long with a uniform
section as shown below.

The steel beam is a standard Universal beam 914x419x388 and has standard default
steel material properties. The 200mm thick concrete slab is grade 40 concrete. The
concrete edge geometry has been pre-defined and is stored in a section library, which
can be imported. It is structural and it is cast separately from the slab. The edge will
need offsetting to place it in the correct position. Save the file as My BS Example
4_1.sam for use in a later example
Procedure
Version 6 Examples using the Options |Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File |New Beam.
3. Set the Beam type to Steel Composite using the Data |Beam Type menu
item.
4. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Section title as Composite
steel/concrete Beam - Simple with a sub-title of Example 4.1 and a Job
Number of 4.1. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on
OK to close the titles form.
4-4

Define Beam
5. Use the Data |Define Beam menu item to open the Define Composite Beam
form.
6. Click in the Span field and enter a value of 26m. Click on the Location is drop
down menu and select Outer beam from the list.
7. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section from the list to open
the Composite Beam Section Definition form. Click in the Component drop
down menu on the first row of the table and select Rolled Steel UB from the
list. This will open the Define Composite Beam Component form. Click on the
Serial size within range drop down menu and select 914419 from the list.
Click on the OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Component
form.

8. Click in the Component drop down menu on the second row of the table and
select Concrete Slab from the list. This will open the Define Composite Beam
Component form. Click in the width field and enter a value of 2000mm. Click
in the depth field and enter a value of 200mm. Click on the OK button to
close the Define Composite Beam Component form. Click in the Slab Details X
offset field and enter a value of 0.5m.

Add Haunch and Edge Detail
9. Click in the Component drop down menu on the third row of the table and
select Concrete Haunch from the list. This will open the Define Composite
4-5

Beam Component form. Click in the width at top field and enter a value of
600mm. Click in the width at bottom field and enter a value of 420mm. Click
in the depth field and enter a value of 75mm Click on the OK button to close
the Define Composite Beam Component form.

10. Click in the Component drop down menu on the fourth row of the table and
select Concrete Edge from the list. This will open the Define Edge Detail form.

11. Click on the Retrieve button and open the supplied file BS Example 4_1
Edge Details.lib. There is only one shape in this library file so select it and
click on the OK button. The edge detail is not located correctly in the section
but this can be done by setting the offsets in the Composite Beam Section
Definition form.
12. Close the Define Edge Detail form with the OK button.
13. Enter an X offset: of -0.5 and a Y offset: of 0.996.
14. Uncheck the Edge detail cast with slab? check box.
4-6

15. Ensure that the C40 grade concrete is assigned to three concrete components
in the Property column (see above). Click on the OK button to close the
Composite Beam Section Definition form.
16. Click on the OK button to close the Define Composite Beam form.
Summary
In this example we have defined a steel composite beam which includes a concrete
haunch and a concrete edge detail. The edge detail was imported from a user library
file but could easily have been generated by entering the coordinates of the shape
vertices directly into the table. Note that the materials for each section component
were not explicitly defined but default values were used as these were the correct
values. Different materials could have been selected here if they had been previously
defined.

4-7

4.2. Steel Composite Beam Definition (Advanced)
Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; span type; end span type; slab reinforcement; section
locations; soffit profile; construction stages;
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below.

The beam is a steel plate girder with a nominal yield strength of 355N/mm2. The top
and bottom flanges are 500mm wide and 40mm thick. The web is 20mm thick. The
overall depth of the girder is 1000mm at the deepest section.
The 200mm thick slab is grade 40 concrete and is 2000mm wide.
It is required to create two beams:
1. A 30m internal span which has a curved bottom flange (circular arc) such that
the mid-span point is raised by 400mm. The concrete slab is cast in its length
in two stages, as shown, and has longitudinal structural reinforcement of 25mm
diameter bars at 200mm centres top and bottom. This reinforcement has
50mm cover and is placed in the slab only over the supports, extending 8m into
the span from both ends.

2. A 20m end span which has a curved bottom flange (circular arc) such that the
simply supported end and a point 7m from this end are raised by 400mm. The
concrete slab is cast in its length in two stages, as shown, and has the same
reinforcement as the first beam. This reinforcement has 50mm cover and is
4-8

placed in the slab only over the continuous support, extending 6m into the
span.

Procedure
item.
4. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Beam title as Composite
steel/concrete Beam Advanced 1 with a sub-title of Example 4.2a. Set the
Job Number to 4.2a and add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click
on OK to close the Titles form.
Define Beam
form.
6. Click on the Type drop down menu and select Continuous internal span
from the list. Enter a value of 30m in the corresponding Span field. Select the
item End span from the SIDE SPANS LEFT Type and RIGHT Type drop
down menus and enter values of 20m in the corresponding Span fields.
7. Click on the Cross section is drop down menu and select Varying from the
list. Click on the Location is drop down menu and select Inner beam from the
list. Enter a value of 2 in the No. of different sections field.
Define Cross Section and Reinforcement
8. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section 1 from the list to
open the Composite Beam Section Definition form. Click in the Component
drop down menu on the first row of the table and select Plate Girder from the
list. This will open the Define Composite Beam Component form. Enter a value
of 500mm in the top flange width and bottom flange width fields. Enter a value
of 40mm in the top flange thickness and bottom flange thickness fields. Enter
a value of 1000mmm in the overall height field and a value of 20mm in the
web thickness field. Click on the OK button to close the Define Composite
Beam Component form.
4-9

close the Define Composite Beam Component form. Ensure that the C40
grade concrete is assigned to the slab.
select Reinforcement from the list. This will open the Composite Beam
Reinforcement form. Enter values of 25mm in the Top Diameter and Bottom
Diameter fields. Enter values of 200mm in the Top Spacing and Bottom
Spacing fields. Enter values of 50mm in the Top Cover and Bottom Cover
fields. Click on the OK button to close the Composite Beam Reinforcement
form.

11. Click on the OK button to close the Composite Beam Section Definition form.
12. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section 2 from the list to
open the Composite Beam Section Definition form. Click in the third row of the
table and press the delete key on the keyboard to remove the Reinforcement
component.

4-10

Define Section Locations and Soffit Profile
14. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section Locations from the
list to open the Beam Feature Definition form. On the first row of the table, click
in the Section name drop down menu and select Section 1 from the list. On
the second row, select Section 1 and enter a value of 8m in the Position
along span field. On the third row, select Section 2 and enter a value of 8m.
On the fourth row, select Section 2 and enter a value of 22m. On the fifth
row, select Section 1 and enter a value of 22m. On the sixth row, select
Section 1 and enter a value of 30m. Clicking on the icon will show the
side elevation shown below. Click on the OK button to close the Beam
Feature Definition form.

15. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Soffit Profile from the list to
open the Define Soffit Profile form. On the second row of the table, click in the
Position along span field and enter a value of 15m. On the same row, click in
the Offset from datum field and enter a value of 400mm. On the first row, click
in the Profile to next point drop down menu and select Arc from the list. Click
on the OK button to close the Define Soffit Profile form.

Define Construction Stages
16. Enter a value of 2 in the No. of construction stages field. Click on the Define
and locate span features drop down menu and select Construction Stages
from the list to open the Beam Feature Definition form.
4-11

17. On the first row of the table, click in the Construction stage drop down menu
and select Insitu stage 1 from the list. On the second row, select Insitu stage
1 and enter a value of 8m in the Position along span field. On the third row,
select Insitu stage 2 and enter a value of 8m. On the fourth row, select
Insitu stage 2 and enter a value of 22m. On the fifth row, select Insitu stage
1 and enter a value of 22m. On the sixth row, select Insitu stage 1 and
enter a value of 30m. Click on the OK button to close the Beam Feature
Definition form.

Create Second Beam
21. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Beam Title as Composite
steel/concrete Beam Advanced 2 with a sub-title of Example 4.2b. Set the
Job Number to 4.2b and then click on OK to close the Titles form.
form.
23. Click on the MAIN SPAN Type drop down menu and select Continuous end
span from the list. Enter a value of 20m in the corresponding Span field and
press Enter on the keyboard. A confirmation box will appear with the message
Beam span features will be modified. Continue?. Click on the Yes button. A
second confirmation box will appear with the message Beam section locations
and elevation profile will be modified. Continue?. Click on the Yes button.
Select the item Internal span from the SIDE SPANS LEFT Type drop down
menu and enter a value of 30m in the corresponding Span field.
24. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section Locations from the
list to open the Beam Feature Definition form. Click on the Clear button to
delete the current data. On the first row of the table, click in the Section name
4-12

drop down menu and select Section 1 from the list. On the second row, select
Section 1 and enter a value of 5.3m in the Position along span field. On the
third row, select Section 2 and enter a value of 5.3m. On the fourth row,
select Section 2 and enter a value of 20m. Click on the OK button to close
the Beam Feature Definition form.

Change Soffit Profile and Construction Stages
25. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Soffit Profile from the list to
open the Define Soffit Profile form. Click on the Clear button to delete the
current data and click on Yes on a Confirm form that may appear. On the
second row of the table, click in the Position along span field and enter a value
of 13m. On the same row, click in the Offset from datum field and enter a
value of 400mm. On the third row of the table, click in the Position along span
field and enter a value of 20m. On the same row, click in the Offset from
datum field and enter a value of 400mm. On the first row, click in the Profile to
next point drop down menu and select Arc from the list. Click on the OK
button to close the Define Soffit Profile form.

26. Click on the Define and locate span features drop down menu and select
Construction Stages from the list to open the Beam Feature Definition form.
Click on the Clear button to delete the current data.
27. On the first row of the table, click in the Construction stage drop down menu
and select Insitu stage 1 from the list. On the second row, select Insitu stage
1 and enter a value of 5.3m in the Position along span field. On the third row,
select Insitu stage 2 and enter a value of 5.3m. On the fourth row, select
4-13

Insitu stage 2 and enter a value of 20m. Click on the OK button to close
the Beam Feature Definition form.

Summary
In this example we have created a steel composite beam for an internal span with a
soffit profile and defined construction stages. We then use this file as a basis for a
second steel composite beam, this time for an end span with a different soffit profile
and construction stage locations.
It is important to realise that if the reinforcement had been the same for the full length
of the beam the section could have been described as Uniform and only one section
defined despite the web varying in depth due to the bottom flange profile. The
section variation is used to model sudden changes in section such as flange and web
thickness changes and curtailment of reinforcement.
The reason for defining span arrangements and adjacent span lengths in the Define
Composite Beam form is that the program needs this information when calculating the
effective breadth of the concrete flange, used in stress calculations. The Location
definition of whether the beam is an Inner or Outer beam is needed for the same
reason.
4-14

4-15

4.3. Prestress Beam Definition (Simple)
Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Define material properties; Define beam; Sizing prestress beam;
Define prestress beam section;
Outline
The section of a 21m long prestressed concrete beam and insitu concrete slab is
shown below.

The prestressed beam is a standard Y beam the size of which is to be determined
and is cast using grade 50 concrete. The 200mm thick insitu slab is 2m wide and
constructed using grade 40 concrete. Standard 7 wire pre-stressing strands are used;
each having an effective area of 139mm
2
and a nominal radius of 15.2 mm. The
characteristic strength of each tendon is 1861MPa and they are initially stressed at
75% with a full relaxation of 2.5% (of which occurs at transfer). Tendons are initially
located in all default manufacturers locations as shown above. Save the file as My
BS Example 4_3.sam for use in a later example.

Procedure
2. Begin a new beam using the menu item File |New Beam.
3. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as Prestress Beam - Simple
with a sub-title of Example 4.3. Also set the Job Number to 4.3 and add
your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
4-16

4. Use the menu item Data |Beam Type to set the beam type as Pre-tensioned
Prestressed.
Modify Materials Loaded from the Template
5. Next we will change the material properties loaded from the template.
Click on the Data |Define Material Properties... menu to open the Define
Material Properties form. Double-click in the Name column on row 5 (Structural
Steel material) then press the Delete key on your keyboard to delete the
redundant material property.
Click in the Name column on row 4 to open the prestress material properties.
Change the Characteristic strength, fpu to 1861MPa, the Initial Prestress
Force to 75%, Maximum Relaxation After 1000 Hours to 2.5% and the
Relaxation at Transfer to 50%.

Click OK on both forms to save the new material properties.
6. The next step is to define the geometry of the beam.
Click on the Data|Define Beam... menu item to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form. In the Beam length field, enter a value of 21m. Make sure
Cross section is is set to Uniform and Location is is set to Interior beam.
Suggest Section Size
7. Next we will get the program to suggest a sizing for the beam cross section.
Click on the Suggest size of drop down and select Y beam from the list of
options. This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam Initial Sizing form.
4-17

Click on the Beams at drop down and select 2000 centres. The graph will
update to show Y7 as the best initial size for the cross section. Click OK to
select this size.
Define Slab
8. The next step is to define the slab.
Click on the Define drop down and select Section from the list of options.
This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form where you will
see the Y7 cross section defined in the previous step.
Click on the Component column in the second row of the table and select In
situ regular. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to Rectangle already so enter 2000mm in the
width field and 200mm in the depth field then click OK.
Ensure the Y offset for the slab is set to 1270, (input this data and press
Enter on the keyboard if it is not). Click on the Merge by stage # button.
The program will remove the overlapping material for the two section
components.

Check that the Transfer Property for the beam and the Final Property for the
slab are both set to grade 40 and the Final Property for the beam is set to
4-18

grade 50, then click on the OK button to close the Pre-tensioned Beam
Section Definition form. Click on OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form.
9. Clicking on the icon when the Pre-tensioned Beam Tendon Definition or
Define Pre-tensioned Beam Reinforcement forms are open shows an isometric
view in which a three dimensional representation of the reinforcement and
tendons can be seen. Parameters for this view can be controlled on the orange
General tab at the side of the graphics window.

10. Finally we will save the beam file.
Click on the File |Save as... menu item and save the file as My BS Example
4_3.sam.
Summary
This example shows how to enter a simple pretensioned prestressed beam into
Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014. Particular emphasis is placed on the

suggested initial beam size based on the span and spacing of the beam.
It should be noted that the suggested size is just a recommendation and need not be
used. In this case the precast beam section shape is defined by selecting from the
full list or defining the shape manually.
4-19

4.4. Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced)
Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Edge beam; Exterior beam; Varying cross section; Merge by stage;
Edge upstand; Section locations; Remove unwanted tendons; Debond tendons;
Define reinforcement; Curtailment of reinforcement; Change reinforcement properties;
Outline
A Prestressed concrete edge beam
and insitu concrete slab, upstand
and Infill are shown below. The
precast beam is a YE5 standard
beam with just 4 tendons in the top
of the beam and two rows of
tendons in the bottom. The
positions of the tendons are in the
manufacturers default locations and
the centre four tendons of the
second row are debonded along the
first 3.5m from the beam ends

The precast beam is 19m long but, when the
insitu diaphragm is cast, the composite beam
spans 20m between the centre lines of the
integral supports. It is constructed using grade
60 concrete and prestressed with standard 7
wire strands, each having an effective area of
139mm
2
and a nominal radius of 15.2 mm. The
characteristic strength of each tendon is
1861MPa and they are initially stressed at 75%
with a full relaxation of 2.5% (of which
occurs at transfer). The concrete strength at
transfer is 45N/mm
2

The slab is cast in two stages: the first (stage
1a) being the central 11m portion and the
second (stage 1b) being the two ends together with the infill between adjacent beams
(which extends 2.0m along the beam from each end). The upstand (stage 2) is then
added as an additional stage and is cast along the complete length. All insitu
concrete is grade 40.

4-20

Reinforcement is placed in the
slab at each end of the beam, as
shown, to resist the hogging
moment due to the integral
abutments. This reinforcement
extends 5.0m into the slab from
both ends. Standard grade 500
reinforcement is used.

Procedure
Define Materials and Beam
3. Open the Define Material Properties form using Data |Define Material
Properties... from the menu. Delete any redundant material by clicking on the
material and then using the Delete Key on the keyboard. Change the Grade
50 concrete to grade 60 by changing the characteristic strength in the data
form and then create an additional concrete property with a characteristic
strength of 45N/mm
2
.

Change the Characteristic Strength of the Prestress
Strand material from 1670 to 1861. Close the Define Property Details form
using the OK button. Close the Define Material Properties form using the
OK button.

4. Select the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Beam Title as Prestress Beam -
Advanced with a sub-title of Example 4.4. Also set the Job Number to 4.4
and add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the
titles form.
5. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form using the Data |Define Beam
Menu item. Set the Beam Length to 19 and the Support to beam end face to

4-21

-0.5 at both ends and press Enter on the keyboard. Note the Support c/c is
shown as 20m.

6. In the Location is: field select Exterior beam from the drop down list and set
Cross section is: to varying. The No. of different sections: should be set to
3.
The first section is that at the centre of the beam with a precast beam and
stage 1a insitu concrete representing the slab. The second section is that
section where there is no infill but the slab is stage 1b. The third section is the
same as section 2 but the slab is now extended to include the infill concrete.
The upstand (Stage 2 concrete) is present in all three sections.
Define Cross Sections and Locations
7. To create section 1, open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form by
selecting Section 1 from the drop down list in the Define: field.
In the Component column of the
first row of the table, select PC
beam standard to open the
Define Precast Beam
Component form. Here set the
Concrete beam range: to YE
Beam and the Shape no. within
range: to YE5 and then close
the form using the OK button.
Change the Transfer Property to
the grade 45 material and
ensure the Final Property is
grade 60 concrete
In the Component column of the
second row of the table select Insitu regular. In the Define Precast Beam
Component form set the Shape reference to Rectangle, the width to 1600
and the depth to 200; then close the form with the OK button. Stage should
be set to Stage 1A and the x & y offsets to 200 and 1070 respectively (and
press Enter on the keyboard). To cut the concrete out around the precast
beam use the Merge by Stage button. If you cannot see the full section on the

4-22

graphics use the F4 function key on the keyboard (after getting focus on the
graphics window) to Fit the view.
To define the chamfer on the bottom left corner of the slab we need to change
the regular shape to a defined shape, add a point, and then edit the
coordinates to suit. Change the second row Component: to In-situ define
which will display the Define In Situ form. Click on the first coordinate (the
bottom left corner of the slab should be highlighted with a red circle) and then
click the small + button at the bottom of this table to add a point halfway up
the left edge of the slab. Change the Y coordinate of this point to 1120.

Click on the first coordinate again and set the X coordinate of the point to
-550. Change Name: to Slab and then close the Define In Situ data form
using the OK button. Ensure that the Property is set to Grade 40 Concrete.
The last component
to add is the upstand
which is done by
adding an additional
defined shape. In
the Component
column of the third
row of the table
select Insitu
define. Create a
shape by clicking the
small + button at
the bottom of the
table 5 times and
then editing the
coordinates to (0,0)
(350,0) (250,400)
(0,400) (0,0), and
naming the shape Edge. Close this form with the OK button. Set the X
offset to -425 (which is the centre of the bottom edge) and the Y offset to
1270. Also check that the material property is grade 40 concrete and that
Stage is set to Stage 2
This completes the definition of section 1 so Change the Name: to Stage1A
and close the Section Definition form with the OK button.

4-23

8. To create section 2 select Section 2 from the drop down list in the Define:
field. By default this will be the same as Section 1. All we need to do is
change the Stage for the Slab component to Stage1B and change the Name:
to Stage1B. Close the Section Definition form with the OK button.
9. To create section 3 select Section 3 from the drop down list in the Define:
field. By default this will be the same as Section 1. To define the Infill concrete,
which is cast together with the slab, around the shape of the precast beam we
modify the coordinates of the slab and then use Merge by Stage to remove any
overlapping portion.
In the Component column of the second row of the table re-select Insitu
define to open up the insitu slab data form. In the graphics window, click on
the bottom right corner of the slab to make the circle marker turn red. This
highlights the coordinates in the table. Change the y coordinate of this point to
0. Click on the coordinate immediately before the coordinate we have just
edited and change them to (0,0). Enter Slab + Infill into the Name: field and
then close the form using the OK button (say no to the prompt for updating
the other sections). Click on the button Merge by Stage to remove the
overlapping concrete then change the Stage to Stage 1B (if it is not already
set to Stage 1B) and ensure the Property is set to grade 40 concrete.

All we need to do now is ensure the Stage for the Slab + Infill component is set
to Stage1B and change the Name: to Stage1B + Infill. Close the Section
Definition form with the OK button.
10. The sections now need to be located at positions along the span. This is done
by selecting Section Locations in the Define: field and filling out the data as
shown below in the resulting data form. Please note that the first column
values are selected from a drop down; entering the second column values will
automatically fill the third column values; the last row is hidden in the scrollable
table but should be Stage1B + Infill and 19. Click OK to close the Beam
Feature Definition form.
4-24

Define Tendons
11. To define pre-stressing tendons open the Pre-tensioned Beam Tendon
Definition form by selecting Tendons in the Define: field of the Pre-tensioned
Beam Definition form.
12. By default all available tendon locations
have a fully stressed tendon applied. To
remove the tendons not required (but not the
locations) set the Edit Mode: field to
Insert/Remove and then select the
unwanted tendons in the graphics window
by boxing around the group as shown this
will turn the small dots red. The tendons will
be deleted when the delete key on the
keyboard is pressed. The tendons can be
replaced by doing the same but using the
Insert key rather than Delete.
13. The 4 middle tendons in the second row
need to be debonded which is done by
selecting debond in the Edit Mode: field.
Tick the Symmetrical Elevation box, set the
Left: field to 3.5 (when the enter key is
pressed it automatically updates the right
end) and then window round the 4 tendons,
which turns them red. The tendons are
debonded beyond these locations when the
Insert key on the keyboard is pressed and
are indicated graphically as orange dots.
14. To see how the tendons and sections change along the beam length click on
the green arrow in the elevation graphics and drag the pointer from one end to
the other. The section graphics changes accordingly. Moving the blue handles
will alter the debond points. Close the Tendon Definition form using the OK
button.

4-25

15. To define the reinforcement, select Reinforcement in the Define: field of the
Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form which opens the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Reinforcement form. To create the bar positions click on the Insert Bar
+ button near the bottom of the form which opens the Define Reinforcement
form.
Reinforcement is required at both ends of the beam with a gap in the middle.
This is achieved by defining two bars, one for each end of the beam, and
setting the start and end points of each accordingly. The two bars can be
located in the same position in the section. The bars will be created initially with
the bars at one end below the bars at the other end so that we can window
round the group. Once the curtailments have been set we can easily translate
the bar positions to the correct positions.
16. Set the Diameter: field to 25mm, the Position by: field to Equal Spacing <
value and the Spacing: field to 150mm. Select Reinforce face(s) in the
Generate: field and then click on the top face of the slab which will open a
secondary form. Accept the default value of 50mm cover by closing this form
with the OK button and the bars will then be displayed in the graphics
window. Click on the top face again but this time change the cover to 100mm
before closing the form, which will create a second layer of reinforcement.

By default the reinforcement runs from one end of the beam to the other, so
each layer needs curtailing. This is done by first closing the Define
Reinforcement form using the OK button. Highlight the top 11 rows in the
Define Pre-tensioned Beam Reinforcement form as shown below. Click on the
icon near the bottom of the form to open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes
sub-form. Tick the Modify tickbox, set the End: Dimension to 5 and click OK
to close the sub-form. Follow a similar procedure to set the Start: Dimension to
14 for the bottom 11 rows.
4-26

17. The lower layer of reinforcement now
needs moving to have 50mm cover. This
could be done by again editing data
directly in the Define Pre-tensioned Beam
Reinforcement form. However, in this
example we will use an alternative
method. Click on the green arrow in the
graphics window and drag it to the bars at
the right hand end of the beam. Click on
the + button again, but instead of
defining additional bars we will click on the
Edit bars button. Window round the lower layer of reinforcement and an Edit
Reinforcement form will be displayed. Set the Edit Option: field to X-Y
Translation then set the y: value to 50 before closing the form with the OK
button.
18. The Define Reinforcement form can now be closed with the OK button to
complete the reinforcement definition. To see graphically how the
reinforcement varies along the beam span, with the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Reinforcement form open, click on the green arrow in the elevation
graphics and move it along the beam to display the reinforcement. (The bars
can be seen by following the same procedure with the tendon definition form
open).
19. Close all forms using the OK button and then save the file using the File
|Save as... menu item as My BS Example 4_4.sam.
Summary
In this example we have defined a pretensioned prestressed beam with three different
cross sections. We have also defined tendons along the length of the beam and
debonded them at various positions. Finally we looked at a special technique for
defining curtailed reinforcement.

4-27

4.5. Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition
Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete beam; Parametric shape; Join button; X and Y offset; Soffit face;
Soffit profile; Define reinforcement; Locate bar by 2 covers; Snap mode;
Superimposed bars; Reinforcing bar shape;
Outline
Create a uniform RC beam 30m long using the section shown below. The material for
the beam is grade 50 concrete. Ensure that the soffit is defined

The beam has a soffit profile as shown below

Place 4 rows of 40mm diameter bars in the bottom face
Soffit Point
Coordinates
A 0.00 0.00
B 7.00 0.60
C 15.00 0.80
D 30.00 0.80
4-28

Procedure
Version 6 Examples using the Options |Projects Templates menu item
3. Set the beam type to Reinforced Concrete using the menu item Data |Beam
Type
4. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as Reinforced concrete
Beam with a sub-title of Example 4.5. Also set the Job Number to 4.5 and
add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the titles
form
5. Use the Data |Define Beam menu item to open the Reinforced Concrete
Beam Definition form. Enter a value of 30m in the Beam Span field. Click on
the Define drop down menu and select Section from the list. This will open the
RC Beam Section Definition form.
Define Cross Section
6. On the first row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select Parametric shapes from the list. This will open the Define Reinforced
Concrete Beam Component form. Select Rectangle from the Shape
Reference drop down menu. Enter a value of 1700mm in the width field and
2800mm in the depth field. Click on the OK button to close the Define
Reinforced Concrete Beam Component form.
7. On the second row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select Parametric shapes from the list. Using the Define Reinforced Concrete
Beam Component form, create a Rectangle of 550mm width and 350mm
height. Click on the OK button to close the Define Reinforced Concrete Beam
Component form.
8. On the second row of the table, enter a value of 2800mm in
the Y Coord field and press Enter on the keyboard. Click on
the Join button in the graphics window toolbar.

9. On the second row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select Parametric shapes from the list. Using the Define Reinforced Concrete

4-29

Beam Component form, create a Rectangle of 350mm width and 350mm
height. Click on the OK button to close the Define Reinforced Concrete Beam
Component form.
10. On the second row of the table, change the X Coord value to 1350mm and
the Y Coord value to 2800mm and press Enter on the keyboard. Click on the
Join button in the graphics window toolbar.

11. On the second row of the table, create another Rectangle of 515mm width
and 600mm height using the same method as step 6. Change the X Coord
value to 1700mm and the Y Coord value to 1525mm and press Enter on
the keyboard. Click on the Join button in the graphics window toolbar.

12. Click on the bottom face of the section in the graphics window. The face will
change to a dashed line. This line type is used to indicate a continuous face.
Click on the bottom face again to change it to a solid, bold line. This tells the
program that the face is a soffit face and will follow the soffit profile of the
beam.
4-30

Finally, select Grade 50 concrete from the Property drop down menu. Click on
the OK button to close the RC Beam Section Definition form.
Define Soffit Profile
13. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Soffit Profile from the list.
This will open the Define Soffit Profile form.
14. On the second row of the table, click in the Position along span field and enter
a value of 7.0m. On the same row, click in the Offset from datum field and
enter a value of 600mm. On the third row, enter a value of 15.00m in the
Position along span field and 800mm in the Offset from datum field. On the
fourth row enter a value of 800mm in the Offset from datum field. On the first
row, click in the Profile to next point drop down menu and select Arc from the
list. Click on the OK button to close the Define Soffit Profile form.

15. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Reinforcement from the list.
This will open the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form together with two
graphics views, one showing the elevation and one the cross section of the
beam. We need to define 6 rows of reinforcement, 4 rows at the bottom and 2
rows at the top of the section.
16. Click on the green arrow marker in the graphics window and drag it to the
support at the left hand end of the beam. Click on the + button near the
bottom of the form to open the Define Reinforcement form. First we need to
define the outermost bars in each row of reinforcement.
Click on the Generate drop down and select 1 bar by 2 covers. Set the
Diameter field to 40mm then click on the bottom and left hand faces of the
4-31

cross section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form. Leave both covers
set to 50mm and click OK. Repeat the process, this time clicking on the
bottom and the right faces.

Next click on the bottom and left hand faces and enter covers of 50mm and
140mm. Click on the bottom and right hand faces, entering covers of
140mm and 50mm.
Repeat these steps, entering covers of 50mm and 230mm, and 230mm
and 50mm. Finally repeat these steps, entering covers of 50mm and
320mm, and 320mm and 50mm.
You will now have 8 bars defined for the bottom of the section.

17. We now need to repeat this process for the top two rows of bars.
Click on the left hand face and the lower middle face on the top of the section
and set both covers to 50mm.

Next, click on the lower middle face and the right hand face and set both
covers to 50mm.
4-32

Repeat these steps, entering covers of 140mm and 50mm for the left hand
side and 50mm and 140mm for the right hand side. You will now have 4
bars defined at the top of the section.

18. The next step is to define the remaining bottom bars.
Click on the Generate drop down and select Draw bars from the list. Set No.
Of bars to 15, then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and
select Bar/Tendon. Click on the bottom left bar then click on the bottom right
bar on the cross section. The program will draw 15 equally spaced bars
between the two end bars.
Repeat this process for the other 5 rows of bars. The cross section will now
look like this:

Click on OK on the Define Reinforcement form. The program will produce the
following warning message:
4-33

This is because the program defines bars at each of the locations where the
mouse was clicked. These 12 bars need to be removed so click OK to
remove them and define the beam reinforcement.
19. The program assumes reinforcing bars are horizontal. The side elevation will
look like this:

We want the bottom bars to run parallel with the soffit. To do this, draw a box
around all the bottom bars in the cross section view and click on the Edit
reinforcement attributes button . Click on the Set Bar Shape button on the
form that opens. This opens the Reinforcing Bar Shape form:

Click on the Shape drop down and select Parallel to soffit. The elevation will
automatically update to show the reinforcement in the correct location. Click
OK to close the Reinforcing Bar Shape and Edit Reinforcement Attributes
forms.
4-34

Click OK to close the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form.

Click OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition form.
20. Clicking on the icon when the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form is open
shows an isometric view in which a three dimensional representation of the
reinforcement can be seen. Parameters for this view can be controlled on the
orange General tab at the side of the graphics window.

21. The beam definition is now complete so we will save the beam for use in a later
example.
Click on the File |Save As... menu item to open the Save File form. Change
the filename to My BS Example 4_5.sam and click on the Save button to
save the data file.
4-35

Summary
In this example we have defined a reinforced concrete section making extensive use
of the join command to create a complex section shape from a series of rectangles.
We then defined the soffit profile of the beam. Finally, we defined 6 layers of
reinforcement with the reinforcement at the bottom following the soffit profile.
4-36

4-37

4.6. Post-Tensioned Beam Definition (Simple)
Subjects Covered:
Post tensioned beam; decrement hook point; merge section shapes; define tendons;
tendon location; tendon profile;
Outline
A Post-tensioned concrete beam is shown below

The 20m long, simply supported beam is constructed using a standard I6 beam
(with no pre-tensioning) acting compositely with a 200mm thick slab. An 80mm
diameter cable duct is cast into the slab with a parabolic profile, as shown on the
elevation below.

Create this beam in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 assuming the beam is
cast in one length and the insitu slab is also cast in one stage at a later time. Grade
40 concrete is used for the insitu slab and grade 60 for the beam. Define an 18
strand tendon passing through the duct with an external diameter of 50mm. The
tendon has a Characteristic strength of 1600N/mm
2
and is initially stressed to 75% f
pu
.
Use default values for all other material properties.
4-38

Procedure
2. Begin a new beam using the menu item File |New |Beam.
3. Use the menu item Data |Beam Type... to set the beam type to Post-
Tensioned Concrete.
4. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as Post-Tensioned concrete
Beam - Simple with a sub-title of Example 4.6. Also set the Job Number to
4.6 and add your initials to the Calculated by data field. Click on OK to
close the titles form.
Define Materials
5. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data |Define
Material Properties... Click on Apply Template if the materials are not
shown in the table. Remove the redundant (Structural steel) property using the
Delete key on the keyboard. Click on the Grade 50 concrete and in the
Define Property Details form change the Characteristic strength to 60N/mm
2
.
Close this form with the OK button and note the change in material name.

6. Click on the Prestress Strand material and change the Characteristic Strength
to 1600Nmm
2
and the Initial prestress force to 75%. Close this form with the
OK button. Close the Define Material Properties form with the OK button
7. Open the Post-tensioned Concrete Beam Definition form using the Data
|Define Beam... menu item. The Number of spans: is 1 the Length: 20m and
the No. of Segments: 1. The Cross section is: uniform and the Location is:
Interior beam.
4-39

Define Cross Section
8. Select Section from the Define: field to open the Post Tensioned Beam
Section Definition data form. In the first row of the Component column select
Concrete Beams to open a Beam Component form. Select a British Section
with a Concrete beam range: I Beam and a Shape no: I6. Close this form
with the OK button. Set the Property to the grade 60 concrete.
9. In the second row of the Component column select Parametric Shape to open
a Beam Component form. The Shape Reference: is Rectangle, the width:
2000mm and the depth: 200mm. Close this form with the OK button.
10. Click on the Fit View graphics toolbar button and then click on the beam in
this widow to highlight it (red). Click on the Decrement hook graphics toolbar
button and repeat this until the small red circle is at the centre of the top of the
beam. In the data form change the X Coord to 0.

11. Now click on the slab in the graphics window to highlight it (red). Click on the
Decrement hook graphics toolbar button and repeat this until the small red
circle is at the centre of the bottom of the slab. In the data form change the X
Coord to 0 and the Y Coord to 1020 (press Enter on the keyboard after
altering the co-ordinates) to move the slab into position. Now click on the
Merge graphics toolbar button to cut out the concrete in the slab where the
two components overlap. (If you are unsure which is the Merge toolbar button
4-40

then hold the mouse pointer over each button and the tool tip displayed
indicates the function).

12. Change the Stage for the instu slab to Stage2.
13. Close the Post Tensioned Beam Section Definition data form with the OK
button.
Define Tendons
14. Open the Define Post-Tensioned Tendons data form by selecting Tendons in
the Define: field.
15. Add a tendon by clicking on the small + button at the bottom of the table (this
opens the location data form). Set the No. of strands: to 18 (and press Enter
on the keyboard) and note the duct diameter changes to 80mm. With the
external dimension of the tendon being 50mm the Strand Offset: must be set to
15mm. Now click anywhere on the graphics window to create a location.
Change the x and y coordinates to 0 and 700 respectively and then close
the location form with the OK button.

16. To set the parabolic profile, click on the Define Profile button.
4-41

17. Click on the Profile tab and set the coordinates to Relative to Reference Axis
using the radio button control. Change the dz coordinate of the middle profile
point to -0.5 which changes the profile to two straight lines. To make this a
parabola untick the Fix checkbox for the middle profile point.

18. Close all data forms with the OK button.

4-42

19. Clicking on the icon when the Define RC Beam Reinforcement or Define
Unstressed Reinforcement forms are open shows an isometric view in which a
three dimensional representation of the reinforcement and tendons can be
seen. Parameters for this view can be controlled on the orange General tab at
the side of the graphics window.
20. Save the data file, using the menu item File |Save as... , with the name My BS
Example 4_6.sam
Summary
In this example we have defined a simple post tensioned beam with a single tendon
consisting of 18 strands.

5-1

5. Beam Design

Contents
5.1. Steel Composite Beam Design .................................................................................. 5-3
5.2. Prestressed Beam Design ....................................................................................... 5-15
5.3. Reinforced Concrete Beam Design .......................................................................... 5-27
5.4. Post-tensioned Beam Design ................................................................................... 5-41

5-2

5-3

5.1. Steel Composite Beam Design
Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; construction stage loads; generate loads; import loads;
differential temperature profile; shrinkage and creep; shrinkage strain; design for
construction stages; design for BS 5400 live load; design for vertical shear; combined
bending and shear; longitudinal shear;
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below. The beam forms a simply
supported span and the concrete slab (with haunch) is cast in one. The concrete
edge is cast (defined as the string course) after the slab concrete has hardened.

The bending and shear effects due to dead load and superimposed dead load
(3.2kN/m) are created at 21 points along the span using the Generate feature in the
program. There is a temporary construction load of 1.0kN/m which is applied during
the beam construction but removed once the concrete has hardened.
Max live load bending (with associated shears) and shear effects (with associated
moments) have been prepared in an external ASCII file as envelopes.
There are no secondary effects due to differential temperature and shrinkage, as the
beam is statically determinate, but the primary stresses need to be included for both,
where appropriate. The temperature profile to be applied to the section is in
accordance with Appendix C of BS 5400 part 2, using a 75mm thick finishing. The
profile will need adjusting, as described in example 3.3, so that the edge detail is at a
constant temperature and the actual profile starts at the top of the slab. The
shrinkage strain for the concrete, for the calculation of differential shrinkage, is to be
set to -0.00025.

5-4

It is required to check the applied effects of bending and shear against ultimate limit
state capacity during erection and normal use, and to design a suitable shear stud
arrangement with transverse reinforcement to resist the longitudinal shear forces.
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file BS Example 4_1.sam created in
section 4.1.
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Composite steel/concrete
Beam Design with a sub-title of Example 5.1. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on to close the titles form.
Defining Load Effects
3. To define the loading effects open the Define Composite Beam Loads form
using the Data|Define Loading... menu item. The construction loading is
defined first.

4. Set the Loading Description field to Construction Stage 1A. As the beam is
simply supported we can use the Generate button to create the bending
moments and shears for this case. This will open up the Generate Beam
Loads data form, after the display of an information message explaining the
limitations of the method.

5. The steel and concrete dead loads have been automatically calculated using
the material density and areas defined. An additional component representing

5-5

the temporary construction load is added by clicking on the + Add Load
Component button. Click on the tab of this additional component and set the
Component Ref: field to Temp Const Load. Then enter 1.0 into both the
Start and End Fields of the UDL Intensity. The load factor for both ULS and
SLS can be changed to 1.0. The ULS load factor for the Steel dead load
should be changed to 1.05. Set the Beam span equally divided by field to
20. Click on the OK button to save this data and close the Generate Beam
Loads form.
6. Set the Loading Description field to String course dead load and use the
Generate button to create the bending moments and shears for this case.
Again, the program automatically calculates the dead load intensity of the edge
section. Set the Beam span equally divided by field to 20 and accept the
defaults by clicking on .
7. Set the Loading Description field to SDL non-structural concrete etc. This will
be used to represent the removal of the temporary construction loading by
applying a negative factor to the load. Use the Generate button to open the
data form then enter 1.0 into the Start and End fields of the UDL intensity.
The ULS and SLS Load factors are changed to -1. The component ref field
can be changed to Temp const load rem to make it clear what this represents.
Set the Beam span equally divided by field to 20 before clicking on to
accept the data.
8. Set the Loading Description field to Superimposed dead load (The ID no. is
left at 1 as there is only one SDL load case to consider). An information
message may be displayed warning that there are hogging moments, for the
previous case, where sagging moments are expected. This is of course
intended so can be accepted. Use the Generate button to open the data form
then enter 3.2 into the Start and End fields of the UDL intensity. The ULS
and SLS load factors are left at the default values. Set the Beam span equally
divided by field to 20 before clicking on to accept the data.
9. The effects for two live load cases need to be considered:
Sagging Bending Moments with associated Shear
Max Shears with associated Bending moments
These are loaded from an ASCII file which has been prepared using a standard
text editor. This file has a file extension .sld and can be imported by using the
Interface button on the Define Composite Beam Loads form. Select the
Direct ASCII File Import radio button option before clicking on which will
then display a standard file browser allowing the selection of the file called
BS_Composite_Beam_Simple.SLD. The imported effects can be inspected
by selecting the appropriate option in the Loading Description field. It should
be noted that there are values for both combination 1 and 3 and these can be
viewed by changing the Load Combination field accordingly.
10. All main loading effects are now defined so the Define Composite Beam Loads
form can be closed by clicking on . An information message is displayed

5-6

indicating that dead load shears are actual values whereas the live load
envelopes are all absolute values. Answer Yes to the question about
converting the dead load shears to absolute values as this will enable them to
be combined correctly.
Design Checks
Setting the Differential Temperature Profile and Shrinkage strains and
calculating the primary stresses
11. Open the Composite Beam Analysis form by using the Calculate|Analyse...
menu item. Change the Set parameters for: field to Differential temp. Appx C.
Set the field Surfacing: to Surfaced and the Surfacing Thickness: to 0.075.
Also set the Depth of concrete above steel: to 0.275 (the slab plus the
haunch).
From the graphical representation of the profile it
can be seen that the program takes the top of the
concrete as the top of the edge detail, whereas it
should be the top of the slab. It can be assumed
that the temperature in the upstand is constant at
the top of slab temperature. We therefore need to
modify the temperature profile to move it down by
the height of the upstand.
12. Close the Appendix C profile form by clicking on and then change the Set
parameters for: field to Differential temp. defined. The initial profile shown is
that previously defined, but this can be edited to the following values. Change
the values and then close this form by clicking on to set the correct profile.

5-7

13. Set the Set parameters for: field to
Shrinkage and Creep which will display
the Data for Shrinkage & Creep data form.
The Shrinkage strain: should be set to
-0.00025 and all the other values left as
the default settings. Close the parameters
forms by clicking on .
14. To determine the primary stresses in the section due to differential temperature
and differential shrinkage set the Analyse for: field to Diff temp primary stress.

This will produce a graphical result of the stresses. More details can be found
by using the Results button.

The same process can be carried out for differential shrinkage.
15. Close the Composite Beam Analysis form by clicking on to save this data.
Construction stages
16. The first design check will be to ensure the ULS capacity of the steel girder, on
its own, is greater than the applied load effects during construction. Open the
Composite Beam Analysis form by using the Calculate|Analyse... menu item

5-8

and set the Analyse for: field to BMs during construction. The calculation is
done automatically.
17. It can be seen from the graphics that the actual mid span construction moment
just exceeds the bending capacity of this compact section.

18. The resulting calculation for this can be seen by first moving the vertical red
line on the beam elevation to the mid span point and then clicking on the
Results button. The vertical red line is moved by using the direction buttons
at the end of the field Result Point of Interest.

19. Inspection of the results shows that the slenderness of the girder has reduced
the bending capacity of the section by virtue of lateral torsional buckling of the
top flange. This could be improved by supplying a torsional restraint to the mid
span point of the beam. To do this, change the Set parameter for: to Bending
and Buckling calculations which displays the appropriate data form.

20. Set the current tab to Effective Length Erection and set the Restraint Type:
to torsional restraints. The Number of equally spaced restraints is left as 1
to enable a restraint at mid-span.
The graphics shows that the section is still just failing at mid span.

5-9

21. Reduce the value of Rotation of restraint per kNm of torque,
R
from 1.0 to
0.8.
We can see that the section then works (note that the BM diagram turns
green). This indicates that a transverse restraint is required at mid-span with
sufficient bending stiffness so that the restraint end will not rotate by more than
0.8 degrees if a moment of 1.0kNm is applied at the end.
The beam therefore passes this design check.
22. Close the Design Data for Bending & Buckling form by clicking on the OK
button and then click on the Results button on the Composite Beam Analysis
form which will open the Results Viewer window displaying the full calculations
for the current section. These can be printed if required.

Close the Results Viewer using the Exit button.
Bending Moments under BS 5400 Combination Loading
23. Only sagging moments need to be considered as the beam is simply
supported. Change Analyse for: data field to BMs for sagging load case 1
load comb 1. Limit State should be set to Ultimate and Display: set to
Moments. The graphics clearly shows that the design moments are less than
the resistance moments along the whole of the beam length.

5-10

By changing the Display field to Steel or Slab Stresses a message indicates
that due to the section being compact, stress checks are not required.
24. Now set the Limit State to Serviceability and the Display: to Steel stresses.
Both top and bottom flange design stresses, shown in the graphics, are below
the maximum allowable stresses.
The same can be shown for the concrete slab stresses by clicking on the Slab
stresses radio button (a warning message about adding local to global effects
will appear click OK on this message). The section therefore passes this
design check. Full calculations can be viewed/printed by using the Results
button as required.
25. It should be noted that the stress calculations are
based upon the use of the correct section modulus
taking into account the effect of shear lag. Shear
lag is represented by using an effective breadth of
concrete flange which is determined by the
program in accordance with the code of practice.
The parameters affecting these calculations are
defined in the Criteria for SLS calculations form
which can be displayed by selecting SLS Criteria
in the Set parameters for: field. In most cases the
default values are acceptable. The form is closed
using the OK button.
26. Repeat the above exercise for combination 3, by selecting ...load case 1 comb
3 in the Analyse for: field and verify that the beam passes. Also verify that
temperature stresses are being added by viewing the results.
Vertical Shear under BS 5400 Combination Loading
27. In the Analyse for: data field, select Shear Force load case 1 load comb 1
from the dropdown selection; it can be seen that only Ultimate Limit State is
available for checking. The graphics clearly shows that the design shears are
less than the permissible shear along the whole of the beam length.

5-11

The section therefore passes this design check and full calculations of these
can be viewed/printed by using the Results button as before.
Combined Bending and Shear Design Checks
28. The combined effect of bending and shear are checked using the unity
equations of 9.9.3.1 in BS 5400. In the Analyse for: data field, select
Combined Bending and Shear from the dropdown selection to display the
graphical results. Both Max Moments with Associated shears and Max Shears
with associated moments are checked giving two lines on the diagram.

Design for Longitudinal Shear
Longitudinal shear resistance is checked along two planes. The first is the
plane of the interface between the steel and concrete and is resisted by shear
connectors welded to the top flange and cast into the concrete slab. The
second is the vertical plane through the slab adjacent to the edge of the top
flange and is resisted by the dowel action of the transverse reinforcement.
Before the design checks can be carried out it is first necessary to specify a
default shear connector arrangement and transverse reinforcement. The
arrangements and reinforcement quantities can then be adjusted to fit the
requirements.
29. First close the Composite Beam Analysis form by clicking on and then
open the Define Composite Beam form using the toolbar button.

5-12

30. To define the shear connectors, use the drop down list in the Define and locate
span features: field to select Longitudinal Shear Connectors which will display
the Location of Shear Connectors form. Accept the default arrangement by
closing the form by clicking on . (Note that the slab reinforcement is shown
in the graphics view zoom in to see this in greater detail).
31. The same thing can be done with transverse slab reinforcement before closing
the Define Composite Beam form by clicking on .
32. To check the adequacy of the default shear connectors and transverse
reinforcement open the Composite Beam Analysis form using the
Calculate|Analyse... menu item and change Analyse for: to Longitudinal
shear 1 load comb. 1 and Display: to Shear connectors.

The graphics display shows that the default shear stud type and spacing is not
quite satisfactory at the places of max shear flow. Hence, we would install
additional shear links near the ends of the beam in this case.
33. Now change the Display radio button to Transverse reinforcement and the
graphic display now shows that the permissible shear flow is several times the
actual resistance at the critical shear plane, so the reinforcement can be
reduced.

5-13

34. Close the Composite Beam Analysis form by
clicking and return to the Location of Shear
Connectors form (see 29... above). The shear
connector type and size will remain the same but
the spacing can be increased toward the centre of
the beam. Additional rows of data can be added in
the form by selecting, in the next available row, the
same connector type as the previous lines. This
will display a Shear Connector Details form to
define the stud size and strength.
Accept the defaults by clicking on then edit
the data in the other columns as shown below.

Close the form by clicking on and then open the Transverse
Reinforcement in Slab form using Define and locate span features. Change the
bar diameters to 16mm and the spacing to 225 in top, bottom and haunch
locations and then close the form by clicking on .
35. Open the Composite Beam Analysis form and check that the effects of the
changes made to the shear connectors and transverse reinforcement are
acceptable.
When the analysis form is open the results graphs can be displayed in a 3D
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window (see
below).

5-14

Also, it is worth noting that when the print preview window is opened by clicking
on the icon at the top of the graphic window, a pdf of the graphic window
can be generated by clicking on the icon at the top of the print preview
window.
36. Click on the File|Save As... menu item and save the file as My BS Example
5_1.sam.
Summary
In this example we have taken a steel composite beam created in a previous example
and applied load to it for a series of design load cases. We have also applied a
differential temperature profile and shrinkage strain to the beam, then checked the
beam for a series of design criteria.

5-15

5.2. Prestressed Beam Design
Subjects Covered:
Prestressed beam design; Erection loads; Generate beam loads; Beam dead load;
Temporary support loads; Apply negative loads to beams; Temporary construction
loads; Beam span increments; Constructions loads; Remove loads; Superimposed
dead loads; Import live loads; Absolute shears; BS 5400 temperature profiles; Tendon
layout optimisation; Shear resistance; Shear width; Shear link requirements;
Transverse reinforcement requirements.
Outline
A composite pre-tensioned pre-cast beam and concrete slab is shown below. The
beam is an internal beam of a simply supported bridge deck of 21m span and the 2m
wide concrete slab is cast in one. The dimensions of the beam can be found in
example 4.3

The bending and shear effects due to dead load and superimposed dead load
(2.5kN/m) are created by using the Generate feature in the program. During
construction the beam is initially supported on temporary supports at 1m from the
beam ends. There is also a temporary construction load of 1.0kN/m over the length of
the beam. This load and the temporary supports are removed once the concrete has
hardened.
Max live load bending (with associated shears) and shear effects (with associated
moments) have been prepared in an external ASCII file as envelopes.
There are no secondary effects due to differential temperature and shrinkage, as the
beam is statically determinate, but the primary stresses need to be included for both,
where appropriate. The temperature profile to be applied to the section is in
accordance with Appendix C of BS 5400 part 2, using a waterproofing as a finish.
The shrinkage strain for the concrete is to be set to -0.00025 with 20% of this
occurring before the insitu slab is cast. The differential shrinkage strain should be -
0.0001 and the creep reduction factor set to 0.43. Use the default creep strain

5-16

calculated by the program and assume 20% of this strain occurs before the insitu slab
is cast.
It is required to design the required tendon layout with appropriate debonding so that
SLS and ULS design criteria for bending moments and stresses are met during
transfer, beam erection and during normal use. Shear link spacing in the beam also
needs to be determined to resist both transverse and longitudinal shear forces. The
reinforcement grade for the shear links is the same as that for the main reinforcement
and the vertical shear is resisted by the precast beam only. For longitudinal shear it
can be assumed that the interface surface is Type 2.
All design is to BS 5400.
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file BS Example 4_3.sam created in
section 4.
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestressed Concrete
Beam with a sub-title of Example 5.2. Also add your initials to the Calculated
by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
Define Erection Loads
3. Next we will define erection of beam loads using Generate to include two
extra components; one for the temp 1kN/m and the other for the support loads
(upwards).
Use the menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form. Click on the Loading Description drop down and select
Erection of beam from the list of design load cases then click on the
Generate button. Click on Yes on the confirmation form that appears. The
Generate Beam Loads form will now open.
The program automatically calculates the dead load for the beam and adds it
as the first component of the generated load, called Beam dead load.

This load needs to be applied equally to the two temporary support locations.
The UDL intensity is 12.67853kN/m which applies a total load of 266.24913kN
to the beam. Since the program cant apply a point load to a beam, this needs

5-17

to be applied using two, 100mm long UDLs. The equivalent applied UDL
intensity over a 100mm length is 1331.24565kN/m.
Click on the Add Load Component button and enter the UDL Intensity Start
and End as 1331.24565kN/m. Set Start Dimension to 0.95m and the End
Dimension to 1.05m. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to -1.265 and
-1 respectively to make this an upward load and set the Component Ref. to
Left Temp Support.

Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process
(remembering to make ULS and SLS Load Factors negative), this time setting
the Start Dimension to 19.95m, the End Dimension to 20.05m and the
Component Ref. to Right Temp Support.

Finally we need to define the temporary construction load. Click on the Add
Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity Start and End as
1kN/m. Leave all the other fields at their default values and set the
Component Ref. to Temp Construction.

5-18

In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to 50 then click
OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form. The Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form will now show the total load applied by the four load
components.

Define Construction Stage 1 Loads
4. The next step is to define the loads for construction stage 1. Click on the
Loading Description drop down on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form
and select Construction Stage 1A from the list of design load cases then click
on the Generate button. The Generate Beam Loads form will now open. The
program automatically calculates the UDL intensity for the construction loads.
Click OK to close the form.
Remove Temporary Loads and Supports
5. Next we will define a load case to remove the effects of the temporary loads
and supports.
Click on the Loading Description drop down on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam
Loads form and select SDL non-structural concrete etc from the list of design
load cases then click on the Generate button. The Generate Beam Loads
form will now open.
Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as 1331.24565kN/m. Set Start
Dimension to 0.95m and the End Dimension to 1.05m. Change the ULS
and SLS Load Factors to 1.265 and 1 respectively and set the Component
Ref. to Rm Left Temp Sup.

5-19

Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process, this time
setting the Start Dimension to 19.95m, the End Dimension to 20.05m and
the Component Ref. to Rm Right Temp Sup.
Finally we need to remove the temporary construction load. Click on the Add
Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity Start and End as
1kN/m. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to -1.265 and -1
respectively and set the Component Ref. to Rm Temp Const.
In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to 50 then click
OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form. The Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form will now show the total load applied by the three load
components.

Define Surfacing and Live Loads
6. The next step is to define the SDL surfacing loads.
Click on the Loading Description drop down on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam
Loads form and select Superimposed dead load from the list of design load
cases then click on the Generate button. The Generate Beam Loads form will
now open.
Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as 2.5kN/m then click OK.
7. Next we will import some results from a separate live load analysis.
Click on the Interface button, select Direct ASCCI File Import and click OK.
Select the supplied file BS Live Loads.sld and click Open. This will import
loads into the Live load BM and Live load SF + associated BM design load
cases.
Click OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form. The program
will display the following confirmation dialog:

5-20

When you export enveloped live load results from the analysis module, it
exports the absolute values of shear, i.e. all negative shears are converted to
positive values. The dead load shears created using the Generate option in
this example are actual shears. This means the program cant add the dead
and live load shears together. By answering yes on this form, you force the
program to convert the dead load shears into absolute values so they can be
combined with the live loads.
Click on Yes to close the dialog.
Enter Temperature Profile and Shrinkage and Creep Parameters
8. We now need to create a temperature profile and enter values in the shrinkage
and shear parameters.
Click on the Calculate|Analyse... menu option to open the Pre-tensioned
Beam Analysis form. Click on the Set parameters for drop down and select
Differential temp. Appx C from the list of options.
The program will open the BS 5400 Part 2 Appendix C Temperature Profile
form and display the default positive and reverse temperature profiles.

Click on OK to use this temperature profile.
Next, click on the Set parameters for drop down and select Shrinkage and
creep from the list of options. This will open the Data for Shrinkage & Creep
form.

5-21

Set the Shrinkage strain to -0.00025, the Shrinkage before in situ cast to
20%, the Differential shrinkage strain to -0.0001 and the Creep reduction
factor to 0.43.

Click OK to save the parameters.
Tendon Optimisation
9. The next step is to design the required tendon layout.
To do this, click on the Tendon Optimisation button on the Pre-tensioned
Beam Analysis form. This will open the Tendon Optimisation form. Tick both
the Applied Load tick boxes and the Straight and Debond tick boxes. For this
example we will set the Locations / Limit field to 4. Use the default values for
all the other fields on the form.
Click on the Design Optimised Layout button. The program will now consider
a series of tendon arrangements to come up with the optimised layout for the
beam.
At the end of the optimisation, the program produces an error message and
provides a summary on the right hand side of the form.

Click OK to close the error message then click on the OK button to close the
optimisation form. Click OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form.

5-22

10. In order to resolve this error we need to change the material properties used on
the beam.
Click on the Data|Define Material Properties... to open the Define Material
Properties form. Click on the 2
nd
row in the Name column to increase the
grade of concrete for the precast beam to grade 60. Click OK on the Define
Property Details form to save the change.
Click in the 5
th
row in the Type column and select Concrete BS 5400 from
the list. Enter a value of 45N/mm
2
in the Characteristic Strength fcu field for
the strength at transfer.
Close both forms (using both OK buttons to ensure that the changes are
saved) then click on the Data|Define Beam... menu to open the Pre-tensioned
Beam Definition form. Click on the Define drop down and select Section from
the list to open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form. Change the
Transfer Property for the PC beam to grade 45 concrete. You will see the Final
Property is already set to grade 60 concrete.
Click on the OK button twice to close both forms then click on the
Calculate|Analyse... menu to re-analyse the beam.
11. Click on the Tendon Optimisation button then click on the Design Optimised
Layout button to re-run the tendon optimisation with the new material
properties. This time the tendon optimisation will complete without an error
message. A small summary is produced at the bottom of the report at the end
of the tendon optimisation process. Click OK to close the Tendon
Optimisation form.
Design for Shear
12. The next step is to check the beam for shear.
Click on the Analyse for drop down and select Shear force + BM 1 load comb.
1. You will see that the beam just fails at the left hand end.

In order to prevent this failure we need to change the shear resistance of the
beam. To do this, click OK to close the analysis form then click on the
Data|Define beam... menu item. Click on the Define drop down and select
Section from the list of options. In the Shear resistance section of the form,

5-23

change Width to 300mm. This is roughly the width of the beam where the
shear stress is at its maximum.
Click on the OK button twice to close both forms then click on the
Calculate|Analyse... menu to re-analyse the beam. You will see that the
beam now passes when the Shear force + BM 1 load comb. 1 load case is
applied.

Shear Link and Transverse Reinforcement Requirements
Now that the beam design passes for the shear force case, the next step is to
design the shear links in the beam. We are going to design the shear links at 5
locations. These are:
0m
5.25m
10.5m
15.75m
21m

Click on the Results button to view the shear calculations. Scroll down to the
bottom of the results to see summary of link requirements.

5-24

Use the arrows by the Design section for results printout field to select point 1
at 0m then click on the Results button. Scroll to the bottom of the results and
look at the table for link arrangement.

From the table we can see that there are several possible arrangements that
could be used. The best arrangement would be 2 legs of 12mm links at
100mm spacing.
13. We can repeat this for the other locations to get the following results:
Location Diameter Legs Spacing
0m 12mm 2 100mm
5.25m 6mm 4 150mm
10.50m 6mm 2 150mm
15.75m 6mm 4 150mm
21m 12mm 2 100mm

14. Finally we will use the results to define the transverse reinforcement
requirement to resist longitudinal shear at shear plane 2-2.
Click on the Analyse for field and select Longitudinal shear 1 load comb 1
from the drop down list. Set the design section location to the left hand end
(point 1) and click on the Results button. Scroll down to the bottom of the
results so you can see the reinforcement requirement across shear plane 2-2:

Repeat this for the other locations then close the results viewer and click OK
to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form.
15. When the analysis form is open the results graphs can be displayed in a 3D
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window:

5-25

window.
16. Click on the File|Save As... menu item. Set the file name to My BS Example
5_2.sam and click on the Save button.
Summary
In this example we have taken a prestressed beam created in a previous example
and applied load to it for a series of design load cases. We have also carried out a
tendon optimisation then checked the beam for a series of design criteria.

5-26

5-27

5.3. Reinforced Concrete Beam Design
Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete; Modify length; Import loads; ULS design; Minimise
reinforcement; Curtail bars; SLS design; Shear link design; BS 5400 Part 4 Table 5
Outline
A reinforced concrete beam is shown below:

The dimensions of the original beam can be found in Example 4.5.
The beam will be modified to reduce the length from 30m to 29.82m. We will then
import some loads from an external file and carry out a detailed design of the beam in
the following order:
1. Check the beam at ULS for both sagging and hogging cases.
2. Modify the reinforcement to allow the beam to pass.
3. Curtail the reinforcement and remove bars to minimise the quantity of
reinforcement whilst still passing for both sagging and hogging at ULS.
4. Design the shear links
5. Check the beam at SLS for both sagging and hogging cases.
6. Check the beam with the concrete f
cu
set to 60% in accordance with Table 5 of
BS 5400 Part 4.
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file BS Example 4_5.sam in section 4.5.
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Reinforced Concrete Beam
Design with a sub-title of Example 5.3. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.

5-28

Modify Beam Length
The beam file which was put together in Example 4.5 is 30m long as a generic
beam for use on a scheme. In this example we are going to use the same
beam profile for a span of 29.82m.
3. Click on the Data|Define Beam... menu to open the Reinforced Concrete
Beam Definition form. Change the value in the Beam span field from 30m to
29.82m and press Enter on the keyboard. The program opens the following
confirmation form:

Click Yes and the program will modify the length of the beam and move the
soffit locations to the same proportional position. Click OK to close the beam
definition form.
Import Loads
4. Next we will import some loads created in a line beam analysis. Click on the
Data|Define Loading... menu to open the Define Reinforced Concrete Beam
Loads form.
5. Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form. Make sure the Direct
ASCII File Import option is selected and click OK. The program will open a
file browser. Select the file BS 29.82m beam right span.sld and click on the
Open button.

The program will import the loads in the file into the following design load
cases:
Construction stage 1
Superimposed dead load
Live load BM load combination 1 (ID 1)
Live load BM load combination 1 (ID 2)
Live load SF + associated BM load combination 1

5-29

You can review the loads imported from the file by selecting the appropriate
design load case from the Loading Description drop down list. Click OK to
close the Define Reinforced Concrete Beam Loads form.
Design for ULS
6. Now that we have the loads imported into our beam, we will carry out a design
check for ULS. Click on the Calculate|Analyse... menu item to open the
Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form.

7. Click on the Analyse for drop down and select BM for live load 1 load comb 1
from the list. Make sure the Limit State option is set to Ultimate. The
graphical results show the design moment line in green which means the beam
design passes for the sagging case. Looking at the top right of the form, we
can see that this design of beam requires 26.49 tonnes of reinforcement.

8. Next we will check for the hogging case. Click on the Analyse for drop down
and select BM for live load 2 load comb 1 from the list. The graphical results
will update and show the following plot:

5-30

The design moment curve is shown in red, indicating that the design has failed
for the hogging case.
9. We now need to modify the reinforcement to get the beam to pass the hogging
case.
Click anywhere on the beam side elevation to open the Define RC Beam
Reinforcement form together with the associated graphics windows. We will
start by adding a third layer to reinforcement to the top of the beam.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form. This will open the Define
Reinforcement form.
Diameter field to 40mm then click on the left hand face and the lower middle
face on the top of the section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form.
Set the covers to 230mm and 50mm then click OK.

Next, click on the lower middle face on the top of the section and the right hand
face and set both covers to 50mm and 230mm then click OK.

10. The next step is to define the remaining bars in the new layer.

5-31

Of bars to 15 then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and

Click OK to close the Define Reinforcement form then click OK on the
warning message which appears. Finally, click OK to close the Define RC
Beam Reinforcement form and return to the beam analysis.
11. The graphical results show that the beam still fails for the hogging case.

This means we need to add a further layer of reinforcement at the top of the
beam.
12. Click anywhere on the beam side elevation to open the Define RC Beam
Reinforcement form together with the associated graphics windows. Click on
the + button near the bottom of the form. This will open the Define
Reinforcement form.
Diameter field to 40mm then click on the left hand face and the lower middle
face on the top of the section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form.
Set the covers to 320mm and 50mm then click OK.

5-32

Next, click on the lower middle face on the top of the section and the right hand
face and set both covers to 50mm and 320mm then click OK.

13. The next step is to define the remaining bars in the new layer.
Of bars to 15 then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and
Click OK to close the Define Reinforcement form then click OK on the
warning message which appears. Finally, click OK to close the Define RC
Beam Reinforcement form and return to the beam analysis.
The graphical results show that the beam now passes for the hogging case.

5-33

14. The next stage in the design is to optimise the reinforcement arrangement to
reduce the quantity of steel. This initial, working arrangement has 35.32
tonnes of reinforcement. We can see that there is excess capacity in the
sagging case so we need to reduce the quantity of sagging reinforcement.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the top layer of sagging reinforcement
(this will turn the bars red). Click on the - button near the bottom of the form.
This will remove the layer of bars.

Click OK on both the Define Reinforcement and Define RC Beam
Reinforcement forms. Checking the results for both sagging and hogging
cases, we can see the beam still passes and the reinforcement quantity has
reduced to 30.9 tonnes.

5-34

15. Now that we have a better arrangement of reinforcement, we can begin to
curtail the bars to reduce the required reinforcement still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the top row of sagging reinforcement.
Click on the Edit reinforcement attributes button near the bottom of the form.
This will open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes form. Tick the Modify check
box and enter proportions of 0.4 and 0.85 in the form.

Click OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again. The
beam still passes and the reinforcement has been reduced to 28.47 tonnes.

16. We can reduce the sagging reinforcement still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the middle row of sagging
reinforcement. Click on the Edit reinforcement attributes button near the
bottom of the form. This will open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes form. Tick
the Modify check box and enter proportions of 0.2 and 1 in the form. Click
OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again. The beam still
passes and the reinforcement has been reduced to 27.58 tonnes.

5-35

17. Next we will truncate the hogging reinforcement.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the bottom row of hogging
reinforcement and click on the Edit reinforcement attributes button near the
bottom of the form. This will open the Set Reinforcement Attributes form. Tick
the Modify check box and enter proportions of 0 and 0.1 in the form. Click
OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again. The beam still
passes and the reinforcement has been reduced to 23.61 tonnes.

18. We can reduce the hogging reinforcement still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the second from bottom row of
hogging reinforcement and click on the Edit reinforcement attributes button
near the bottom of the form. This will open the Set Reinforcement Attributes
form. Tick the Modify check box and enter proportions of 0 and 0.2 in the
form then click OK.
Draw a box around the next row of reinforcement upwards and change the
locations along the beam to 0 and 0.35. Click OK on both forms and
check the results for both cases again. The beam still passes and the
reinforcement has been reduced to 17.21 tonnes.

19. Now that the beam has been optimised for both hogging and sagging ULS load
cases, the next step is to design the shear links in the beam.
Click on the Analyse for drop down and select Shear force + BM 1 load comb
1 from the list. The plot of results will now show the design shear together
with the maximum allowable shear force and the shear force resistance with
nominal links.

5-36

Click on the Results button to view the shear calculations. Scroll down to the
bottom of the results to see summary of link requirements.

Looking at the results, we can see that there are 5 areas in which we need to
carry out link design. These are:
0m to 2m
2m to 3m
3m to 10m
10m to 27m
27m to 29.82m

The best way to carry out this design is to introduce additional points of interest
(POI) along the length of the beam.
20. Close the Results Viewer and go to the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis
form and click on the Points of Interest button. This will open the Add Points
of Interest form. Click on the point after the location where you want to insert a
POI and press the + button near the bottom of the form. This will add a new
point half way between the two points either side of it. The new point will have
a ticked tickbox next to it. Double click in the Position along span column and
enter a value of 2m. The new point will now be shown in the table.

5-37

Repeat this process to add points at 3m, 10m and 27m then click on OK to
close the form.
21. Use the arrows by the Result Point of Interest field to select point 3 at 2m then
click on the Results button. Scroll to the bottom of the results and look at the
table for link arrangement.

From the table we can see that there are several possible arrangements that
could be used. The best arrangement would be 4 legs of 12mm links at
125mm spacing.
22. We can repeat this for the other POI locations to get the following results:
Location Diameter Legs Spacing
0m 10mm 4 125mm
2m 12mm 4 125mm
3m 12mm 6 75mm
10m 12mm 6 100mm
27m 12mm 6 125mm
29.82m 10mm 4 125mm

23. We also need to check the beam at Serviceability.
Go to the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form and click on the Analyse
for drop down and select BM for live load 1 load comb 1 from the list. Make
sure the Limit State option is set to Serviceability. The graphical results show

5-38

the design stress line in green which means the beam design passes for the
sagging case. Repeating this for the hogging case shows that the beam still
passes.

24. Finally, we need to check the beam with the concrete f
cu
set to 60% in
accordance with Table 5 of BS 5400 Part 4.
Click OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form then click on
the Data|Define Material Properties menu. This will open the Define Material
Properties form. Click in the Name column on the first row of the table to open
the Define Property Details form. Change Characteristic Strength, fcu to
24N/mm
2
then click OK twice to close both forms.
Click on the Calculate|Analyse menu to open the Reinforced Concrete Beam
Analysis form. You will see that the beam still passes for hogging at SLS. Set
the Limit State option to Ultimate to confirm that it also passes.
Change the load case to BM for live load 1 load comb. 1. The beam passes
for sagging at ULS. Set the Limit State option to Serviceability to confirm that
it also passes.
Finally, change the load case to Shear force + BM 1 load comb 1. Once
again, the beam passes.
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window:

5-39

window.
26. Click OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form then click on
the File|Save As... menu item. Set the file name to My BS Example 5_3.sam
and click on the Save button.
Summary
In this example we have changed the length of a standard beam to fit a specific
structure then carried out a detailed design. During the design process we have
modified the reinforcement by adding, removing and curtailing bars. We have also
checked the design in accordance with Table 5 of BS 5400 Part 4.

5-40

5-41

5.4. Post-tensioned Beam Design
Subjects Covered:
Post Tensioned; Pre-stressed; Tendon definition; Prestress losses;
Outline
A Composite post-tensioned concrete beam is shown below.

The dimensions and details for the construction of this beam can be found in Example
4.6.
The nominal loads applied to the beam will be:
1. Dead load using a density of 24kN/m3
2. Superimposed Dead Load of 6.0kN/m
3. A live load UDL of 12.4kN/m.
4. For Shear a UDL of 10Kn/m with a point load of 200kN at mid span
During erection, tensile stresses will develop in
the bottom of the beam so it will be necessary
to pre-stress the beam with single strand,
straight tendons, placed with the centres of the
tendons at 60mm above the soffit of the beam.
These tendons will be grade 1670 and will be
initially stressed to 80% f
pu
. Each added tendon
will have an area of 139mm
2
. Although we can
only model these tendons as post-tensioned
the various parameters such as duct diameter
and various loss values can be adjusted to give
a very good approximation of the pre-tensioned
effects.
The main profiled tendon will have a 3mm anchorage slip when fully stressed and the
jack friction is estimated at 10kN. For the design situation considered the creep loss

5-42

and shrinkage loss in this tendon is calculated to be 10% and 3.333% respectively.
All other values are assumed as default values
The construction sequence will be as follows.
1. The precast beam is cast with the duct and a number of single strand pre-
stressing tendons.
2. Mark the tendons as grouted (even though the duct diameter is set to zero) to
make them bonded tendons.
3. The beam is placed on its bearings and the profiled tendon is stressed to 50%
to resist the moments induced by the insitu slab construction.
4. The insitu concrete is cast.
5. The profiled tendon is re-stressed to 100%.
6. The profiled tendon is grouted before the application of SDL and live loading.
Determine the number of pre-stressing tendons required to ensure the tensile
stresses are below the max allowable values at all stages and check both ULS and
SLS conditions in all cases, including the application of live load.
Procedure
General & Additional Material
1. Start the program and set the project template to Version 6 Examples from
the Options|Project Templates menu item.
2. Open the data file BS Example 4_6.sam created in section 4.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Post Tensioned concrete
Beam with a sub-title of Example 5.4 Beam Design. Also add your initials to
the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data|Define
Material Properties... Add an additional prestress strand material as grade
1670 and set the initial Prestess Force to 79% in the same way as described in
example 4.6. It is set to 79 rather than 80 as we are assuming a 1% loss due to
elastic shortening during transfer and this loss is not represented in a post
tensioned beam.
Extra Tendon Data
5. Open the Post-tensioned Concrete Beam Definition form using the
Data|Define Beam... menu item and in the Define: field select Tendons.
By considering the applied moments at mid span, it is estimated that two
tendons will be required to resist the self weight of the beam.

5-43

6. Add two additional tendons by clicking on the + button at the bottom of the
table to open the Define Tendon Locations form. Set the No. of tendons and
No. of strands to 1, the Area of strand to 139mm
2
and Duct Diameter and
Strand Offset to 0. Click twice at different locations on the graphics screen at
approximately 60mm above the soffit of the beam, once to the left of the y axis
and again on the right. The coordinates of these two additional tendons can
then be edited to (-100,60) and (100,60) before closing this form with the OK
button.
7. If necessary, the prestressing properties for these tendons may need to be
changed to Grade 1670. Window round the two additional tendons on the
graphics screen, in the normal way, and click on the button near the bottom
of the form. Set the Tendon property: to grade 1670 in the displayed form
before closing it with the OK button.

8. To change the prestressing loss details for these tendons click on the Define
Profile button. Click on Tendon: 2 in the table and open the Loss of Prestress
tab. Set all fields to 0 except the Relaxation Loss: which should be set to
1.25% but choose No to All when the program asks if you wish to apply this
to all tendons.

Repeat this for Tendon: 3.
9. For Tendon: 1 set the Anchorage Slip: to 3mm and the Jack Friction: to
10kN, while the Duct Friction Coefficient and Wobble factors remain as

5-44

default. The Concrete Creep Loss: should be set to 9.9% and the Shrinkage
Loss: to 3.333%, while the Relaxation Loss: remains at 2.5%.
10. Close all forms in sequence with the OK button.
Define Loading Effects
11. The UDL value for the precast dead load and the insitu dead loads can be
determined using the area of each component and the density of 24kN/m3. To
obtain these areas open up the Analysis form using the Calculate|Analyse
menu item, set the Analyse for: field to Geometry Check & Section Properties
and click on the Results button. The data displayed shows that the PC Beam
area is 283250mm
2
and the insitu slab area is 392800mm
2
. This equates to
UDLs of 6.798kN/m and 9.427kN/m respectively. Close the Results Viewer
and Analysis form.
12. Open the Define Post-tensioned Beam Loads form using the Data|Define
Loading... menu item and set the Loading Description to Construction
Sequence Loading. The I.D. should be 1. This will represent the self weight
simply supported moments of the precast beam.
13. Use the Generate button (clicking Yes on the confirm message) to open the
Generate Beam Loads data form. The UDL intensity of 6.798 is entered for
both ends of the beam and all other data remains the default as this is a simply
supported beam. The form is closed using the OK button allowing the table
of effects for this loading to be filled in automatically.
14. For the insitu dead loads change the I.D. to 2 by clicking on the + button
next to the I.D field and repeat the procedure above using a load intensity of
9.427. (Remember to click OK to close the form to ensure that changes are
saved).
15. For SDL select Superimposed dead load from the Loading Description: field
(I.D. set to 1) and use the Generate button to enter the load intensity of
6.0kN/m.
16. For live load select Live Load BM from the Loading Description: field (I.D. set
to 1 and Load Combination: set to 1) as it is the bending moments and bending
stresses that will be designed for. Use the Generate button to enter the load
intensity of 12.4kN/m.
17. For the Shear Force design case select Live Load SF + associated BM from
the Loading Description: field (I.D. set to 1 and Load Combination: set to 1).
Use the Generate button to enter the load intensity of 10kN/m and in this
form click on the + Add Load Component button to add a component for the
point load. In this component tab enter an intensity of 2000kN/m at start and
end, but set the Dimensions: to 9.95 and 10.05 respectively. Set the Beam
span equally divided by field to 50 and then close the form with the OK
button.

5-45

18. Close the Define Post-tensioned Beam Loads form using the OK button.
Define Construction Sequence
19. Select the Data|Define Construction Sequence menu item. This will open
the Define Construction Sequence form.
20. There are 6 stages to define so click on the + button at the bottom of the table
until there are 6 stages shown.
21. The first stage is pre-stressing the precast beam so in the first row of the table
set Span-Segment to 1-1, Section Stage to Precast, Action to Stress, % to
100, Tendons to 2,3, Action to Add and Loading to Construct. Seq. Loading
1.
22. Change the data in the other rows to reflect the stages in construction as
shown below:

23. This means that stresses and moments can be checked at each of these
stages as well as the maximum live load bending case.
24. Close the Define Construction Sequence form using the OK button.
Design Checks
25. Open the Post-tensioned Concrete Beam Analysis form using the
Calculate|Analyse... menu item and select Construction Sequence 1 in the
Analyse for: field. With the Limit state radio control set to Ultimate it can be

5-46

seen in the graphics display that the design moment exceeds the permissible
sagging moment in the middle of the beam. If the Limit State: control is set to
Serviceability then the mid span stresses slightly exceed the tensile stress
limit at mid span. This indicates that there is insufficient pre-stress.

26. Click on the Green elevation of the beam in the graphics and this will directly
open the Define Post-Tensioned Tendons: form. Add a third straight pre-stress
tendon, mid way between the other two, with exactly the same properties and
parameters by following the same procedure as in section 5... above. When
the Define Post-Tensioned Tendons: form is closed it will take you back to the
analysis but the effect of the new tendon will not be evident as it has not been
included in any construction stage.
27. Close the analysis form and open the Construction Sequence form as defined
in 19 above. Add the new tendon to stages 1 and 2 and close the form using
the OK button.
28. When we return to the analysis form for Construction Sequence 1 we now
have plenty of capacity at Ultimate limit state and the mid span stresses for
SLS are positive. The top stresses are slightly negative at the ends but this
can be catered for with appropriate debonding.
29. Check all construction sequence cases 1 to 6 now show acceptable stresses
and moment capacity.
30. The BM for live load case is also acceptable for both ULS and SLS checks.

31. The Analysis for shear force shows that the shear capacity at the ends of the
beams is below the design shear.

5-47

32. The drop in shear capacity at the ends of the beams is due to the calculated
breadth of the beam at these locations. As the tendon duct moves into the web
the section breadth is calculated as the effective breadth at the tendon level
minus 2/3rds of the diameter of the grouted duct (as specified in BS5400). The
tendon capacity also falls off due to the vertical component of the tendon force.
33. By inspection of the bending results, there is excessive capacity at the beam
ends so it would be preferable to move the tendon ends down by 300mm which
will reduce the vertical component and reduce the section with the tendon in
the web to a small length. In reality the end diaphragm will cover this area.
34. To achieve this click on the beam elevation to open the Define Post-Tensioned
Tendons form and click on the Define Profile button. Click on the Profile tab
of the resultant form and set the dZ values of both ends of Tendon: 1 to
-0.3 before closing both forms with the OK button which will take us back to
the Analysis form.
35. The Shear capacity at the beam ends is now greater than the applied shear but
shear reinforcement above nominal will have to be provided

36. And an inspection of all other design cases provides an adequate design.
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window (see
below).

5-48

window.
38. Click on File|Save as... menu item and save the file as My BS Example
5_4.sam.
Summary
In this example we have added tendons to an existing post-tensioned beam, applied
load to the beam then defined the construction sequence for the beam. Once this
was done we went on to carry out a series of design checks for the beam to confirm
that it is an adequate design.

6-1

6. Analysis - Model Definition

Contents
6.1. Line Beam Definition .................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2. Portal Frame Definition .............................................................................................. 6-7
6.3. 3D Truss footbridge ................................................................................................. 6-19
6.4. Simple Grillage ......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.5. Finite Element Slab .................................................................................................. 6-47

6-2

6-3

6.1. Line Beam Definition
Subjects Covered:
Line Beam Analysis; Line Beam Geometry; Drop In Span; Parametric Shapes
Outline
It is required to form a five span line beam analysis model to represent a reinforced
concrete T beam, with dimensions as shown below. The first span is an 8m
cantilever and the third span consists of two cantilevers at each end supporting a 15m
drop in span. The beam is constructed of grade 50 concrete (Elastic modulus
34kN/mm
2
).
To model the drop in span we specify the line beam to have 7 spans and specify the
supports at the internal bearing locations accordingly.

Each span is split into 1m segments which will define the results output locations.
Once the beam is defined, produce a full data summary report in pdf format and save
the data file for use in another example.
Procedure
Version 6 Examples using the Options |Project Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure
Create line beam geometry
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Line Beam to start a line beam
analysis.
4. Set the title to 5 Span Line Beam with a sub title of Example 6.1 using the
Data |Titles menu option. Also set the Job Number: to 6.1 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field.
5. Click on the Structure Geometry icon to open the Line Beam Geometry form.
6-4

6. Set the Number of Spans: field to 7 and press the Enter key. The graphics will
update to show the new configuration.
7. In the table, double-click on the Span Length field in row 1 and type in a value
of 8. Enter appropriate span lengths in the other rows as shown in the table
below. (rows 7&8 are hidden but the last span length is 10)

8. Specify the support conditions such that all span ends are fixed in
displacement but free to rotate (the default), but then free the displacement at
the end of the cantilever (row 1) and each end of the drop in span (rows 4 & 5).
This will be shown in the graphics as:

9. Finally, change the value in Divide Shortest Span into: to 5, which will split the
smallest span into 1m segments. The longest span is updated automatically.
Close the form using the OK button.
6-5

Define Section Properties
10. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the
screen to Section Properties by selecting the button at
the bottom.
11. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the
selection list as shown and pick Parametric Shapes. In
the Parametric Shape Properties form change the Shape
Reference: to T and then set height: to 1000mm, width:
to 1500mm, web thickness: to 500mm and :flange
thickness to 200mm.

12. Enter a Description: as RC T Beam, Elastic Modulus: as
34kN/mm
2
and a Shear Modulus: of 14.2kN/mm
2
to
reflect that we are using grade 50 concrete.
13. To assign this property to all members in the structure
draw a window round the whole structure in the Structure
Graphics screen (Click at the top LH corner and release,
move the cursor to the bottom RH corner and click again).
The selected Beams turn red.
14. Close the Parametric Shape Properties form using the OK button
15. Use the menu item File |Save as... to save the data file with a name of My BS
Example 6_1.sst.
Summary
A Line Beam model is very easy to put together as the geometry is very simple. In
this way it is a very efficient method of analysis for preliminary design.

6-6

However, it must be remembered that a line beam only considers in plane vertical
displacement and rotation about a perpendicular axis (ie. dz and ry degrees of
freedom). This will of course mean that only two member actions are valid at the ends
of each beam segment (ie. moment MY and shear FZ).
If torsions, axial forces or transverse bending effects are significant in a structure then
a line beam will not represent them.

6-7

6.2. Portal Frame Definition
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D Frame; Sub Model Planes; Drawing 2D Members; Splitting
Members; Importing Sections; Copying Properties; Filtering; Rotating Local Axes;
Copying 2D Sub Models; Renumbering Joints; Support Conditions; Member Release
of Degrees of Freedom; User Notes; Data Reports
Outline
It is required to form a two storey, single bay, building frame analysis model as shown
below. Each storey is 8m high and the column spacing is 10m. All joints have full
connection except at the ends of the first floor beams, where there is full shear and
axial continuity, but no moment connection. All frame members are constructed with
grade 355 structural steel (Elastic modulus 205kN/mm
2
, Shear modulus
78.85kN/mm
2
).
To model the beam column joint accurately we will place a model node at the face of
the column as well as the column centre. The short member between these nodes
will have stiff properties (say 10
3
greater than the actual beam). This will ensure that
the moment releases applied to the ends of the actual beam are in the correct
location.

Each beam and column is split into 10 segments which will define the results output
locations.
The beam and column sections have been defined in the section module and are
loaded as external files.
6-8

Once the frame is defined, produce a full data summary report in pdf format and save
the data file for use in another example using the name Two Span Single Bay
Frame.sst.
Procedure
Setup & Geometry
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New| Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Set the title to 2 Storey Single Bay Frame with a sub title of Example 6.2
using the Date |Titles menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by:
field.
5. In the Structure navigation window click on the button
and select 2D Sub Model from the selection list. This will
create an entry in the navigation tree and open the 2D Sub
Model Plane form.
6. We wish to define this frame in the XZ plane, so click on the
button and you will notice the axes change in the
graphics. Close the Sub Model Plane form with the OK
button.
7. To create the structural members open the Sub Model
Members form by clicking on the element in
the Structure tree.
8. To create a member we simply draw it in the graphics window
making use of an appropriate snap mode. Initially click on the
icon in the graphics toolbar.
9. Then click on the origin of the graphics screen followed by another click 8m in
the vertical direction (Count the grid points as the Snap: mode should be set to
grid).

6-9

10. If the member is drawn wrongly, simply click on the Edit Members item in the
Member Tasks list and change the coordinates in the displayed form before
closing this form with the OK button.
11. To draw the second column we use the Copy Member(s) item in the Member
Task list and enter a translation vector of (10,0) before clicking on the Apply
button.

12. Now draw the transverse beam between the top two nodes of the column by
following the same procedure as in 8 above, but setting the Snap: mode on the
graphics toolbar to Node in Plane.
13. We now need to split the two columns into 10 segments each. This is done by
using Split Beam Element... in the Member task list.
14. In the Split Beam Element form set Split specified beam element by/ specified
division by clicking on the appropriate radio button controls. And then set the
Number of new elements to 10.
15. Click on the leftmost column in the graphics (turns red) and then click on the
Apply button to see the 10 segments generated in the graphics window.
16. Repeat 14 for the rightmost column.
17. Now click on the beam, but set Number of new elements to 3 (hit enter to
update the table) and change the segment lengths in the table to 0.15m,
9.7m and 0.15m. Click on the Apply button to split the beam.
6-10

18. Now click on the middle segment of the beam and split this into 8 equal length
segments using the Apply button. Close the Split Beam Element form with the
OK button. Use the Fit View icon on the graphics toolbar to fill the graphics
screen with the structure.

Section Properties
We are now going to define and assign some section properties to the
structure so far.
19. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button and change
the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on at
the bottom of the window.
6-11

20. Click on the button and choose Design Section
from the list of options. This will display the Import file
form in which the Browse... button should be clicked.
Select the file called BS Example 6_2 Beam
Section.sam in the file browser and Open this file.
21. The graphics will now have two parts to the window
the first part the structure and the second part the
section.
22. Using the right mouse button in the graphics area, a
number of tab and tile options can be selected to
customise the layout of the window panes. Set it to Tile
Vertically. Use this if the section is not shown.

23. In the structure graphics, use the toolbar button to
obtain a view on the xz plane and then window round the
horizontal beam elements (using a left mouse click at the
top left hand corner , releasing the button and moving the cursor to the bottom right
corner and clicking again) taking care not to select any of the column members. The
selected members will turn red.
24. Before closing the Import File form with the OK button, change the description
to Beam section 686x254x152 by selecting it from the drop down list.

6-12

25. Repeat 20 & 24 but import the file called BS Example 6_2 Column
Section.sam and change the Description: to be Column section
305x305x158.
26. To select the column members, window round the whole structure and when
the Confirm window asks whether the beam elements should be overwritten
answer No to All. Close the Import File form in the normal way.
Modify Section Properties
As described in the outline we now need to enhance the stiffness of the short
elements at the ends of the beam. To do this we copy the standard beam
property, increase the elastic and shear modulus and then overwrite the
property of these elements with the new property.
27. Right mouse click over the beam section property in the navigation window and
select copy from the popup menu. This will create a new property and open
the data form (Import data file form) allowing changes to be made. Change
both elastic modulus and shear modulus by increasing them by a factor of
1000 and then changing the Description to Stiff.

28. To assign this property to the two short beam elements it is necessary to switch
on the node markers and zoom in to each of the top corners. To switch on
node markers use the orange General button at the right of the graphics
window and tick the Show Nodes option.

6-13

29. To zoom in, place the cursor over one of the corners and either use the mouse
scroll wheel or click on the graphics toolbar button several times. When the
short beam element is clear, click on it to assign the stiff property (agreeing to
overwrite the existing property).
30. Repeat this for the other corner and then close the Import File form.
Local Axes
The section properties defined are related to a certain set of axes and these
must be consistent with the local axes of the beam elements. The YY axis of
the sections is the horizontal axis parallel to the flanges, so the local y axis of
all the beam and column members must be perpendicular to the plane of the
frame. To check this we can turn on the local axis display using the orange
General button on the graphics window and tick the Local Axes box.
The red axis is the YY axis so, it can be seen that the column members are
orientated in the wrong way. Additionally, if we want the bending moment
diagrams to show sagging moments always on the inside of the frame then the
local Z axis should always be pointing to the outside of the frame. This means
the local axis system of the members should be rotated to correct this.
31. To do this the leftmost column members should be rotated by 90 degrees and
the rightmost by -90 degrees. This can be done by changing the Navigation
window to Structure and using the Add button to open Advanced beam Set
|Local Axes. In the resulting form, Twist: should be set to 90 degrees and
then the leftmost column selected graphically (to do this use the following
procedure:
a. Select the filter toolbar button on the graphics screen
b. Click on De-select all in the selection tasks
c. Set the Select By: field to Section Property
d. Available groups Column Section ... sent to selected groups using
the> button.
e. OK
f. Window round the leftmost column
g. Set the name of the Advanced Beam Set to Twist 90
h. OK
32. Add a second Advanced beam Set |Local but set the Twist: to -90. Change
the name of this property to Twist -90. The current filter will allow the
windowing around just the right column without selecting any beams.
33. Click on the small arrow next to the filter and select Select all to remove the
filter. It can be seen that all the y axes (red) are now perpendicular to the
plane of the frame and all the z axes are pointing to the outside of the frame.
6-14

Copying Members
34. The single storey can now be copied to create the second storey. To do this
we open the Define Sub Model Members form by clicking on the Sub Model
Members entry in the navigation window. Select all the members by first getting
focus on the table by clicking on the first member in the list and then use the
keyboard to press the <Ctrl> and <A> keys together. Click on Copy Member(s)
in the Members Tasks list to open the Copy Member Selection form and enter
a Translation vector of (0m, 8m) before clicking on the Apply button and then
the OK button to close the forms.

35. In the Graphics window click on the toolbar icon to fit the structure to the
window. Switch off the local axis display using the orange General button.
Renumbering Nodes
Because the structure has been created by splitting members and then copying
the node and member numbers do not form a logical pattern. These next steps
are not absolutely necessary but it makes the reading of output tables a bit
easier. We will now renumber the nodes in a more logical manner.
Required Column Numbering

Required Beam Numbering

36. Open the Joint Details form from the Navigation window and change the
graphics view to an XZ view by clicking on the toolbar icon .
6-15

37. From the toolbar open the filter form using the button , Deselect all then
Select By Section Property, choosing the beam section from the list and
moving it to the Selected Groups with . Click on the Save in Member Set
Tasks and enter a name of Beams Only before closing the Save Member
Selection form with OK. Now close the Filter form with OK.

38. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by Z and Then by X
(both ascending). Close this form with OK
39. Now click on Renumber in the Joint Tasks List. In the Renumber form set the
Renumber Range to All in Filter and the Start Number to 101before clicking on
the Apply button and then OK. Scrolling up and down the list of joints, using
the arrows on the keyboard, will illustrate the joint sequence in the graphics
window.

40. We now change the Filter to show just the columns in the same way as for the
beams in 36..., saving this filter with a name of Columns Only.
41. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by X and Then by Z
(both ascending). Close this form with OK.
42. Renumber the filtered joints from 1 in the same way as in 39 above and then
close the Joint Details form with OK.
43. To do the same thing for member numbers open the Member details form by
clicking on Member Details in the Navigation Window.
44. Filter on Columns Only, using the filter drop down list displayed when the Down
Arrow next to the filter icon is clicked, and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber
6-16

the filtered members from 1. (Use Renumber from the Member Task tool
bar).
45. Filter on just Beams Only and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber the filtered
members from 41.
46. Filter on stiff elements using the Section Properties in the filter form (remember
to deselect all first).
47. There is no need to sort these members but just renumber from 101.
48. Remove all filters.
Supports
49. We now need to support the structure by fixing certain degrees of freedom of
the two joints at the base of the columns. Click on Structure in the navigation
tree and then click on the Add button. Select Supported Nodes from the list. In
the graphics toolbar change Along Span End Lines to All Joints and then
click on the two base joints in the graphics window. Both joints will have the
same fixity, so they will be Uniform. Change all degrees of freedom except
Rotation Restraint about Y to Fixed before closing the form with OK.

Release of Member Degrees of Freedom
50. The first floor beam needs to be simply supported at its ends, so it is necessary
to release the RY degree of freedom at the beam ends. In the Structure
navigation window click on and select Advanced Beam Set|Releases
from the displayed list.
51. Change the name of the releases to Free RY and change the Moment y: field
to Free. Set the filter to Beam Only and click on the two ends of the first
floor beam. A small cyan circle will appear near to the end of the member
selected.
6-17

User Notes
52. It is good practice to make a note of any modelling techniques used in your
model so that others can check it more readily. Open up the User Notes form
using the menu item Data|Notes... Enter the following text into the form:
To model the first floor simply supported beam additional nodes have
been place along the beam at the location of the column faces. This will
enable member releases to be applied at this location and model the
eccentricity of the beam reaction into the column. The short beams
connecting the beam ends to the columns will have a stiffness 1000
greater than the standard beam by adjusting the elastic and shear
modulus accordingly.
53. Close the User Notes form with OK.
Data Reports
54. Now create a data summary and save as a pdf file using the menu item
File|Data Reports... Click on the Include all button and then the View
button. In the Results Viewer form click on the tab to display the
results in pdf format. To save this as a file click on the save icon in the
toolbar and enter a name of Portal frame data report.pdf before closing the
Results Viewer and the Data Reports form.
window.
55. Finally save the data file using the menu item File|Save as... using a file name
of Two Span Single Bay Frame_BS.sst
6-18

Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Refined Analysis module and
demonstrates the basic principles of creating structural elements in a sub-model,
manipulating these elements and assigning properties. Special care is taken when
assigning properties with respect to local axis definitions. Member releases and User
notes are also introduced.
6-19

6.3. 3D Truss footbridge
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D Frame; Setting Out Objects - Arcs; Construction Lines; 2D Sub
models; Drawing 2D Beam Members; Copying Sub Models; 3D Sub Models; Drawing
3D Beam Members; Filtering; Importing sections; Parametric Shapes; Structure Plots;
Data Summary
Outline
This model is of a 55m span steel truss footbridge, curved in elevation, constructed
with square hollow sections for the bottom boom members and circular hollow
sections for the top boom and bracing. The deck spans between the two bottom
boom members and is braced diagonally with angles.

6-20

Plan of Top Boom and Bracing

Plan of Bottom Boom, Deck Members and Deck Bracing

The top boom is a 406x16 Circular Hollow section
The bottom boom is 400x400x20 Square Hollow section
All other members except the deck members and deck bracing are 324x12 Circular
Hollow section
The deck is constructed from 6mm thick steel plate, transversely stiffened with
inverted T sections welded to the underside of the plate. The T sections are
400mm deep with a 100mm wide flange and is 10mm thick throughout. They are
spaced at 500mm centres. Each transverse member in the bottom will be as shown
below.

The deck is braced diagonally as shown in the plan with 75x75x12 steel angle.
The material throughout is structural steel with an elastic modulus of 205kN/mm
2
, a
shear modulus of 78kN/mm
2
and a weight density of 78kN/m
3

Procedure
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Set the Structure Title to 3D Truss Footbridge with a sub title of Example 6.3
using the Date |Titles menu option. Set the Job Number to 6.3 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field.
6-21

Structure Geometry
The structure will be built up using four separate sub models: One for each
truss, one for the top boom connecting members and another for the deck and
bracing.
The geometry of the first truss is defined by creating two curved arcs along the
lines of the top and bottom boom and then placing vertical construction lines at
the location of each of the truss connections. Members can then be drawn on
the graphics screen by snapping to the intersection points.
The first truss can be copied to form the second truss and then connecting
members can be drawn between them.
5. To start, add a new 2D sub model to the Structure navigation window, as
described in example 6.2, with its plane in the XZ plane. Rename the submodel
to Truss 1 by clicking on it in the navigation window with the right mouse
button and choosing the Rename option which allows text to be entered in the
new name: field.

6. With the new sub model highlighted add a Setting Out Object by using the Add
button and selecting the appropriate option.
7. Click on the small + at the bottom of the Define Setting Out Object form to
add a line segment. Choose Arc from the Pick a type: list and click on the
Next button.

8. The method we will choose to define the curve of the bottom boom is 3 points
on curve click on the Next button.
6-22

9. Enter the three coordinates as (0.0, 0.0) (27.5, 0.688) (55.0, 0.0) and then click
on the Next button.

10. If the curve appears correct close the wizard with the OK button otherwise
use the Back button to re-enter incorrect data.
11. Change the Name: of the setting out object to Bottom Boom Curve before
closing the form with the OK button.

12. Repeat 6 to 11 to create a second setting out object but use coordinates (0.0,
3.375) (27.5, 5.188) (55.0, 3.375) and a Name: of Top Boom Curve.
13. Add a third setting out line 3 vertically at the left end by repeating 6 to 11 but
selecting start and end points and choosing a line rather than an arc and use
coordinates (0.0, 0.0) and (0.0, 6.0). Set the Name: to Vertical at x=0.
6-23

14. To create a series of vertical lines that will intersect with the top and bottom
booms, Add | construction lines offset parallel to SO3 with offsets as shown in
the elevation drawing above (see the introduction to Part 6.3 of this manual).
The first offset is at 2.475m. The bottom half of the table is shown below.

15. There are 20 lines in total. The lines are added by selecting the Line Type
+Offset parallel to SOL on the left of the form. Select S03 in the SOL Ref.
and enter the offset accordingly. Once all lines have been created close the
form with the OK button.

16. We will now connect the intersection points of these lines to create the beam
members of the truss. This is done by opening the Define Sub Model Members
form by clicking on the Sub Model Members item in the navigation tree.
17. Select the draw mode in the graphics toolbar to multiple members and then
set the snap mode to Intersection. Now draw the first member of the bottom
boom by clicking close to the first intersection point from the left then the third
point.
18. The remaining members of the bottom boom can be created by continuing the
clicking on intersection points five, seven ...etc until the last point is clicked
then the Esc key on the keyboard will stop the selection. Any members
drawn incorrectly can be deleted, by highlighting them in the table and clicking
on the small - button at the bottom of the table, and then drawn again
correctly.
19. This can be repeated for the top boom except the intersection numbers will be
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 21 (note how the centre member is split
in two to give a node at the apex).
6-24

20. Draw the two end vertical members using the single member draw mode
toolbar icon by clicking on the bottom intersection then the top.
21. The diagonal bracing can now be drawn as multiple members, zigzagging from
bottom to top across the truss.
22. The members of the truss can be seen more clearly in the graphics if the
construction lines and Setting out objects are turned off using the orange
Objects button on the right of the graphics screen.

23. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button.
24. Copy this complete sub-model to the second side and rename the second sub-
model Truss 2. This is done by right clicking on the first sub model entry in
the navigation window and selecting the Copy option.
25. In the Copy Sub Model form click on the Define button to define a new origin
and plane for the copied sub model.

6-25

26. Set the origin to (0.0, 3.5, 0.0) then click on the Next button.
27. The orientation of the plane does not need changing for the new sub-model so
click on Next on the next two forms then OK to confirm.
28. To actually create the new set of members click on the Next button on the
Copy Sub Model form and then OK to confirm.
29. Rename this new Submodel to Truss 2 in the same way as the first.
30. To view the two trusses in isometric click on the Structure item in the
navigation window and use the appropriate toolbar button if necessary.
31. Add a new 3D sub-model to the Structure in the navigation window and in the
graphics screen set the Draw Mode to single member . Draw the top boom
transverse connecting members one by one by clicking on the node points in
the graphics screen. The structure may need rotating into a suitable
orientation to achieve this. Panning and zooming options in the toolbar may
also benefit node selection.

32. Add the top diagonal bracing in the same way but use the multiple beam
members option , finishing with the Esc key when the last member has
been drawn.
34. Rename the 3D sub Model to Top Bracing.
35. Add an additional 3D sub-model and repeat the exercise in 31 to 34 above but
name it Bottom Bracing & Deck. The graphics orientation and zoom will need
adjusting to achieve this. Note the different layout between the top and bottom
bracing.
36. In the Navigation window +Add a Supported Nodes item to the Structure.
Change the view direction to Isometric using the graphics toolbar button.
Also in the toolbar change the Along Span End dropdown field to All Joints. In
the graphics window click on the two nodes at the near end of the bottom boom
members. This will add small square support icons at these locations and add
two entries into the supports table. Repeat this for the two nodes at the other
end of the bottom boom members.
First Click
Second Click
6-26

37. In the Define Support Nodes form set the Group Type: to Variable and then
change the X Direct Restraint to Free for the second two nodes. Close the
Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.
Section Properties
38. Change the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on
at the bottom of the navigation window.
The sections for all but the deck bracing have already been created in section
files, so these can be imported. The deck bracing is defined by a parametric
shape.
39. Using the button at the top of the navigation window select the Design
Section from the drop down list.
40. In the Import file form that will now be displayed click on the browse button and
Open the file called BS Example 6_3 324x12 CHS.sam.
41. In the graphics screen, right mouse click, and choose the option Tile Vertically
to display the section and structure as shown below.

42. In the Import file form use the drop down list in the Description: field to change
the name to 324x12 CHS. All other data will remain unchanged as this has
been defined in the section file.

43. Close the Import file form with the OK button.
44. Repeat 39 to 43 for the other sections using Section files called:
6-27

i. BS Example 6_3 400x400x20 SHS.sam
ii. BS Example 6_3 406x16 CHS.sam
iii. BS Example 6_3 Stiffened Deck Plate.sam
Use appropriate names from the Description: drop down list.
45. The last section to define is an L parametric shape for the deck bracing.
Using the button at the top of the navigation window select the
Parametric Shape option from the drop down list.
46. In the Parametric Shape Properties form set Shape Reference to L, height:
and width: to 75mm, thickness of horizontal: and thickness of vertical: to
12mm.

47. Also change the Elastic Modulus: to 205kN/mm
2
, the Shear Modulus: to
78kN/mm
2
, the Density: to 78kN/m
3
and the Description: to 75x75x12
Angle before closing the form with the OK button.
48. We now need to assign the various sections to the beam members in the
structure. Click on the 400x400x20 SHS item in the navigation window to
reopen the data form (Import file). This section needs to be assigned to the
bottom boom members of the two trusses.
This could be done by clicking on each bottom boom member individually in
the graphics window but we will use filtering and orientation to make this a little
simpler.
49. To filter the structure to just the two trusses, click on the filter button in the
graphics toolbar. Because the toolbar is shortened due to the combined
display with the section this may be hidden so the small triangle at the end of
the toolbar must be clicked to display it.
6-28

50. In the Member Selection Filter form click on the De-select all item in the
Selection Tasks. Then change Select By: to Sub Model Group. Double click
on Truss 1 and Truss 2 to move them to the Selected Groups: as shown before

51. Change the view of the structure, to view it from the South, by using the
graphics toolbar button .
52. Window round the bottom boom members as shown to assign this section to
the selected members in both trusses.

53. Close the data form for this section with the OK button then open the Section
Data form for 406x16 CHS. This can be assigned to the top boom members in
the same way as 52 above.
6-29

54. To assign the properties for the other beams we first remove the filter by
clicking on the small arrow next to the filter icon and choosing Select All from
the list.
55. Open the Section Data form for the section 324x12 CHS. Change Inclusive
Box to Excusive box in the graphics toolbar and then window round the top
boom of the structure. This is in effect a crossing box (dotted) that will select
all members wholly within the box and any member that is crossed by it.

56. It will try to overwrite the top boom members already defined but a confirmation
box allow this not to happen by selecting the No to All button.

57. It may appear in the graphics that the top boom members have been selected
(turned red) but in fact it is the bracing which is shown. This can be confirmed
by changing the view to an isometric view. Click on the OK button in the
Import File form to close it.
58. The Stiffened deck plate property and the 75x75x12 angle bracing can be
assigned in a similar way. This is done by first filtering the structure to the
Bottom Bracing & deck sub model, as described in 49 and 50 above. Then
assigning the property, member by member, by clicking on them individually in
the graphics screen. Assign 75x75x12 angle properties to the diagonal bracing
members in the bottom deck. Assign the stiffened Deck Plate properties to
other members in the bottom deck.
Section Properties
59. The structure is now completely defined. It is required to produce two graphical
reports to show the node numbering of Truss 1 and Truss 2.
60. With all data forms closed and just the graphics window visible, filter the model
to just Truss 1. This can be done by using the drop down selection displayed
when the small arrow at the right of the filter button is clicked.
61. Click on the Orange General button on the right of the graphics window and
tick the boxes for Annotate Joints, Show Nodes and Filtered Members Only.
The display can be viewed as a Print preview before printing a hard copy.
This is done by clicking on the print preview icon on the graphics toolbar .
Also, a pdf of the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the icon
at the top of the print preview window.
6-30

62. You can see that there is nothing on the preview to say what part of the
structure we are looking at. User titles can be added at this stage to highlight
this. Click on the preview menu item Format |Titles and tick the box for Show
User Title Block. A title of Truss 1 showing node numbers can then be added
in the text field before closing the Titles form with the OK button. The new
title can now be seen added to the graphics.

63. Print a hard copy, if required, using the File | Print menu item then close the
Print Preview window using File | Close.
64. Repeat 60 to 63 with the filter and titles set for Truss 2 then remove the filter on
the structure and set the viewing direction in the graphics to isometric.
6-31

65. Now create a data summary and save as a pdf file using the menu item File
|Data Reports... Click on the Include all button and then the View button.
Click OK on the warning message. In the Results Viewer form click on the
tab at the bottom of the window to display the results in pdf format.
Note that you can navigate to different sections of the report using the
hyperlinks displayed on the first page.
66. To save this as a file click on the save icon in the toolbar and enter a name
of 3D Truss Footbridge Data Summary.pdf before closing the Results Viewer
and the Data Reports form.
67. Finally save the data file using the menu item File |Save as... using a file name
of My BS Example 6_3.sst.
Summary
This example highlights the methods used to create a general 3D structure by building
up sub-models. It introduces curved setting out objects, and multiple construction
lines to define the geometry of each truss. Particular interest is paid to filtering of the
structure to simplify certain procedures.

6-32

6-33

6.4. Simple Grillage
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D ;Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports
Outline
A flat slab, 500mm thick, is shown below with setting out dimensions. It is to be
modelled as a grillage in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 and the data file

saved for analysis in section 7.

It is supported on 7 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at
midspan. The two midspan bearings are parallel to the bearings at the slab ends and
are located on a line parallel to the deck centre line but running through the bearings
either side of the centre. All supports are restrained in the vertical direction but the
centre bearing at the left end is also restrained in both horizontal directions while that
at the right end additionally restrained in the transverse direction.

The mesh will have seven longitudinal members parallel to the centre line. As there is
a reasonable skew at the left end of the slab, the transverse members will be
orthogonal to the centre line to give the most accurate results. To ease the
positioning of the central supports and to provide some form of mesh refinement at
6-34

these locations, the mesh will be generated in two. The left mesh will have 5
transverse members (in the non skewed region) and the right mesh 7 transverse
members.

The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck.
The concrete is grade 50 so it will have an elastic modulus of 34kN/mm2 and a shear
modulus of 14.17kN.mm2. In defining the section properties of the grillage members
it is important that the torsional stiffness of the slab is split evenly between the
longitudinal and transverse members.
Procedure
Setup
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New| Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Use the Date |Titles menu option to set the Structure Title to Simple Curved
Grillage Model with a sub title of Example 6.4. Set the Job Number to 6.4
and put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
6-35

Design Lines
5. In the Structure navigation window click on the button and select Design
Line from the selection list. This will create an entry in the navigation tree and
open the Define Design Line form.
A design line needs to be created to represent the
transition curve of the deck centre line.
6. Click on the small + button at the bottom of the form to
add a segment and open the Define Line Segment wizard.
7. Set the segment type to Transition Curve and click on the
Next button.
8. Set the method to start point, start angle, end angle, and
length (clothoid) then click on the Next button.
9. The Start Point: coordinates should be (0, 0), the Start
Angle: 20, End Angle: 0, and chainage Length: 25m.
Click Next.
10. Close the wizard with the OK button to enter the segment
into the Design line table.

11. Before closing the Define Design Line form with the OK button, change the
Name: to Deck CL.
Carriageway
12. A carriageway is added by clicking the button at the top of the navigation
window and selecting Carriageway.
13. In the Define Carriageway form, set the design line to Deck CL and then enter
the relevant offsets as shown below. It should be noted that a negative offset

6-36

to a design line is on the left hand side as you walk along the design line. Click
on the Fit View icon in the graphics toolbar to view the carriageway fully.

14. Close the Define Carriageway form with the OK button.
Construction Lines
To define the corners of the slab it is necessary to create some vertical
construction lines that will intersect the edges of the verge. Construction lines
are created within a sub model so a new sub model needs to be created first.
15. Use the +Add button in the navigation window to add a 2D Sub Model (GCS,
z= 0) object. This sub model is automatically in the XY plane.
16. Now right click on the new sub model in the navigation window and select
+Add | Construction Lines.
17. In the Define Construction Line form, click on the + Vertical line on easting
option and enter an Offset of 3 (click on the enter key before proceeding or
the data will be lost). The blue line can be seen graphically.
18. Repeat this with offsets of 13.5 and 24 so that there are three construction
lines in the table.
6-37

19. Close the Define Construction Line form with the OK button.
20. At this point save the data file as My BS Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst
using the main menu File | Save as...
Grillage mesh
21. We can now define the two meshes. Right mouse click on the 2D sub Model in
the navigation window and select +Add |Mesh. This will display the Define
Mesh form.
22. Set Name: to be Left Span, Mesh Type: to be Splay orthogonal to DL/SOL,
Pick: by object and Member Type: to Beam Elements.

The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
23. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.
6-38

24. Set the no. of Longitudinal members to 7 and Transverse to 5 and note the
change in the graphics. The first mesh is now complete so close the form with
the OK button.
25. Repeat 21 to 24 but set the name to Right Span and pick the boundary of the
right span. The other parameters can be copied from the first mesh by clicking
on the Copy Mesh Details From button although the number of transverse
members needs adjusting to 7.
26. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon . The mesh should now
look like the picture below:

27. As well as the main longitudinal and transverse members, the mesh generation
has created rows of members along each of the span end lines, which could
represent diaphragm members in many forms of deck. This row of members
along the middle span end line is not required so we will remove them.
This is done by first clicking on the Members Details item in the Structure
navigation window, which opens the Member Details data form.
28. We can remove each unwanted member by clicking on it in the graphics
window and then clicking the small - button at the bottom of the table.
1
2
3
4
6-39

29. Close the Member Details form with the OK button.
Span End Lines
30. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
31. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap: mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:

32. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the OK button.
Supports
33. Click the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Supported Nodes to open the Define Supported nodes form.
Each node along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line needs supporting. This is most easily achieved by
supporting all nodes under the span end lines and then removing the ones not
required.
34. In the graphics window box round the whole structure in the normal way which
will place a support on each node under the span end lines (this is because
one of the select: options in the graphics toolbar is set to Along Span End
Lines).
2
1
5
6 4
3
6-40

35. Now change the Select: option in the graphics toolbar from Create to
Remove and then click on the unwanted nodes to leave the following: ( note
that the Select: mode automatically changes to all joints to do this)

36. In the Define Supported Nodes form you will see that the Group Type: is set to
Uniform, which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the
restraints such that all degrees of freedom are Free except Direct Restraint Z,
which is Fixed.
37. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied. We also change the Select mode (in the graphics
window) to Create.
38. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on this one support node in the graphics screen
(which highlights it in the table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y
Direct Restraints to Fixed.
39. Item 38 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line, except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.

40. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.
Properties
There are only two properties to define
6-41

i. The 500mm thick slab property which can be
assigned to all members except the leftmost
diaphragm members.
ii. A parametric rectangular shape member 10mm by
10mm as a nominally low stiffness member assigned
to the leftmost diaphragm members.
41. We first change the Structure navigation window to the Section Property by
clicking on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
42. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Continuous Slab.
43. In the Continuous Slab Properties form, change the Depth: to 500, the Elastic
Modulus: to 34 and the Shear Modulus: to 14.17.

44. Window round the whole structure to assign this property to all members.
45. Close the Continuous Slab Properties form with the OK button.
46. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Parametric Shapes.
47. In the Parametric Shape Properties form, change the Shape Reference: to
Rectangle and enter a width & depth: of 10. The Elastic Modulus: should be
set to 34 and the Shear Modulus: to 14.17. Set the Description: to
Nominal.
48. Now assign this property to the leftmost line of diaphragm members by
selecting them in the graphics window (this can be done by boxing round
them). You will be asked to confirm that you wish to overwrite the properties
already assigned to these members answer Yes to All in the confirmation
form.
6-42

49. Close the Parametric Shape Properties form with the OK button.
50. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of My BS
Example 6_4.sst.
Data Reports
One of the first things we will do is create a graphical plot showing all the node
and element numbers in one of the spans
51. In the Navigation window Click on the Structure item. In the graphics window
toolbar click on the filter button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
52. Click on the Selection Task De-Select all. Change Select By: to Mesh and
then move the M1:Left Span item from the Available Group: into the Selected
Groups: by double clicking on it. Close the form with the OK button.

53. In the graphics window, click on the orange General button at the right hand
side and tick the Filter Members Only option and tick the Joint and Member
Annotation objects (this window disappears automatically when the cursor is
moved away from the form).
54. Now click on the orange Objects button and de-select everything except
Beam Elements and Supported Nodes.
55. To make the annotation readable maximise the graphics screen and fit the
structure to the window with the Fit View graphics toolbar icon . Click on the
orange General button again and click on the Format button adjacent to the
6-43

Members annotation option (if the Member annotation is not available click on
Switch to Member No.). In the Text Setup form set the vertical offset to -12
and the colour to Blue. Close the form with the OK button.
The text should now be readable.
56. To get a hardcopy plot of this click on the Print Preview graphics toolbar
icon to display the Print preview window. Use the menu item Format |
Title... to open the Titles form.
57. Tick the option for Show User Title Block and enter Joint and Member
Numbering for Span 1 in the visible text field. This preview can then be
printed on your system printer by using the File |Print menu item before
closing the preview window. Also, a pdf of the graphic window can be
generated by clicking on the icon at the top of the print preview window
58. Restore the graphics window to its normal size.
We are now going to create a report showing the calculation of the section
properties of a row of transverse members.
59. In the main menu select File |Data Reports... In the Data Reports form, select
the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that Show Details and Show
Summary are ticked.

60. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form. Set the Pick Mode: to Transverse beam and then click on
one of the transverse beams in the graphics window as shown. Switch off joint
annotation in the General tab. Click OK to close the Member Selection
Filter.
6-44

61. Click on the View button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesnt show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
62. Alternatively, if it was required to save a high quality pdf file of this report then
click on the PDF tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view can
be saved to a local pdf file.

63. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the Done button. The program can now be closed.
6-45

Summary
This simple grillage of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any grillage structure and introduces most of the tools required to create a grillage
and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the loading and
analysis of this structure in section 7 of the examples manual.
6-46

6-47

6.5. Finite Element Slab
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports
Outline
A concrete slab is shown below which has the same setting out dimensions as the
slab in example 6.4. It is to be modelled as shell finite elements in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 and the data file saved for analysis in section 7.
The slab is generally 500mm thick but has a 2.5m wide cantilever on either edge
which is 300mm thick.
It is supported on 5 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at
midspan. The layout and restraint conditions of the bearings are the same as for
example 6.4 except the four corner bearings are excluded.
Around the location of the two midspan bearings, the slab is thickened to 700mm so
as to form a column head. The lateral dimensions of this thickened slab are defined
by the mesh layout.

The mesh layout is shown below where both longitudinally and transversely, the wider
elements are twice the width of the narrower ones.
6-48

The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck, as in example 6.4
The concrete is grade 50 so it will have an elastic modulus of 34kN/mm
2
. Poissons
ratio is assumed to be 0.2.
Procedure
Setup
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file called BS
Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst created in example 6.4. This will give us
the basic setting out from which we can create the FE model.
2. Use the Date |Titles menu option to set the Structure Title to Curved FE Slab
Model with a sub title of Example 6.5. Set the Job Number to 6.5 and put
your initials in the Calculations by: field.
FE mesh
3. We can now define the two meshes. Right mouse click on the 2D sub Model in
the navigation window and select +Add |Mesh. This will display the Define
Mesh form.
4. Set Name: to be Left Span, Mesh Type: to be Splay, Pick: by object and
Member Type: to Finite Elements.
6-49

The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
5. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.

6. Set the no. of Transverse no of elements to 16 and Longitudinal to 10 and
note the change in the graphics.
7. The spacing of the elements now needs to be adjusted so that the four
elements either side of each of the central supports is half the size of the
others. Change the size field for the transverse spacing from equal size to
set size.
8. This opens the Set Transverse Size form. The spacing factors can be set to
0.5 where narrow elements are required as shown below:
1
2
3
4
6-50

9. The other values of Dimension and Proportion are updated automatically. (the
form above does not show the full table and there are three spacing factor
values of 1 that are not shown). Close this form with the OK button.
10. Set size is used again, for the longitudinal spacing, but it is only the last two
rows in the table that have the spacing factors changed to 0.5.
11. Close the Define Mesh form with the OK button.
12. Repeat steps 3 to 11 for the second mesh but set the Name to Right Span
and pick the boundary of the right span.
13. The general mesh parameters, such as spacing, can be copied from the first
mesh by clicking on the Copy Mesh Details From button and selecting that
mesh.
14. The longitudinal spacing will need adjusting for this mesh to set the narrower
elements at the start. To do this re-select set size for the Longitudinal spacing
and then set the Spacing Factors such that they are all 1, except the first two,
which will be 0.5. Close this form with the OK button.
15. Close the Define Mesh form with the OK button.
16. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon . The mesh should now
look like the picture below:

6-51

Span End Lines
17. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
18. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap: mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:

19. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the OK button.
Supports
20. Click the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Supported Nodes to open the Define Supported Nodes form.
Five nodes along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line need supporting.
21. In the graphics window toolbar set the second Select: option to All Joints and
then click on the required supported joints as shown below.

22. In the Define Supports Nodes table you will see that the Group Type: is set to
Uniform, which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the
restraints such that all degrees of freedom are Free except Direct Restraint Z,
which is Fixed.
23. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied. We also change the Select mode to Create.
2
1
5
6
4
3
6-52

24. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on it in the graphics screen (which highlights it in the
table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y Direct Restraints to
Fixed.
25. Item 24 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.

26. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.
Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 700mm thick isotropic FE property.
ii. The 300mm thick isotropic FE property.
iii. The 500mm thick isotropic FE property.
27. We first change the Structure navigation window to the Section Property by
clicking on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
28. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite
Element.
29. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 700 and the
Elastic Modulus: to 34. Note that the Shear Modulus gets automatically
updated based upon the default Poissons ratio of 0.2.
6-53

30. Change the Description: to 700mm Grade 50 Concrete.
31. Select the 32 elements in the graphics window surrounding the two central
supports as shown. This can be done by clicking on the individual elements or
windowing around the two groups. To create the window, the Shift key on the
keyboard must be held down whilst clicking the two opposing corners. Ensure
that Select: is set to Inclusive Box in the graphics window.

32. Close the Finite Element Properties form with the OK button.
33. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select Copy.
34. Set the Thickness: to 300, the Description: to 300mm Grade 50 Concrete
and then select the two rows of element adjacent to each curved edge of the
slab.
35. These elements can be selected by clicking on them individually, windowing
around them in groups or, if we know the element numbers, they can be listed
as a text sequence eg. 25 to 50.
36. To determine the element numbers they can be annotated on the graphics by
clicking on the orange General button on the right of the graphics screen and
then ticking the Annotation Member tick box (if this is not shown click on the
Hold the shift key
whilst drawing
this window
6-54

button Switch to Member No.) Zooming in and panning should show the
numbers to be:
141 to 160 1 to 20
303 to 320 177 to 194
161 162
175 176
37. To enter this text sequence click on the small text icon at the left end of the
Assigned Members: field and type in the text as shown into the text field
displayed (remembering to click OK on the sub-form).

38. Turn off the Element Annotation in the graphics window.
40. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select Copy.
41. Set the Thickness: to 500, the Description: to 500mm Grade 50 Concrete
and then select the remaining elements of the slab in the graphics window.
42. This can be done by windowing around the whole structure and then answer
No to all when asked if you wish to overwrite previous assignments
44. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of My BS
Example 6_5.sst.
6-55

Data Reports
For general data reports and graphical plots follow the procedures detailed in
previous examples (in particular example 6.4).
It is required to produce a report for the section properties of a specific finite
element to show items such as element area and aspect ratios.
45. In the main menu select File |Data Reports... In the Data Reports form, select
the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that only Show Summary is
ticked.

46. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form and click on the bottom left hand element in the display
before closing the form with the OK button.
47. Click on the View button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesnt show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
48. Alternatively, if it was required to save a high quality pdf file of this report then
click on the PDF tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view can
be saved to a local pdf file.
6-56

49. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the Done button.
Summary
This simple FE mesh of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any FE mesh structure and introduces most of the tools required to create an FE
mesh and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the
loading and analysis of this structure in section 7 of the examples manual.
7-1

7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution

Contents
7.1. Railway Loading on a Line Beam ............................................................................... 7-3
7.2. Portal Frame Loading and Analysis ......................................................................... 7-11
7.3. Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage ................................................ 7-19
7.4. Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab ........................................... 7-31

7-2

7-3

7.1. Railway Loading on a Line Beam
Subjects Covered:
Beam Loads; RU Rail Loads; Compilation; Envelopes; Bending Moments; Graphical
Results
Outline
It is required to analyse a five span line beam model as shown below and as defined
in example 6.1

The line beam represents half of a two beam, single track, railway viaduct.
It is required to determine the maximum design sagging moment in spans 2 and 4 for
the ULS combination 1 design case.
Details of the loading are as follows:
Dead load of the beam is 25kN/m
3
(
fl
= 1.15)
Ballast is 0.2m deep and has a density of 20kN/m
3
(
fl
= 1.75)
Track and sleepers 5kN/m (2.5 on each beam) (
fl
= 1.2)
Live load type RU loading assuming a dynamic amplification factor of 1.18 (
fl
=
1.4)
Five live load cases should be created for each span, one with the concentrated load
at the centre of the span and others with the concentrated load 1m & 2m either side of
this. These can then be enveloped.

Procedure
1. Start the program and then use menu item File |Open... to open the data file
with a name of BS Example 6_1.sst which was created in example 6.1. Close
the Structure overview with the Done button.
Basic Loads
2. To calculate the dead load of the beam it is necessary to determine its cross
section area so that we can apply the load as a beam load in terms of load per
unit length. To do this open up the Data Reports form using the File |Data
Reports... menu item. Tick the Include Section Property Data field and click on
the View button. This will open the Results Viewer which should show the
cross section area of the beam as 700000mm
2
. This means the UDL for dead
load will be 25 x 0.7 = 17.5kN/m. Click on EXIT to close this window and then
on the Done button to close the Data Reports form
7-4

3. Change the sub title of the example to Example 7.1 using the Date |Titles
menu option. Set the Job Number to 7.1 and put your initials in the
Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.
screen to Basic Loads by selecting the button at the
bottom.
5. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the selection
list as shown and pick Railway Load ->RU. In the RU
Loading form change the Ends Defined By: to span and
Span No: to 2. Then set Dynamic Factor, M: to 1.18 and
V: to 1.12. The Load Factor can be set to 0.5 to reflect
that only half the load will be applied to one beam. Click
OK on the warning message. Change the Concentrated
Load chainage to 20.5m.

6. Change the Name: to RU Span 2 Con central before closing the form with
the OK button.
7. In the Navigation window right mouse click on the L1 load in the list and
select Copy from the popup menu. This adds a second load case, L2, and
opens the RU Loading data form. Move the concentrated load 2m to the left by
changing the Concentrated Load Chainage: from 20.5 to 18.5. Change the
Name: to RU Span 2 Con -2 before closing the form with the OK button.

7-5

8. Repeat this for Con -1, Con +1 and Con +2 changing the concentrated
load position and name accordingly.
9. Repeat 6, 7 and 8 for span 4 (Specify Span No. 6 in the data form as this is the
virtual span number due to the drop in span) giving 10 live loads in total. (You
may have to re-select Ends Defined By: Span to ensure that the loads are
correctly defined).
10. Click on the + Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load -> Longitudinal Beam Load from the selection list.
11. In the first row of the Longitudinal Beam Loading form set the Load Type to be
Uniform, Load W1 to be 17.5 (Load W2 is automatically set as it is uniform)
and the Name: to Dead Loads. To apply this load to the complete beam, box
round the whole structure in the graphics window or tick all members in the
drop down list at the end of the Assigned Members: field. Close the form with
the OK button.

12. Copy the Dead load in the same manner as for the live loads and change the
load value to 6kN/m and the name to Ballast Loads.
13. Repeat this again but change the load value to 2.5 and the name to Sleeper
& Rail Loads.
Compilations
14. Change the Navigation view to Compilations by clicking the appropriate button
15. Click on the + Add button to add a Dead Load at Stage 1 compilation. Click
on the Insert record button (+) near the bottom of the form to add a row to the
table. In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select
the beam dead load case. Note that the default gamma is correct at 1.15 and
change the Name: to DL ULS. Close the form with the OK button.
16. Click on the + Add button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form twice to add 2 rows to the
table. In the first row of the compilation table select the ballast load case and
set the gamma factor to 1.7. In the second row select the sleeper & rail load
7-6

case and set the gamma factor to 1.2. Set the Name: to SDL ULS. Close the

17. Click on the + Add button to add a BS5400 Comb. 1Railway compilation.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In
the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the first live
load case. Note that the default gamma is correct at 1.4 and the Dynamic
Factor is set for Bending Effect. Change the Name: to Bending Span 2 Con
Cen U1 and close the form with the OK button.
18. Copy this compilation in the same way as before but change the load case to
the second load and change the name accordingly.
19. Create a separate compilation for each live load case in the same way, giving a
total of 12 compilations.
Envelopes
20. To determine the max bending moment in each of spans 2 and 4 we create an
envelope. This is done using the menu item Calculate |Envelopes... to open
up the Define Envelopes form.
21. Click the mouse where it says Click Here.... and set Envelope For to Beam,
and accept all other entries as the default values except the Load Group which
should be set to Live Compilations. Click on the small + button at the
bottom of the top part of the table to add this data to the table and because All
Complying Cases is selected all live load cases are entered into the envelope
automatically. Click on the OK button to close the Define Envelopes form.
7-7

22. The load cases can now be solved using the menu Item Calculate |Analyse,
which carries out the solution and stores results ready for viewing.
Results
23. The maximum sagging moments can then be obtained by looking at the results
of the envelope in the results viewer. This is opened using the menu item File
|Results.

7-8

24. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then
ensure that the Graphics is enabled using the menu item View |Set Default
Layout | Graphic Above Table.
25. Set the Results Type: to Envelope and the Results For: to Beam.
26. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the enveloped
results then use the drop down list in the Include Dead Load Compilations: field
to include both Dead &SDL compilations. (This is located near the top left hand
corner of the graphics window).
27. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the orange
General button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box.
If all results are shown then the Format button can be used to select
maximums only.
Filtering
28. The overall maximum is in span 2 but if we require to determine the maximum
in span 4, the simplest thing to do is to filter the results for span 4
only. This is done by clicking on the graphics filter button

29. First of all De-select all from the Selection Tasks and set the Pick Mode to
Longitudinal Beam. Then click anywhere on the forth span in the graphics
window before closing the Member Selection Filter form with the OK button.
The maximum sagging moment in span 4 is then shown on the graphics.
30. Annotate the member numbers using the orange General button in the
graphics window.
31. Remove columns in the table that have zero values and have no meaning for a
line beam analysis by unticking the selection that appears when clicking on the
first column of the headings row - as shown below
7-9

32. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File |Print
Preview menu item to display the print preview. Close the print preview using
the Close button.
33. Close the results viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
34. Save the data file, using File |Save as... with a name of My BS Example
7_1.sam.
Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Analysis modules of Autodesk

Structural Bridge Design 2014 and demonstrates the basic principles for assigning
properties, defining railway loads compilations and envelopes and viewing the results.

Click here
7-10

7-11

7.2. Portal Frame Loading and Analysis
Subjects Covered:
Wind Load; Differential settlement; Lack of fit loading; Dead loading. Bending
Moment, shear and Axial force diagrams.
Outline
The portal frame model, created in example 6.2, is to be loaded with the following
loads:
1. Dead load of the steel members based upon a weight density of 78kN/m3
2. Dead Load of precast concrete floor panels resulting in a UDL on the beams of
30kN/m
3. A horizontal wind load of 8kN/m acting as a UDL on the left hand columns
4. A support settlement of 20mm applied just to the left hand support
5. A Lack of fit loading due to the top beam being 15mm short during erection

Create a combination of these loads using load factors of 1.6 for the wind load and
1.4 for all other loads. (Of course, one would normally use a load factor of 1.2 for all
three loads if considering Dead, Live and Wind loads combined if using BS5950).
Produce a combined bending moment/shear force diagram for the two beams, with
max values annotated, and an axial force diagram for the two columns both for the
combined load case.
30kN/m Slab dead loads
30kN/m Slab dead loads
8
k
N
/
m

W
i
n
d

L
o
a
d

7-12

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the file created in example 6.2 called Two Span
Storey Bay Frame_BS.sst using the menu item File |Open...
2. Click on the menu Data |Titles... and change the Structure Title to Portal
Frame Loading, the sub title to Example 7.2, the Job Number to 7.2 and
enter your initials in the Calculated by: field.
3. Close the Titles form using the OK button.
4. Click on the button at the bottom of the Navigation window to enable
adding basic loads into the navigation tree.
Dead Loads
Beam Member Loads |Beam Element Load from the list of options.
6. We can enter the steel dead load into the first row of the Define Beam Loading
form by setting Load Type to be F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load
Value to be Volume and Load W1 to be -78 (it is negative because it is
acting vertically downward). W2 automatically assumes the same value as it is
a uniform load.
7. Click on the small down arrow next to the filter button in the graphics
toolbar and select Beams Only from the list of filters (these filters were set up
in example 6.2).
8. Window round the whole structure.
9. Repeat 7 and 8 but with the filter Columns Only. There should be 56
members now loaded as seen in the last column of the table.

10. The second line in the table can now be used to define the slab dead loads
which will be F Uniform, Global Z, Length and -30.
11. This should be applied to just the beams using the Beam Only filter.
7-13

12. Change the Name: to Dead Loads and close the Define Beam Loading form
with the OK button.
Wind Loads
13. The wind load will also be created using Beam Member Loads |Beam
Element Load when Adding a new Basic Load. The parameters for this will
be: F Uniform, Global X, Length and 8. It should be applied to just the
left hand column by using the Columns Only filter but only windowing around
the left half of the structure.

14. Change the Name to Wind Loads before closing the Define Beam Loading
Support settlement Load
Support Displacement from the list.
16. Enter -20 in the DZ(mm) column of the first row and then click on the left
supported node in the graphics window.

17. The default Name of Settlement is suitable so close the Define Support
Displacement Loading form with the OK button.
Lack of Fit Load
Beam Member Load |Beam Element Distortion from the list.
7-14

19. The lack of fit can be applied as a point distortion of -15mm at any point along
the top beam. Enter -0.015 in the D Start column of the first row and then set
Type to Point, Axes to Local, Direction to Direction X.
20. Apply this to the structure by setting the filter to Beams only and then clicking
on left end of the top beam.

21. Set the Name to Lack of fit load and then close the Beam Distortion Load
(Define Beam Loading) form with the OK button.
Compilation
22. To form a combination of these loads we create a Compilation. Click on the
button at the bottom of the navigation window and then click on
the + Add button at the top. Select Other from the list.
23. In the Compile Loading Patterns form click on the + button near the bottom of
the form four times to add 4 rows to the table. Change the Name to
Combination 1 and then in the first row of the Load Name field, click on the
arrow at the end and select the L1: Dead Loads. Set the gamma value to
1.4.
24. Enter each of the loads into separate rows of the table and apply the
appropriate factors. (Ignore warning messages about default gamma values).

25. Close the Compile Loading Patterns form with the OK button.
7-15

Solution
26. Click on the menu item Calculate| Analyse to perform the analysis which will
display a form showing the progress of analysing the four load cases. Before
closing this form display the analysis log file by clicking on the button.
27. In the text file that is displayed check that the total loads applied in load case
L1 are equal and opposite to the support reactions for the same load case.
(This applies to direct actions and not moments).
28. Close both the log file and the Analysis form.
Results
29. Click on the menu item File |Results to open up the results viewer and then
display this as full screen using the window controls.
30. Use the menu item View | Set Default Layout | Tabbed Layout to set the
view to a tabbed view with the Graphics on one tab and the table on another
(this will not need doing if it is already a tabbed view). Click on the Graphic tab
at the bottom.
31. In the blue control area Set Results Type to Compilation, Name: to
Combination 1, Results For: to Beam.
32. Use the filter dropdown button to select Beams Only.
33. Click twice in the Results For field in the light blue graphics toolbar and in the
dropdown tick both FZ and MY.
34. To produce annotations of the values click on the orange General button on
the right side of the graphics screen, tick Result and then click the Format
button next to it.
35. Set the values to the values shown in the following graphic before closing the
Text Setup form using the OK button.
36. To enhance the scale of the plot click on the orange Results button on the
right side of the graphics screen and tick both scale boxes setting the scale for
shear as 1:50 and that for bending 1:200. (You may want to check that Auto
Redraw is switched on. The Auto Redraw button is located on the light blue
graphics toolbar).
7-16

37. A plot of the axial loads in the columns can be obtained in a similar way except
the filter would be set to Columns Only and the Results For tick box set to
FX only. For this plot it is best to rotate the results text back to 0.0 using the
Text Setup form.

38. Close the Results Viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
39. Save the file using File |Save as... with a name of My BS Example 7_2.sam.
7-17

Summary
This example explores some of the not so common load types applied to portal
frames and creating a combination of them. The use of filtering is encouraged to
produce graphical and tabular results for just specific parts of the structure and here,
excluding parts, such as stiff dummy members, where results are not relevant.
Sometimes the default scale of results plots is not large (or small) enough to show the
results adequately. This example shows how user defined scales can visually improve
the quality of graphical results.
In results plots that consist of more than one component, (eg. moment and shear)
where results values are displayed, then only one component can be annotated at a
time. The component that is shown is the first one selected when making the
selection in the dropdown list. To change the annotation to another component it is
simply a matter of re-selecting the components in a different order.
7-18

7-19

7.3. Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage
Subjects Covered:
Beam Element Loads; Bridge Deck Patch Loads, HA Loads; HB Loads; Loading Sets;
Compilation; Analysis; Analysis log file; Bending Moments; Graphical Results, Print
Preview; Customizing table headers; Sorting tabular results.
Outline
A two span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown below and as
defined in example 6.4 is to be loaded and analysed for dead, superimposed dead
and BS5400 traffic loading.

It is required to determine the design sagging moment at the centre of span 1 for ULS
combination 1 design case and maximum deflection along the lower edge of the
structure for SLS combination 1. Engineering judgement is to be used to create just
two load patterns to achieve this.
Details of the loading are as follows:
Dead load of the concrete slab is 24kN/m
3
(
fl
= 1.15 & 1.0)
Carriageway surfacing is 0.2m thick and has a density of 18kN/m
3
(
fl
= 1.75 &
1.2)
Footway makeup & finish is 0.35m thick and has a density of 20kN/m
3
(
fl
=
1.75 & 1.2)
Live load type HA + HB (30units) loading (
fl
= 1.3 & 1.1)
Footway live loading of 5kN/m
2
(
fl
= 1.5 & 1.1)
For the max bending case the HB vehicle will occupy lane 3 (slightly overlapping lane
4). For the max deflection case the HB load will occupy lane 4 (slightly overlapping
lane 3). The KE loads and the CL of the leading HB bogie will be as close to the
centre of the horizontal span as possible (ie. an easting of 8.25m).
7-20

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of BS Example 6_4.sst
which was created in example 6.4. Close the Structure overview with the
Done button.
2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 7.3 using the Date
|Titles menu option, Change the Job Number: to 7.3 and put your initials in
the Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.
Basic Loads
The dead load of the slab can be created by applying a volume load of
24kN/m
3
to just the longitudinal members (applying it to the transverse
members as well would double the actual dead load).
screen to Basic Loads by selecting the button at the
bottom.
4. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the selection
list as shown and pick Beam Member Load ->Beam Element
Load.
5. In the Define Beam Loading form change the Load Type to
F Uniform, the Direction to Global Z, the Load Value to
Volume and Load W1 to -24. The field Load W2
automatically becomes -24 also as it is a uniform load (note
the units). The Name: field can be changed to Concrete
Dead Loads.
6. To apply this to just the longitudinal beams we need to filter the graphics
window to display just these beams. Click on the small arrow next to the filter
icon in the graphics toolbar and pick Longitudinal Beams from the list.
7. By windowing around the complete structure and changing the viewing
directions to isometric it can be seen that the load has been applied to the
longitudinal beams only.

7-21

8. Close the Define Beam Loading form with the OK button.
9. To define the Carriageway surfacing load, the Bridge Deck Patch Load option
is selected when +Adding a new basic load.

10. Set Define loading by: to object then in the graphics screen click on the 4 lines
bounding the carriageway area (consecutive lines must intersect). The lines are
the carriageway definition lines and the span end lines at either end. It is best
to click on these lines outside the bounds of the structure so as to isolate them
from other lines. The loaded area is then shown hatched. (Ensure that the
Carriageways box is ticked on the orange Objects button at the right side of
the graphics screen).
Note that subsidiary loads can be defined in the X and Y directions by inputting
values in the +X and +Y fields. However, in this example we will leave these 2
fields at the default value of zero.

7-22

11. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to
3.6kN/m
2
and set the Name: to SDL: Carriageway before closing the form
with the OK button. (Note that subsidiary loads can be defined in the
directions other than the main direction on the Bridge Deck Patch Load form.
However, in this example only loads in the main Z direction will be defined).
12. In the navigation window right mouse click on the load just created above and
select Copy from the drop down list.
13. Set Define loading by: to object (and click Yes on the confirm form that
appears), then in the graphics screen click on the 4 lines bounding the south
most footway area.
14. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to
7kN/m
2
and set the Name: to SDL: footway 1 before closing the form with
the OK button.
15. Repeat steps 12 to 14 but for the north most footway using the Name: SDL:
footway 2
16. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Vehicle Loads
| HA UDL to open a Define Vehicle Loading form. Set Ends defined by: to
Span and the Lane No: and Span No: to 1. The load intensity is calculated
automatically, from the length of the load, and all other data can be left as the
default so close the form with the OK button.

17. Right mouse click on the HA load in the navigation window and select Copy
from the drop down list. Change the lane to 2 and close the form with the OK
button.
18. Repeat for lanes 3 and 4
19. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Vehicle Loads
| HA Knife-Edge Load to open a Define Vehicle Loading form. Set Align With:
to lane marking and then position the KE load approximately by clicking twice
in the north most lane somewhere near the centre of span 1. Now set the
Chainage in the form to 10.09m to position it more accurately. Close the form
with the OK button.
7-23

20. Repeat this for lanes 2, 3 and 4 with chainages of 9.20m, 8.25m and 7.25
21. The footway loading is applied using standard HA UDL loading so follow step
16 above but use lane 5 for one footway and 6 for the other. The Load per unit
area: field should be set to 5kN/m
2
in each case before closing the form with
the OK button. (Remember to apply the footway live loading to the left hand
span, ie. span 1, only).
22. Click on the +Add button of the navigation window to add Vehicle Load | HB
Vehicle.
23. Set No of HB Units to 30 and then click twice anywhere in lane 3 on the
graphics screen to approximately position the vehicle. (Ensure that you leave
a gap of at least 1 second between clicks when doing this).
24. The lane is 3.0m wide and the vehicle 3.5m wide and it is positioned centrally
on the lane. This means it is overlapping the lanes on either side by 0.25m.
We require that the vehicle is only overlapping lane 4 so we set the Offset: field
in the data form to 0.25m to achieve this.

25. To position the vehicle longitudinally we set Using: to bogie 2 centre and
Chainage: to 8.253m. Change the Name: field to HB lane 3 before closing
the form with the OK button.
26. Repeat 22 to 25 above but place the vehicle in lane 4 and set the Offset: to
-0.25m with the Chainage: at 7.25m. Set the vehicle Name to HB lane 4
before closing the data form with the OK button.
7-24

Loading Sets
27. It is sometimes convenient to group the basic loads into recognisable sets.
This can be done by clicking on the Open Loading Sets... option at the bottom
of the navigation window.

28. In the Define Loading Sets form click on the green + button at the top right
and then change the Set Name to Dead Loads
29. Click on the single dead load in the Unassigned Load Cases: list and then click
on the > button to move it into the Selected Load Cases: list
30. Repeat 28 and 29 above with Set Name of SDL and the appropriate load
cases.
31. Repeat 28 and 29 above with Set Name of Live Loads and the remaining load
cases. (Note that multiple loads can be selected at once by holding the shift
key down while clicking on the first and last in a series)
32. Close the Define Loading Sets form with the OK button
Compilations
33. Change the Navigation view to Compilations by clicking the appropriate button
34. Click on the + Add button to add a Dead Loads at Stage 1 compilation. Click
on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In the
first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Concrete
Dead Loads case. Note that the default gamma is correct at 1.15 and change
the Name: to DL ULS. Close the form with the OK button.
35. Repeat 34 above but this time set the Limit State: field to Serviceability ( a
prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and the Name: to DL
SLS
7-25

Click on the + button near the bottom of the form 3 times to add 3 rows to the
table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the three SDL
load cases and change gamma for each to 1.75. Close the form with the
OK button.
37. The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. When the factors are
changed by the program change them all manually to 1.2.
38. Click on the + Add button to add a BS 5400 Comb. 1 HB(+HA) compilation.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form 6 times to add 6 rows to the
table. This compilation will be for ULS max sagging so select the vehicle and
pedestrian loads as shown below.

39. Note that the gamma factors are correct at 1.3 but that the HA Lane numbers
need changing as shown to correctly represent the lane factors. The Name: of
the compilation should be changed to U1 HA + HB Max Sag Span 1 before
40. For the SLS Max Deflection Compilation repeat 38 and 39 but change the Limit
State: to Serviceability and include the vehicles and HA Lane numbers as
shown below. The Name: is set to S1 HA + HB Max Def Span 1 before

7-26

41. The data file can now be saved as BS Example 7_3.sst using the main menu
item File | Save As...
Analysis
42. The load cases can now be solved using the menu Item Calculate |Analyse,
which carries out the solution and stores results ready for viewing. Because
we have defined loading sets an Activate Loading Sets form is displayed
allowing a choice of which loading sets to analyse. Ensure they are all ticked
and then click on the OK button.

43. A warning message will appear informing us that part of the HB vehicle is
missing the deck. This is ok so answer by clicking the Yes to All button.
Once the analysis is complete as indicated on the Analysis form click on the
small icon at the bottom right of this form.

44. This will display the analysis log file which will indicate any warning messages
about the analysis (if any) and give a summary of the analysis degrees of
freedom and the total applied loads and total reactions for each load case.
These should be inspected for consistency.
7-27

45. The analysis log file can then be closed using the green EXIT button on the
top left of the window. The Analysis form can also be closed using the Done
button.
Results
46. The maximum sagging moments can be obtained by looking at the results of
the appropriate live load compilation in the results viewer. This is opened
using the menu item File |Results.
47. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then
ensure that the Graphics is enabled using the menu item View |Set Default
Layout |Graphic Above Table.
48. Set the Results Type: to Compilation and the Results For: to Beam and the
Name of the compilation to U1 HA + HB Max Sag Span 1.
49. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the live
compilation results then use the drop down list in the Include Dead Load
Compilations: field to include both ULS Dead & SDL compilations. Click on the
orange isometric view icon on the graphics toolbar and select My in the
Results for: dropdown menu.
50. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the orange
General button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box.
7-28

If all results are shown then the Format button can be used to select
maximums only. Click on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar to
show the results. It is worth noting that un-ticking the Transparent box in the
Text Setup form can make it easier to read the results in the graphics window.

51. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File |Print
Preview menu item to display the print preview. This can be printed if
required. A pdf of the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the
icon at the top of the print preview window. Close the print preview using the
Close button
52. To repeat this exercise for the SLS displacements change the compilation
Name to S1 HA + HB Max Def Span 1, the Results For: to Joint and include
the SLS Dead Load Compilations as before.
53. To ensure that you are looking at z displacements click on any number in the
DZ column in the table.
54. Before printing a Print Preview of these results remove columns from the table
that are all zeros (DX, DY, RZ). This is done by right mouse clicking on each
column header and selecting Remove This Column from the drop down menu
displayed. These can be reinstated if required by clicking on the column
control icon at the far left of the column headers and ticking the appropriate
boxes.
55. To determine which node number gives the min result we can sort the results in
ascending order for a particular column and then look at the result at the top of
the table. For the vertical displacements, this is done by left clicking on the DZ
column header until the sort arrow points upwards and then scrolling to the top
of the table.
7-29

56. Close the results viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
57. Save the data file, using the menu File |Save As... to a file called My BS
Example 7_3.sst
Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the basic loading and results of a bridge
deck grillage analysis.
Although maximum results are normally obtained using the load optimisation features
in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014, to position vehicle patterns accurately, it
is important for the engineer to be able to create loading patterns manually based on
engineering experience. By understanding this process, the engineer will be
confident in checking the results produced automatically by the load optimisation,
which is described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Some key features of this example are:
The copying of data items to create additional data items and then modifying
them (such as loads).
Understanding Vehicle loading.
Creating load compilations for different limit states.
Grouping of loads to form loading sets. These should not be confused with
compilations, as the loads or effects are not summed but merely grouped for
convenience. Each group can be analysed separately and will not require
7-30

re-analysis if other groups are subsequently solved (as long as other data
hasnt changed.
The production of an analysis log file (the last log file produced is always
available from the File | Analysis Log File... menu). This file easily gives the
ability to check that the total applied loads are equal and opposite to the
resultant total support reactions. It is important to do this at least once for
every structural model, as differences in these values are an indication of an ill-
conditioned stiffness matrix and that structure stiffness should be scrutinized.
To show the ability to customise and be selective on printed output

7-31

7.4. Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab
Subjects Covered:
Dead loads in FE; Differential temperature in an FE Slab; The use of composite
members to represent FE results; FE results with discontinuities in slab thickness;
Principle moment vectors
Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in example 6.5 which has
variable thickness and a curved profile in plan

It is required to establish the distribution of load to the supports due to its own self
weight and to examine the load path by considering principle moment vector plots.
The load will be based on a weight density of reinforced concrete of 24kN/m
3
.
It is also required to consider the effects of an applied temperature profile through the
thickness of the slab, in accordance with BS5400 part 2 Appendix C, with respect to
the secondary moment created. Only positive differential temperature will be
considered and it is assumed that a surface thickness of 100mm will be applied.
The temperature load will be applied as a combination of a temperature gradient load
and a general temperature rise. The values of these two components will be different
for the variable thickness of slab. For the purpose of this example we will only
consider the main slab of 500mm and the cantilever slab of 300mm. The effects on
the column head will be assumed to be that of the 500mm slab.
The two values of temperature required here can be calculated from first principles
using the expressions
EI
M
Tg
for temperature gradients and
EA
F
Tm
for
membrane temperature. E is the elastic modulus of the concrete (34kN/mm2), I and A
are the moment of inertia and the area of a 1m section of the slab and is the
coefficient of thermal expansion (1.2E-5).
M and F are the restraining Moments and Forces obtained when applying the
temperature profile to a 1m wide section of the slab. These can be obtained by
7-32

carrying out a simple diff temp analysis (using Autodesk Structural Bridge Design
2014) of 1m wide sections of the two thicknesses of slab, by following the procedure
in example 3.3. The results of this and a section property analysis are as follows:
500mm thick slab
I = 1.0417E10mm
4
A = 5.0E5mm
2

M = 84.14kNm F = 619.65kN giving
T
g
= 19.79
o
/m T
m
= 3.03
o

300mm thick slab
I = 0.225E10mm
4
A = 3.0E5mm
2

M = 27.52kNm F = 332.51kN giving
T
g
= 29.985
o
/m T
m
= 2.72
o

Procedure
which was created in example 6.5. Close the Structure Overview with the
Done button.
2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 7.4 using the Data
Dead Load
3. Click on at the bottom of the navigation window and then click on
at the top of the window and select Finite Element Load |External
Load from the dropdown list.

4. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set Load
Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z and Load to -24.
5. Window around the complete structure in the graphics window to select all the
elements. It doesnt matter that they have different thicknesses as the load
applied is a volume load.
7-33

6. Set Name: to Concrete Dead Loads before closing the form with the OK
button.
Temperature Load
7. Click on at the top of the window and select Finite Element Load
|Temperature Load from the dropdown list.

8. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set
Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to 19.79. The default Coefficient is
correct.
9. This temperature gradient needs to be applied to the 500mm and 700mm thick
slab. To do this click on the filter button in the graphics window toolbar, click
on the De-select all Selection Tasks, and then set Select By: to Section
Property. Move the 500mm and 700mm slab properties into the Selected
Groups: field using the > button and then close the Member Selection Filter
10. Window round the complete structure in the graphics window to select these
elements.
11. In the second row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane and T-
Bottom to 3.03, then window round the complete filtered structure again to
apply this to the 500mm and 700mm thick elements.
12. In the third row of the table set Temperature Type to Gradient and Gradient to
29.99. This time the 300mm thick elements must be selected.
13. Use the filter tools in the same way as 9 above to filter the 300mm thick
elements only and then window round the entire structure.
14. In the fourth row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane and T-
Bottom to 2.72 then window round the complete filtered structure again to
apply this to the 300mm thick elements.
15. Change the load case Name: to Diff Temp Loads before closing the loading
7-34

Analysis
16. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse... to perform the analysis and then
click on the Analysis log file icon on the Analysis form to open the log file.

17. Check in the displayed text file that the total load applied is equal and opposite
to the total reaction for the Dead Load case. Note that the total reaction for the
Thermal load case, L2, is zero (or very close to zero) because temperature
loads are internal loads.

18. Close the log file then close the Analysis form with the Done button.
Results Dead Load Case
19. Use the main menu File |Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items
View | Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit
by holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the
graphics and table and dragging to a new position.
20. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For: to Joint, Name: to L1: Concrete Dead Loads and Effect: to Support
Reactions.
21. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For: field should be set to FZ
7-35

22. Change the viewing direction to isometric by clicking on the Graphics toolbar
icon and then annotate the results using the orange General Button on the
right of the graphics window. Use the Format button next to the Results tick
box and ensure Display All values is selected and SOP: is set to Result
before closing the Format (Text Setup) window with the OK button. Click on
the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar to show the results.

23. The distribution of dead load to the supports can be clearly seen.
To display how this load gets to the supports we can view the moment load
path by plotting the principal bending results.
24. Change the results annotation to Maximums only and then set the fields in the
Results Controller to those shown below. The Results For: field in the graphics
toolbar should be set to Principal Values Maximum to show a faded contour
plot together with two lines at the centroid of the element indicating the relative
magnitude and direction of the principal moments.
Hold left mouse button
down on this line and
drag to adjust window
size
7-36

25. Red lines represent hogging moments and blue lines represent sagging.
26. To graphically represent the bending moment in the longitudinal direction, for
the dead load case, the Results Controller fields need to be set as shown
below and the Results For: field in the graphics toolbar should be set to
Bending Triad x.

27. The view shown here has been changed to a Tabbed Layout (using the View)
menu) and the viewing direction set to plan view. There are two significant
points to note here.
7-37

i. The x moment values are per m width and represent bending in
the local xz plane. For this structure the default local x axis is the
same as the global X axis. If we wanted to change this such that
the local x axis was in the direction of the deck centre line we
would need to change them by adding an Advanced FE Set
|Local Axes item to the Structure Navigation Window to align
them to the design line. The load cases would need resolving
before viewing the results.
ii. The Location: field in the results controller is set to Node rather
than centroid or nodal averaged results so that the discontinuity
along the boundary between the two slab thicknesses is
represented
28. Close the Results viewer.
Results Differential Temperature Load Case
29. The secondary moment results caused by the differential temperature case are
best displayed as bending moments on a virtual beam strip, the width of two
narrow elements, passing over the lower of the midspan supports. The results
are to be integrated over the width of this beam strip. To do this in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 we use the concept of a composite member.
30. To define this composite member we click on the menu item Calculate |Define
Composite Member...
31. The elements that make up the composite member are then selected
graphically by first setting the Pick Mode: to Finite Element and then clicking
on the elements one by one as shown below.
32. The Composite axis is defined by setting the Pick Mode: to Node and then
clicking on the nodes, one by one, along the centre of the virtual beam from
one end to the other.

7-38

33. Close the Define Composite Member form with the OK button.
34. Open the Results viewer and set the fields in the dark blue Results Controller
area to those shown below. The viewing direction has been set to a south
elevation.

35. This now shows the bending results of a beam strip 1.25m wide with its centre
line along the composite member axis.
36. The results are obtained by integrating the FE results across the beam strip
and resolving them at each of the axis points. There are three integration/
resolving algorithms that can be used, Method 1, 2 or 3 and it is up to the user
as to which is the most suitable. The method is selected in the results
controller. The basic suitability criteria can be displayed by clicking on the
small, circular ? button next to the Method drop down.
7-39

37. In our case method 2 has been selected as most suitable. If in doubt, use the
most conservative approach.

38. Shear results can be displayed in exactly the same way.
40. Use the main menu File |Save As... to save the data file with a name of My
BS Example 7_4.sst.
Summary
A simple example to show how secondary effects due to differential temperature can
be represented in a Finite Elements model and how to best display results where
there are discontinuities. The representation of FE results in the form of a virtual
beam strip is also demonstrated.
7-40

8-1

8. Transfer of Data

Contents
8.1. Line Beam Integration ................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2. Steel Composite Beam Grillage Integration ............................................................... 8-9
8.3. Defining Section Library with DWG File ................................................................... 8-19
8.4. Defining Grillage with DXF File ................................................................................ 8-23
8.5. Defining Box Girder with DXF File ........................................................................... 8-27

8-2

8-3

8.1. Line Beam Integration
Subjects Covered:
3 span line beam; Import steel composite beam; Dead and SDL load optimisation;
Transfer results to beam module; AASHTO Distribution factors
Outline
In this example we are going to create a 3 span line beam with outer spans of 20m
and an internal span of 30m. The line beam is constructed from 3 girders which are
placed on temporary supports, then welded together to form a continuous structure.
The concrete is then poured in two stages.

We will create a line beam structure then use the steel composite beam files created
in example 4.2 to define the section properties for the model. We will then carry out a
load optimisation for dead, SDL and live loadings. When this has been completed we
will transfer the load effects into the beam files making use of the direct link between
the structure and beam files in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014.

Procedure
Version 6 Examples using the Options |Project Templates menu item
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Line Beam to start a line beam
analysis.
4. Set the title to 3 Span Line Beam with a sub title of Example 8.1 using the
Data |Titles menu option. Also set the Job Number: to 8.1 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.
Create line beam geometry
5. We now need to define the geometry of the line beam.
Click on the Structure Geometry icon to open the Line Beam Geometry form.
Set the Number of Spans to 3. Click in the Span Length column on row 1 of
the table on the form and enter 20m for the length of the first span. Repeat
this for the third span. Leave the support conditions at their default values and
change the Divide Shortest Span into field to 20. The Divide Longest Span
8-4

into field will automatically update to 30. Leave it set to this value. Click OK
to close the form.
Define Section Properties
6. Having defined the geometry of the line beam we now need to define the
section properties.
Click on the Section Properties tab in the tree view (within the Navigation
Window), then click on the Add toolbar button and select Steel Composite
Design Beam from the menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the
Browse button and open the data file BS Example4_2a.sam which was
created in example 4.2. Change Description to 30m Mid Span Beam, then
click on the centre span on the graphics to assign the beam. Click OK to
close the form.
7. We now need to assign properties to the first and third spans.
Right click on S1: 30m Mid Span Beam in the tree and select Copy from the
popup menu. When the Import file form opens, click on the Browse button
then select the file BS Example4_2b.sam which was also created in example
4.2. Change Description to 20m End Span Beam then click on the right hand
span on the graphics to assign the beam.
Click on the left hand span and answer Yes in the confirmation box to reverse
the direction of the beam then click OK to close the form.
Load Optimisation
8. The next step is to carry out a load optimisation on the line beam.
Click on the Data|Automated Loading... menu item to open the Automated
Loadings form. Click in the HB Units field and set it to 30 then click on the
Analyse button. The graphics window will update to show the shear force
and bending moment diagrams for the resultant loads.

Once the load optimisation has been performed it is possible to see the
influence lines that were used to generate the live loads. Click in the Display
Options field and select Influence Line for Moment. Use the arrows to the
8-5

right of the field to move the point of influence along the beam. If you stop at
point 37 you will see the following influence line:

The plot includes dotted lines to indicate that the influence line is cusped.
9. Next we will generate dead and SDL loadings using the load optimisation.
Click on the Dead and SDL Loading tab. Set the Continuous from Stage field
to Stage 1 Concrete and change the value of SDL Intensity to 3.5kN/m.
Make sure Analyse for Diff. Temp. and Analyse for Shrinkage are not ticked.
Click on the Analyse button to carry out the load optimisation. When it has
completed, the graphics will show the bending moments and shear forces that
were created.

The Included Dead Loads tick boxes can be used to see the effects of dead
load at each stage of construction.
Transfer Results
10. Once the loads have been generated, the next step is to transfer them into the
two beam files.
To do this, click on the Transfer Beam Load... button. This opens the Select
Beam form. Click on the middle span on the graphics window to select the
beam file into which we want to transfer the results. The beam will be
highlighted in red and the details shown in the Select Beam form.
8-6

Click OK to open the Assign Load Cases form. This form is used to match
the load cases in the line beam with the design load cases in the beam file.
Click in the Design Load Case column to select the required design load case
in the beam file then click in the Automated Load Results column and select
the loading you want to transfer into that load case. When you have finished
the form should look like this:

NB: There is no Construction Stage 3 loading because there are no differential
temperature loads being considered.
11. The next step is to calculate the transverse distribution factors.
To do this, click on the AASHTO D.F. Wizard... button. This will open the
Distribution Factors Wizard form. The program calculates the distribution
factors for live loads in accordance with Article 4.6.2.2.2 of the AASHTO LRFD
Specifications. This is because there is no form of guidance in British
Standards for the calculation of these values.
The program makes a best guess at the values in the form, based upon the
beam data. In this case we need to update some of the fields. Change Width
of Carriageway to 10m and Angle of Deck Skew to 17. Length for DFM
ve needs to be set to 25m, the average of the two span lengths.
8-7

After each of these values is entered, the DFM values will automatically
update. When you have entered all the values, click OK to close the form.
12. The Assign Load Cases form will now display the DFM values. Click on the
Transfer to Beam Module button to transfer the loads. The program will now
transfer the loads to the beam file BS Example4_2a.sam.
Click on OK. The program will display the following warning:

Click on the Yes button to ensure that the shear forces are consistent
between dead and live load cases.
13. Click on the File|Save... menu item to save the beam file and then click on the
Data|Define Loading... menu to open the Define Composite Beam Loads
form.
Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form. Select Line Beam
Analysis and click OK to return to the line beam model.
Click on the Data|Automated Loading... menu item. Select the Dead and
SDL Loading tab and click on the Analyse button. Then click on the Live
Load Envelope tab and click on the Analyse button. Click on the Transfer
8-8

Beam Load... button. Click on the right hand span of the line beam to select
the second beam file. The program displays the following warning:

Click OK then click on OK on the Select Beam form. Click on the AASHTO
D.F. Wizard... button. This will open the Distribution Factors Wizard form.
The values will all be correct so click on the OK button.
14. Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button.
Click on OK to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form, once again
clicking on the Yes button on the Confirm message. Click on the
File|Save... menu item to save the beam file.
15. Click on the Data|Define Loading... menu to open the Define Composite
Beam Loads form. Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form.
Select Line Beam Analysis and click OK to return to the line beam model.
16. Click on the File|Save As... menu item and enter the filename My BS
Example 8_1.sst. Click on the Save button to save the file.
Summary
In this example we created a 3 span line beam and assigned section properties to it,
using 2 steel composite beam files created in earlier examples. We then used the
load optimisation to create Dead, SDL and Live loads. These loads were then
transferred to the beam design, using the AASHTO Distribution Factor Wizard to
calculate distribution factors based on the geometry of the structure.

8-9

8.2. Steel Composite Beam Grillage Integration
Subjects Covered:
Transfer of results from grillage analysis model to steel composite beam file
Outline

In this example we are going to follow a procedure for transferring results from the
analysis module to the steel composite beam module using SLD files. An example
involving steel composite beams has been chosen because figure 10 in clause 9.7.2
of BS5400 Part 3 uses the bending moment diagram profile along the full length of a
steel composite beam for a single load case or compilation to determine the
slenderness factor . Hence, it is not appropriate to transfer enveloped bending
moment results from the grillage analysis to a steel composite beam file. This is
because the bending moment profile for a set of enveloped results would most likely
not relate to any single loadcase or compilation.
In the example we are going to use the automated load optimisation to create live
loads for a 2 span steel composite bridge. The loads will be created for what are
usually the most critical positions along a steel composite beam in a 2 span structure
such as this. The load effects and positions are as follows:
- Sagging bending moment at mid-span
- Hogging bending moment at the intermediate support
- Vertical shear at a distance of a quarter of the span from left hand support
- Vertical shear at a distance of a quarter of the span from right hand support
- Vertical shear at the node adjacent to left hand support
- Vertical shear at the node adjacent to right hand support
After analysing the load cases, we will save the results in 3 SLD files (one file for each
of the 3 inner beams in the left hand span of the deck see below). We will then
import the SLD files into the steel composite beam file. The steel composite beam file
will be saved for each SLD file imported to create 3 beam files in which design checks
could be done. A fourth pre-prepared SLD file containing dead load and temperature
load effects has been created in the line beam module and will also be imported into
the steel composite beam file. Because the 3 inner beams are identical and the deck
is only skewed to a slight extent, it is likely that the dead and temperature effects will
8-10

be similar in each of the 3 inner beams. Both spans are 21m from support centre lines
which are slightly skewed.

The deck has 3 inner beams, 2 outer beams and edge parapet sections.

Procedure
Define Live Loads
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file BS Example 8_2
Grillage.sst.
2. Set the sub title to Grillage with Live Loads using the Date | Titles menu
option and put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
Click on the Data | Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Beam Element then click on the
beam element indicated below in the left-hand span in the graphics window.
This will define an influence surface for My Sagging for the beam element.
8-11

Define the other influence surfaces for the other load effects and locations as
described in the introduction to the example. When complete the Influence
Surface Generation form will have 18 rows as shown below:

4. The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
8-12

Set Generate by to Reciprocal and click on the Analyse button. A progress
box will open. Click on the Done button when the analysis has completed.
The graphics window will now show the influence surface for the first member
selected.
5. Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
Set Type to BD 37/01 Highway then click on the Run Optimisation button to
open the BD 37/01 Highway Bridge Live Load Optimisation form. Use the
Combinations tick boxes to create loads for HA and HB combined,
combinations 1 and 3, ULS and SLS. Apply 30 units of HB and set Pedestrian
Load to NOT a main member for All influences. Set KEL Direction to
Square to Design Line for All influences. Set the Scope field to Both. Click
on the Compile Loading Patterns button to run the load optimisation.

Click on OK on the load optimisation and influence surface generation forms
to save the loads that have been created.
6. Details of the load optimisation run will be shown together with the loads
created both on the form and in the graphics window.
7. Next we will solve the load cases.
8-13

Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... The Activate Loading Sets
form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you want to solve.
Each time the load optimisation is run, a loading set is automatically generated
for the load cases produced by that run. The list also includes any load cases
not included in a loading set. Make sure all tick boxes are ticked and click
OK.

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Click Yes
to All on a Confirm form that may appear. Once the analysis has completed,
click on the Done button.
8. Save the structure as My BS Example 8_2 Live Loads.sst.
9. We will now save the results from the analysis in a SLD file.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam just
below the centre of the deck in the left-hand span (Beam 1). It will be
highlighted in red. Click on the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases
form.
10. We will match compilations produced during the load optimisation with design
load cases.
Fill in the form as shown below. The ULS factor will need setting to zero on
several rows because these rows are for serviceability compilations. Also,
adjust the I.D. number in the Index column on some rows of the table as shown
below. This will ensure that both ultimate and serviceability limit state results for
each loadcase are identified by a single I.D. number when the results are
imported into the beam module. Adjust the Comb number in the relevant rows
to match the Combination number for each compilation. The Assign Load
Cases form for Beam 1 will have 24 rows and will look like this:
8-14

11. Click on the Export Loads to File... button and save the SLD file as BS
Example 8_2 Beam 1.sld.
12. We will now create an SLD file for the live loads effects at the beam elements
at the beam at the centre of span 1 (Beam 2). This is done by following a
similar procedure as outlined in the steps above. Remember to clear the
previous selections on the Assign Load Cases form before filling in the form for
this beam.
Following this, an SLD file for the live loads effects at the beam elements at the
beam just above the centre of span 1 (Beam 3) is created. Remember to
clear the previous selections on the Assign Load Cases form before filling in
the form for this beam.

8-15

Import Loads in Steel Composite Beam
13. When the 3 SLD files have been created we can import them into the steel
composite beam file.
Open the pre-prepared data file BS Example 8_2 Inner Beam.sam.
14. Use the menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Composite
Beam Loads form.
15. Click on the Interface button. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio button
and click OK. Select the pre-prepared file entitled BS Example 8_2 DL and
Temp.sld.

This has imported the dead, superimposed dead and temperature effects
defined in the line beam module.

16. Click on the Interface button again. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio
button and click OK. Select the SLD file entitled BS Example 8_2 Beam
1.sld. This will import the live load effects for Beam 1. The imported load
effects can be seen by selecting, for example, BM + associated SF - sagging
in the Loading Description field. Different compilations for this type of loading
can be seen by selecting their respective I.D. numbers in the I.D. field on the
form. These I.D. numbers match the I.D. numbers in the Index column of the
Assign Load Cases form. Similarly, different combinations can be seen by
selecting their respective numbers 1 and 3 in the Load Combination field.
Take note of, and close, any Confirm forms that may appear.
8-16

17. Click OK to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form. Click Yes on the
Confirm form that may appear.

18. Save the beam file as My BS Example 8_2 Beam 1 Loads.sam.
19. The load effects for the Beam 2 will now be imported.
Use menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form.
2.sld. This will import the live load effects for the relevant beam and will
automatically overwrite the live load effects imported from the previous SLD
file.
21. Click OK to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form. Take note of, and
close, any Confirm forms that may appear.
23. The load effects for Beam 3 will now be imported.
Use menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form.
3.sld. Again, this will import the live load effects for the relevant beam and will
8-17

automatically overwrite the live load effects imported from the previous SLD
file.
25. Click OK to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form. Take note of, and
close, any Confirm forms that may appear.
Summary
In this example live loads were generated using the live load optimisation in the
analysis module. The load effects for 3 longitudinal beams were saved as individual
SLD files. These 3 live load SLD files and a fourth pre-prepared SLD file were then
imported into the steel composite beam module file. The imported load effects were
saved in the beam module file to create 3 beam files, each containing live load effect
results pertaining to 3 individual longitudinal beams in the deck of the grillage. Design
checks could be performed in each of the 3 beam files created. For more information
about design checks in the steel composite beam module see BS Example 5.1.
Alternative working methods are available to the user as regards the transfer of
results from the analysis module to the beam module. For instance, in the above
example the user could choose to not save the beam file after each SLD file has been
imported and thus avoid generating multiple beam files. The user may choose to do
this in cases where frequent adjustments to the beam file are anticipated and the user
wishes to avoid having to make identical adjustments in each beam file. Another
alternative method would be to transfer load effects directly from the analysis module
to the beam module in cases where the user believes it is suitable to do so. This is
done by clicking on the Transfer to Beam Module... button on the Assign Load
Cases form. See Chapter 10 of this manual for further information about this.

8-18

8-19

8.3. Defining Section Library with DWG File
Subjects Covered:
Importing DWG files into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define sections; User
defined library shapes; User defined SXF files
Outline
The section file below is one of six sections in a section library. The section library
and the six SXF files which contain data pertaining to the tendons and reinforcement
in the six sections are all created by importing data from a single DWG file which has
been prepared in Autodesk
AutoCAD
. The single drawing file contains data about

each individual section on separate layers. This is essential to the process of
importing data from a DWG file.

Below is the drawing file containing all six sections. Note that Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design will recognise a circle of less than 100mm diameter as a reinforcing bar
and assign the diameter of the bar as per the diameter in the DWG file when data
from the drawing file is imported into the program. Autodesk Structural Bridge Design
will recognise a cross of less than 100mm height and width as a tendon when data
from the drawing file is imported into the program.

8-20

The sections, reinforcing bars and crosses representing the tendons were created in
AutoCAD using standard elements such as straight lines and polylines. Note that the
section outline has to have a closed perimeter in order for it to be imported into
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
Procedure
Version 6 Examples using the Options | Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File | New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as W Beam Section with a
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel by clicking twice
in the name field and then using the delete key.
5. We will import the section data for the Beam W7 from the DWG file into the
program.
Open the Import File form using the menu item File | Import File... . Navigate
to the supplied file called W Beam Sections.dwg and open it.
6. Untick all tickboxes except the tickbox for layer W7 on the Import Shapes
form which has appeared on the screen. Ensure that Drawing Units are set to
metres and click the Next button. The data in the DWG file has now been
imported.

7. Open the Define Section... form from the Data|Define Section menu item.
Click on the Fit View icon if the section is not shown clearly in the graphics
window.
8-21

8. This will display the general define shape in the graphics window. In the first
row of the Library column re-select Define Shape to open the Define Element
Shape form.
9. Change the Name on the Define Element Shape form to W Beam W7 then
click on the Add button to add it to a library file. This will open a file browser
form which will allow you to choose an existing library file, if it exists, or to
create a new one. We will create a new one by entering a library file name of
W Beams Precast.lib and then clicking on the save button.
10. Close the Define Element Shape data form using the OK button.
11. Assign a material property from the Property column drop down list as the C40
concrete. Click on OK to close the Define Section form.
12. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form from the Data|Define Bars menu
item.
13. Note that when Draw bars is selected in the Generate field the bar size is
correctly shown in the Diam (mm) field. The program will detect the bar size
provided that the circle in the dwg file is less than 100mm in diameter.
14. We will now input data for the tendon force and area. Note that the user must
manually calculate the prestress force after all losses have occurred when
entering tendon force data in the section module. Default values for the tendon
area and force are generated by the program, but can be overwritten by the
user.
Select Draw tendons in the Generate field. Note that the values in the Area
and Force fields are just default values and need overwriting. The user must
define values in these fields. Click on the Edit Tendons button and box
around the whole section to open the Edit Reinforcement form. Set the Edit
Option field to Change tendon area, set the Strand area to a value of
181mm
2
and No of Strands to 1. Click OK to close the Edit Reinforcement
form. Click on the Edit Tendons button and box around the whole section to
open the Edit Reinforcement form again. Set the Edit Option field to Change
force and set the Tendon Force field to 238kN. Click OK to close the Edit
Reinforcement form.

15. The data for the bars and tendons will now be saved in a SXF file.
8-22

Click on the Data Export button. Enter a name of Bars and Tendons W7.sxf
and click on the save button.
16. Click OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
17. The section file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the section file with an appropriate name.
18. Section data for the next section (Beam W8) can be added to the section
library and an SXF file generated for the bar and tendon data by selecting the
menu item File|New Section, clicking Yes on the Confirm form and following
the steps as outlined above. Remember to select only the tickbox for layer W8
on the Import Shapes form.
19. When all 6 sections have been saved in the section library and six SXF files
have been generated close the program.
Summary
This method enables users to create user libraries of sections from data that has been
pre-prepared in, and imported from, AutoCAD. This may be useful when considering
sections that are not available in the default Concrete Beam and Steel Section
libraries provided in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. SXF files are also created to
store data pertaining to reinforcement and tendons. Alternatively of course, section
files can be defined directly in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design as described in the
examples in Chapter 2 of this manual.
Note that after a section has been defined with data imported from a DWG file it may
be necessary to re-assign the material properties for the reinforcement and tendons
before analysing the section.

8-23

8.4. Defining Grillage with DXF File
Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for Autodesk Structural Bridge Design grillages; Importing DXF
files into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define grillages
Outline
The grillage for the skew deck structure below would be easy to define directly in
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. However, in this example an alternative method
for defining such geometry in AutoCAD is outlined. A DXF file has been prepared in a
AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands which are loaded into the program.

Below is the drawing file containing the geometric data for the grillage beam
elements. Note that Autodesk Structural Bridge Design will recognise only elements
defined using either the specialised commands, or manually drawn 3D line entities, as
beam elements when data from the DXF file is imported into the program.

Below is an outline of the preliminary steps that were followed to create the supplied
DXF file in AutoCAD. Note that in these steps commands that are typed into AutoCAD
are in blue for clarity in this document. Subsequent steps will describe the procedure
for importing the DXF file into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design in order to define a
grillage.
8-24

Defining a DXF File for a Grillage in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design
1. To use AutoCAD in this example an SBD-CAD menu needs to be inserted into
the default menu. A file called sbdcad.mnu (and sbdcad.mnl) is supplied
with the Autodesk Structural Bridge Design installation to enable this and
should be installed in accordance with AutoCAD instructions.
In addition, the AutoCAD must be able to locate the sbdsetup.lsp file as an
external reference and the appropriate environment variable (eg. XREF) should
be set to include the path to this file.
2. Open AutoCAD.
3. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Setup | Define Drawing Limits. Click once in
the drawing area and type in the coordinates of the bottom left and then top
right of the drawing limits. This defines the drawing limits.
4. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Structure Layers | Define New Layer and type
in a suitable layer name (eg. DECK) and colour (eg. RED). This defines the
layer on which the 2D deck members will be defined.
5. The members for the deck grillage will now be defined.
Select menu item SBD-CAD | Beams | Single Beam and type in the
coordinates of the start and end of a single longitudinal beam.
6. Use the Array tool to create an array of longitudinal beams.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to create an array for the transverse beams.
8. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Write DXF File and save the DXF file with an
appropriate name. Enter a value of 6 for decimal places of accuracy as per the
prompt.
9. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.
Importing the DXF File into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to Create a
Grillage

Below are steps describing how data is imported into Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design from a DXF file to define a grillage.
1. Open Autodesk Structural Bridge Design and ensure that the current Project
Template: is set to Version 6 Examples using the Options | Projects
Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File | New Structure. Select Data
| Structure Type | Refined Analysis.
3. Use the menu item Data | Titles... to set the title as Grillage with DXF File
with a sub-title of Example 8.4. Also add your initials to the Calculated by
data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
8-25

4. Click on the Import Model icon at the top of the Navigation Pane to open
the Import Model form. Select the Bridge Structure radio button. This will
ensure that all members in the Z=0.0 plane are automatically assigned as deck
members when the data is imported into the program. Click on the Browse
button and open the supplied DXF file with a name of grillage.dxf. Click on the
Next button.
5. Untick the tickbox for layer 0 so that only the tickbox for layer DECK is
ticked. Click on the Next button.

6. Tick the tickbox for Split intersecting beam elements so that both available
tickboxes are ticked. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to
metre and click on the Next button. This will ensure that the grillage is split
into individual beam elements and that the grillage will be at the correct scale.

7. When the data has been imported click OK to close the Import Model form.
8. The Member Details form will open automatically. Note that the tickboxes in the
Deck Mem column are ticked automatically, indicating that the imported beam
elements are in the deck. Hence, these beam elements will be considered as
deck members in the calculation of influence surfaces and the application of
8-26

loads. Delete the 8 members at each end of the structure that are not required
(highlighted in red below). These beam elements are deleted because they are
outside of the skewed ends of the deck. Click OK to close the Member Details
form.

9. The structure file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the structure file with an appropriate name.
10. Additional data for the Design Lines, Carriageways, Section Properties etc. can
be defined to complete the structure file. See examples 6.4 and 10.1 for
information on defining grillage structure files. For example, the individual
beam elements in the longitudinal direction could be defined as being in
longitudinal beams on the Longitudinal Beams form.
Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a beam element
grillage. Such a method of working can be useful when the complex geometry of a
bridge deck has been defined in an AutoCAD file. It is worth noting that design lines
can be imported from DXF files by using the Import button on the Define Design Line
form.

8-27

8.5. Defining Box Girder with DXF File
Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for Autodesk Structural Bridge Design finite element structures;
Importing DXF files into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define finite element
structures; Design Line; Carriageway definition; Local axes; FE properties
Outline
The box girder bridge below has a slab thickness of 200mm and a bottom flange
thickness of 275mm. The thickness of the webs is 250mm. The structure is modelled
using 3D shell finite elements. The geometry of the structure is complicated with the
slab (curved on plan) and sloping webs of the box girders. A structure with such
geometry would be difficult to define directly in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
However, such geometry is relatively easy to define in AutoCAD. Hence, a DXF file
has been prepared in AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands. The DXF file
will be imported into to Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define the geometry of
the structure.

Below is the drawing file containing the geometric data for the finite elements. Note
that Autodesk Structural Bridge Design will recognise only elements defined using
either the specialised commands, or individually drawn 3D FACE entities, as finite
elements when data from the DXF file is imported into Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design.

8-28

Below is an outline of the preliminary steps that can be followed to create a DXF file in
AutoCAD for a simple finite element mesh. Note that in these steps commands that
are typed into AutoCAD are in blue for clarity in this document.
Defining a DXF File for an FE Model in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design
1. To use AutoCAD in this example a SBD-CAD menu needs to be inserted into
the default menu. A file called sbdcad.mnu (and sbdcad.mnl) is supplied
with the Autodesk Structural Bridge Design installation to enable this and
should be installed in accordance with AutoCAD instructions
In addition, AutoCAD must be able to locate the sbdsetup.lsp file as an
external reference and the appropriate environment variable (eg. XREF) should
be set to include the path to this file.
2. Open AutoCAD.
3. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Setup | Define Drawing Limits. Click once in
the drawing area and type in the coordinates of the bottom left and then top
right of the drawing limits. This has defined the drawing limits.
4. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Const lines | Single Line or Arc and draw the
four lines which form the boundary of the deck.
5. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Const lines | Mesh and type in the number of
divisions on the bottom edge and the vertical right hand edge of the structure.
Click on the 4 edges of the boundary line starting with the bottom edge and
working around the edge of the structure in an anti-clockwise direction. This
divides the deck along the lines that define the mesh.
6. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Structure Layers | Define New Layer and type
in a suitable layer name (eg. SLAB) and colour (eg. RED). This defines the
layer on which the deck members will be defined.
7. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Elements | From Mesh and click on the mesh.
The mesh will turn red. This has split the mesh into the individual elements.
8. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Write DXF File and save the DXF file with an
appropriate name. Enter a value of 6 for decimal places of accuracy as per the
prompt.
9. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.
Importing the DXF File into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to Create
an FE Mesh
Below are steps describing how data is imported into Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design from a DXF file to define a finite element model.
1. Open the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples using the Options | Projects Templates menu item.
8-29

2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File | New Structure. Select Data
| Structure Type | Refined Analysis.
3. Use the menu item Data | Titles... to set the title as Box Girder with DXF File
with a sub-title of Example 8.5. Also add your initials to the Calculated by
data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Click on the Import Model icon at the top of the Navigation Pane to open
the Import Model form. Select the Bridge Structure radio button. This will
ensure that all members in the Z=0.0 plane are automatically assigned as deck
members when the data is imported into the progam. Click on the Browse
button and open the supplied DXF file with a name of BoxGirder.dxf. Click on
the Next button.
5. Untick the tickbox for layer 0. The tickboxes for all other layers are ticked.
Click on the Next button.

6. Tick the tickbox for Split intersecting beam elements so that both available
tickboxes are ticked. This will ensure that the mesh is split into individual
elements. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to metre and
click on the Next button.

7. When the data has been imported click OK to close the Import Model form.
8-30

8. The Member Details form will open automatically. By scrolling down the table
on the form we can see that the tickboxes in the Deck Mem column are ticked
automatically for those finite elements that form the deck. Hence, these finite
elements will be considered as deck members in the calculation of influence
surfaces and the application of loads. Click OK to close the Member Details
form.

Defining the Carriageway and Span End Lines
9. We will define a design line which will be used to align the carriageway.
Select the Structure tab in the tree view. Click on the Add button and select
Design line to open the Define Design Line form. Click the + button. Select
the Arc radio button and click the Next button. Select the 3 points on curve
radio button and click the Next button. Set the Snap field at the top of the
graphics window to Intersection and select 3 points along the centre of the
deck in the graphics window by clicking on the point at the left hand end of the
deck, a point near the centre of the span and then at the right hand end of the
deck. Click Next and OK to close the forms.

10. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the dropdown menu to
open the Define Carriageway form and set the fields to the selections and
values shown below. (Note that the traffic flow direction is indicated by a
triangular arrow head in each notional lane and clicking on each of the arrows
until they are double-headed will show that traffic can flow in either direction.
However, in this example we will leave the lanes as single direction). Click
OK to close the Define Carriageway form.
8-31

11. The next step is to define the location of the span end lines.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation window, click on the Add button
and select Span End Lines to open the Define Span End Lines form. Click on
the bottom left and top left-hand corners of the structure on the graphics
window. This will draw a heavy black line. Repeat this for the right-hand
abutment to define the span end lines. Click OK to close the form.
Defining Supports
12. Next we will define the 6 support nodes for the structure. The supports will be
defined such that the 4 outer supports will be resisting vertical loads only. The
support node at the centre of the left hand end of the structure will be fixed in
the radial and tangential direction. The support node at the centre of the right
hand end of the structure will be fixed in the radial direction and free in the
tangential direction. It is recommended that the user takes note of the
orientation of the local axes of the support nodes when interpreting support
reaction results.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Window, click on the Add button
and select Supported Nodes. Ensure that the Select: field is set to All Joints
and select the 3 nodes at the left hand end of the structure as shown below. In
the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that only the
DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click on the middle
of the 3 nodes (node 32). Change the support conditions for this node so that
it is also fixed in DX and DY.

8-32

13. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the + button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom right support node
(node 59) then on the bottom left support node (node 96). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 101.4212 degrees. Click OK to close the sub-
form.

14. Change Name to Left Supports and click OK to close the Define Supported
Nodes form.

15. The support nodes at the right hand end of the structure will now be defined.
Click on the Add button and select Supported Nodes again. Select the 3
nodes at the right hand end of the structure as shown below. In the first row of
the support table, change the support conditions so that only the DZ direction is
fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click on the middle of the 3 nodes
(node 42). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in
DX.
8-33

16. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the + button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom left support node
(node 51) then on the bottom right support node (node 81). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 78.5788 degrees. Click OK to close the sub-
form.

17. Change Name to Right Supports and click OK to close the Define Supported
Nodes form.

8-34

Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 250mm thick isotropic FE property for webs.
ii. The 200mm thick isotropic FE property for slab.
iii. The 275mm thick isotropic FE property for bottom
flange.
18. We first change the Structure navigation window to Section Property by clicking
on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
19. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite
Element.
20. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 250 and the
Elastic Modulus: to 34. Note that the Shear Modulus gets automatically
updated based upon the default Poissons ratio of 0.2. Change the Name to
a suitable description.
21. Click on the Filter toolbar button and select WEBS. Note that sub model
groups were automatically created for each of the layers in the imported DXF
file. Box around the whole structure to assign the section property to the webs.
22. Assign the section properties for the other sub model groups by following a
similar procedure. When all of the section properties have been assigned
select Select All to turn the filter off.
23. The structure file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the file with an appropriate name.
24. Additional data for the Basic Loads etc. can be defined to complete the
structure file. See examples 6.5 and 10.2 for further information on defining
finite element structure files.
Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a finite element
box girder structure in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. The supports are assigned
to the structure and adjusted to suit the layout of the structure. Section properties are
also assigned to the structure. Note that a composite member could be created within
the finite element analysis model. See example 10.2 for information about this.
9-1

9. Specialist Analysis Techniques

Contents
9.1. Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab ......................................... 9-3
9.2. Dynamics Normal Modes Analysis Simple Footbridge ......................................... 9-9
9.3. Staged Construction - For Grillages ......................................................................... 9-15
9.4. Non-Linear Analysis Flat Slab Bridge Deck .......................................................... 9-41
9.5. Offset Beams For Finite Element Decks ............................................................... 9-55
9.6. 3 Sided FE Structure with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads ................................. 9-69
9.7. User Defined Vehicles & Convoys ........................................................................... 9-91

9-2

9-3

9.1. Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab
Subjects Covered:
Creating new sub models; moving elements from one sub model to another;
Reinforcement sets; Moment triads; Design Moments.
Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in example 6.5 and
loaded in example 7.4

It is required to establish the design moments; hogging and sagging; main &
secondary, in a given reinforcement direction in various parts of the slab due to dead
load only. The design moments will be based on the Wood Armer equations.
The idealised reinforcement directions in the various components of the slab are as
shown below.

For hogging, the main reinforcement is parallel to a line joining the deck centre points
at each end.
Procedure
Done button.
9-4

2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 9.1 using the Data
|Titles menu option. Change the Job Number: to 9.1 and put your initials in
New Design Line
3. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Design Line
from the dropdown list.
4. Set the Snap: mode in the graphics toolbar to Intersection and then click on
the node at the centre of each end of the structure. (You may need to zoom in
on the graphics window to do this).

5. Set Name to Secant of CL and then close the Define Design Line form with
the OK button.
New Sub Models
For different reinforcement calculations to be carried out independently for
different slab thicknesses it is necessary to have a different submodel for each
slab thickness.
It is therefore necessary to create two new sub models (in the same plane and
with the same origin as the existing sub model) and move the appropriate
elements from one to another.
6. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select 2D Sub model
(GCS , Z=0) from the dropdown list.
7. Rename this submodel to 300 slab by right mouse clicking on the submodel
entry in the navigation window and choosing Rename from the options.
Moving elements between Sub Models
8. Within the 2D Model A sub model, in the navigation tree, click on Sub Model
Members.
To place the 300 thick elements into the appropriate sub model we first need to
select and then move them.
9. In the graphics window toolbar click on the filter button and then in the Member
Selection Filter form click on De-select All. Then set Select By: to Section
Property.
9-5

10. Move the 300mm property into the Selected Groups: by selecting it then
clicking on the > button. Close the filter form with the OK button.
11. Select all the displayed elements in the graphics window by windowing around
the whole structure.
12. In the Define Sub Model Members table click on Move to Sub Model... in
Member Tasks then select the 300 slab sub model before closing the Sub
Models form with the OK button.
14. Repeat steps 6 to 12 for the 700 slab. You will need to click on Structure at
the top of the tree so that the Add+ button is displayed again. After doing this,
Rename the 2D Model A sub model as 500 slab. Finally, use the drop down
arrow next to the filter button in the graphics window to turn off the filter (Select
All).
Analysis
The reinforcement moment calculations are principally post processing of load
case results, so the analysis of the already defined load cases can now be
carried out.
15. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse... to perform the analysis.

16. Close the Analysis form with the Done button once the analysis is complete.
Defining the reinforcement sets
17. One or more reinforcement sets now need to be defined for each sub model.
18. In the navigation window, right mouse click on the 500mm Slab sub model and
select Add |Reinforcement Set.
19. In the Define Reinforcement Set form change the Name: to 500 Sag, click on
the curved design line in the graphics window, select just Sagging in the Face
tick box and lastly tick the Results for: Design tick box. The reinforcement
direction can be seen in the graphics display
9-6

20. Close the Defined Reinforcement Set form with the OK button.
21. Repeat 18 to 19 to create a second reinforcement set in the same sub model.
This time it is named 500 Hog, the straight design line is selected and
Hogging and Design are both ticked.
22. To skew the secondary reinforcement so that it is parallel to the lines of the
supports change Pick: to Secondary Reinforcement Direction and then click
on any two nodes on the right hand span end line.
23. Close the Defined Reinforcement Set form with the OK button. There will
then be two reinforcement sets in the 500 Slab Sub Model.

9-7

24. Repeat 18 to 23 for the 300 slab sub model with exactly the same
reinforcement sets data as the 500 Slab, but of course use appropriate names.
25. Repeat 18 to 19 for the 700 slab sub model but this time both Hogging and
Sagging reinforcement are in the same direction and are both ticked. The
reinforcement direction data for this case is the same as for the 500 Hog set.
Set the name for this set to 700 Hog & Sag.
Results
26. Use the main menu File |Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items
View | Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit
by holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the
graphics and table and dragging to a new position.
27. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For: to Reinforcement Moments, Name: to L1: Concrete Dead Loads and
set: to RS1: 500 Sag.
28. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For: field should be set to Design
Sagging Main.
29. Change the viewing direction to plan by clicking on the Graphics toolbar icon
and click on the Auto Redraw button if the graphics are not automatically
updated.
9-8

30. All the other reinforcement sets and components can be displayed and printed
in a similar way.
BS Example 9_1.sst.
Summary
This example illustrates that if reinforcement moments are to be created for different
components of a structure, then each component should be in a separate sub model,
and that results can be obtained separately for each component. This will mean that
discontinuities, occurring at the boundaries of different thickness slabs, are correctly
allowed for.

Although in this example we have only considered one load case, the results for
compilations and envelopes are also available.

It should be pointed out that the results for compilations are not obtained by simply
summing the reinforcement moment results for each constituent load case. This
would be incorrect as the Wood Armer equations are not a linear set of equations.
They are calculated by summing the component moment triad results and then
performing the Wood Armer calculations on the resultant moment triad.

In this example we have only considered the calculation of Design Moment. It should
be noted that there are an equivalent set of equations (Denton Burgoyne) which can
be used for assessing the adequacy of a known set of reinforcement. This will be
covered in a separate example.
Hold left mouse button
down on this line and drag
to adjust window size
9-9

9.2. Dynamics Normal Modes Analysis Simple Footbridge
Subjects Covered:
Steel Footbridge; Normal Modes; Natural Frequencies; Mode Shapes; Participation
Factors; Sturm Sequence Checks; Structural Mass; Density; Lumped Mass;
Dynamic Compilations; Animation
Outline
Many structures have dynamic characteristics which are undesirable and, if not
checked, would fail to meet certain design requirements. Footbridges are structures
which are often susceptible to dynamic problems caused by wind or simply by
pedestrians using the structure. These vibrations can sometimes be excessive and
although they may not cause any structural failure, they may cause discomfort and
alarm to any user of the bridge.
It is therefore generally required to check that undamped natural frequencies of
footbridges do not fall within a specified range.
In the following example, the vibration modes of a tubular steel footbridge, as
described and modelled in example 6.3, are to be examined.

It is required to establish the undamped natural frequencies and mode shapes of:
The fundamental vertical bending mode
The fundamental horizontal bending mode
The first torsional mode.

It is also required to establish how many vibration modes there are below 45Hz and if
all these modes are considered, what percentage of mass participation is achieved in
the vertical and transverse horizontal directions.
The total mass acting on the structure is made up from the structural mass of the
structure members all having a weight density of 77.0kN/m
3
and some non-structural
mass, due to surface finishing of the deck, of 0.7kN/m
2
.
Procedure
Done button.
2. Change the Title sub title of the example to Example 9.2 using the Date
9-10

Structural Mass
To check the structural mass applied to the structure we can look at a data
report to inspect the densities applied to each member.
3. Click on the Menu item File |Data Reports to open the Data Reports form.
Scroll to the bottom of the form and tick to include Section Property Data then
click on the View button.
4. Inspect the density of each of the properties. You will notice that they are all
77kN/m
3
except the 75x75 angle which is set to 78kN/m
3

5. Close the Results viewer with the green EXIT button and then the Data
Reports form with the Done button.
6. As this is a parametric shape, the density is input in the property definition
form, so this could be changed here but in this example we will show how to be
more specific in changing densities for individual members/elements.
7. Change the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on the
appropriate button at the bottom.
8. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Advanced
Beam Properties |Modified Density from the dropdown list.
9. Change Name: to be Angle Modified and the Density: to 77. Now click on
the 10 diagonal bracing members in the deck to assign them.

10. Close the Specify Beam Density form with the OK button.
Structural Mass
The surfacing mass of 0.7 kN/m
2
is to be added as Lumped mass on the nodes
of the bottom boom. The deck is 55m long and 3.5 m wide so the added
weight is 134.75kN. This will be applied to the 22 nodes in the deck, with the
two end nodes at each end having half the mass of the others. This works out
to 6.74kN (0.687Tonnes) on internal nodes and 3.37kN (0.344Tonnes) on the
end nodes.
11. Change the Navigation window to Basic Loads by clicking on the appropriate
button at the bottom.
9-11

12. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Lumped Mass
from the dropdown list.
13. In the first row set mX mY and mZ to be all 0.687 and then click on each of
the 18 inner nodes in the deck.
14. In the second row set mX mY and mZ to be all 0.344 and then click on each
of the 4 end nodes in the deck.

15. Change Name: to be Surfacing Mass and then close the form with the OK
button.
16. To enable the addition of this into the structural mass we need to create a
dynamic compilation with this mass in it. Change the Navigation window to
Compilations by clicking on the appropriate button at the bottom.
17. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Dynamic from
the dropdown list. Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a
row to the table.
18. In the first row of the table we select the Surfacing Mass. The default value
for the 4 Factor columns is 1.0 and this is correct but change the Name to With
Added Mass before closing the form with the OK button.

Analysis
19. Click on the menu item Calculate |Dynamic Analysis... to open the Dynamic
Analysis Control form.
9-12

20. Set the Compilation for Dynamic Analysis: data field to C1: With Added Mass.
21. The first analysis is a Sturm Sequence Check which checks the number of
modes below a given frequency. Check that this option is selected on the data
form and enter a frequency of 45.

22. Click on the Analyse button. Click OK on the warning message which
appears regarding very thin walled sections.

23. When the analysis is complete click on the Log File icon on the Analysis form
to open up the log file. This should report that there are 40 modes below 45
Hz.

9-13

24. Close the Analysis Log File with the green EXIT button and the Analysis form
with the Done button.
25. On the Dynamics Analysis Control form (which should still be open) select the
Modal Analysis for: radio button and set the data field to 40 Modes.
26. Click on the Analyse button. (The software may take a few seconds to
perform the analysis).
27. When the analysis is complete, close the Dynamic Analysis Control form with
the OK button and open the Results Viewer using the Menu item File
|Results....
28. In the dark blue Results Control area tick the Show Participation Factors tick
box to display the following table

29. The percentage mass participation (at the bottom of the table) shows 93.7%
vertically and almost 100% laterally.
30. On inspection of the displacement participation factors for each of the first few
modes, it is clear that the first vertical deflection mode is mode 2 and the first
lateral deflection mode is mode 1.
31. These mode shapes can be visually checked by un-ticking the Show
Participation Factors tick box, setting Effect to Deflected Shape and clicking
on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar. Each mode can then be
selected in the Mode Shape: data field and the mode shape will be displayed.
32. It may be easier to interpret the shapes if they are viewed in animation by using
the controls in the graphics toolbar . It is clear that mode 3 is
the first torsional mode.
9-14

33. Close the Results Viewer.
BS Example 9_2.sst.
Summary
This example shows the very basics of carrying out a normal modes analysis using a
structural model. It does not give any assistance in creating models specifically for
dynamic analysis where an understanding of dynamic behaviour is required.
This is essentially a very simple model as all the structural material is the same and
has the same density. When composite beams are used where there is a mixture of
materials and densities, then a transformed density will be required. If composite
beams created by Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design are used in the analysis then

this transformed density is calculated automatically.

9-15

9.3. Staged Construction - For Grillages
Subjects Covered:
Steel Composite Beam; Grillage Model; Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines;
Construction Lines; Rotate Mesh; Define Construction Stages; Basic Loads; Dead
Load Compilations; Transfer Results to .sld File; Recommended Outline Procedure for
Staged Construction
Outline

In this example we are going to model a 2 span steel composite bridge. The bridge
has 4 longitudinal beams as shown in the diagram below.

We will define a section file, a beam file and a grillage model. We will then import the
section and beam data files into the grillage. These properties will be assigned to the
members in the grillage and the construction stages will be defined. The girders have
a uniform section throughout with a top flange of 500mm x 40mm, a bottom flange of
600mm x 40mm and a web of 14mm thickness. The overall height of the steel section
is 1100mm and there is a 50mm deep haunch at the underside of the slab. The slab
thickness is 250mm.

To define construction stages for grillages it is not just a case of making various beam
elements active or inactive at each stage, but it is necessary to change section
properties to reflect whether a particular section is composite or steel only. The steel
only properties will be defined by the design sections and the composite properties by
the design beam.
9-16

There will be 4 construction stages as follows:
Stage 1 steel beams only with wet concrete at span 1
Stage 2 active concrete deck at span 1 and wet concrete at span 2
Stage 3 - active concrete deck at spans 1 & 2 and wet concrete upstand
Stage 4 edge upstand sections active to complete the structure

We will apply dead and superimposed dead loads manually. The Define Construction
Stage Loading form will be used to assign these loads to the construction stages.
After analysing the load cases, we will then transfer them to a .sld file. The notes in
the summary at the end of the example will describe an outline procedure for
completing the analysis and design of a structure in which construction stages have
been defined.
Procedure
Creating the steel beam section file
1. Note that as an alternative to following steps 1 to 8 the supplied file BS
Example 9_3 Steel Only.sam can be used. Start the program and ensure that
the current Project Template is set to Version 6 Examples using the
Options|Project Templates menu item.
2. Create a new section using the menu item File|New|Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Steel Beam Section with a
9-17

4. Open the Section Definition form using the menu item Data|Define Section...
dropdown list to display the Define Section Details form. Select I from the
Shape Reference dropdown list. Enter the values as shown below to define the
steel section. Click OK to close the form.

6. Ensure that the Hook point is set to 1 and set the X Coord to a value of -
250. Now change the Hook point to 5 and set the Y Coord to a value of 0.
7. Assign the structural steel material to the section and click OK to close the
form.
8. Save the file as My BS Example 9_3 Steel Only.sam.
Create the beam files
9. Begin a new beam using the menu item File |New Beam.
item.
11. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Beam title as Steel Composite
Beam with a sub-title of Example 9.3. Add your initials to the Calculated by
data item. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
form.
13. Click on the Type drop down menu and select Continuous end span from
the list. Enter a value of 28m in the corresponding Span field. Select the item
End span from the SIDE SPANS LEFT Type drop down menu and enter a
value of 28m in the corresponding Span field.
14. Click on the Cross section is drop down menu and select Uniform from the
list. Click on the Location is drop down menu and select Inner beam from the
list.
15. Click on the Define drop down menu and select Section from the list to open
the Composite Beam Section Definition form. Click in the Component drop
9-18

down menu on the first row of the table and select Plate Girder from the list.
This will open the Define Composite Beam Component form. Enter a value of
500mm in the top flange width and 600mm in the bottom flange width fields.
Enter a value of 40mm in the top flange thickness and bottom flange
thickness fields. Enter a value of 1100mm in the overall height field and a
value of 14mm in the web thickness field. Click on the OK button to close
the Define Composite Beam Component form.
close the Define Composite Beam Component form.
select Concrete Haunch from the list. This will open the Define Composite
Beam Component form. Enter values of 600mm in the width at top field,
500mm in the width at bottom field and 50mm in the depth field. Click on
OK to close the form.
18. Click in the Component drop down menu on the fourth row of the table and
select Reinforcement from the list. This will open the Composite Beam
Reinforcement form. Enter values of 16mm in the Top Diameter and Bottom
Diameter fields. Enter values of 150mm in the Top Spacing and Bottom
Spacing fields. Enter values of 55mm in the Top Cover field and 60mm in
the Bottom Cover fields. Click on the OK button to close the Composite Beam
Reinforcement form.

20. The slab is cast in two stages - span 1 then span 2. To enable the effects of
pouring span 2 to be applied to the span 1 beam we need to define a dummy
stage 2 in the beam in order to be able apply the loading. We cannot make the
length of the dummy stage zero, so we set it to 1mm.
9-19

21. Set the No. of construction stages to 3. Use the Define and locate span
features drop down to select Construction Stages.
22. Change the data on the form to the following and then close the forms with the
OK buttons.

23. Save file as My BS Example 9_3 Inner Beam Span 1.sam
24. We will now create the beams for span 2.
Use the Data |Define Beam menu item to open the Define Composite Beam
form.
25. Use the Define and locate span features drop down to select Construction
Stages.
26. Change the data on the form to the following and then close the forms with the
OK buttons.

27. Save file as My BS Example 9_3 Inner Beam Span 2.sam.
9-20

Creating the structure layout
28. Note that as an alternative to following steps 28 to 38 the supplied file BS
Example 9_3 Mesh and Suports.sam can be used. We start by defining the
alignments and outline of our structure.
Create a new structure using the menu item File|New|Structure. Set the
correct analysis type using the menu item Data|Structure Type|Refined
Analysis.

29. Next we will add some descriptions to the structure which will be shown on all
printed output.
Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Steel Composite
Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Section 9.3. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field.

30. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure.
Click on the Add button at the top of the Navigation Pane and select Design
Line from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Design Line form.
Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the Line
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0,7.4) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (56,7.4) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next button
and then click OK to define the design line. Click OK to close the Define
Design Line form.

Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to Single
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-7.0, -4.4), (-4.4, 4.4), (4.4, 7.0).

The number of notional lanes will be automatically updated. The notional lanes
are shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
9-21

This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.

32. Next we need to add a sub-model to the structure.
Click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the drop
down menu. This creates a new sub-model node in the tree within the
Navigation Pane.

33. Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the first node in the sub-model as shown above and click on the Add
button again. The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a
sub-model. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define Setting Out Object
form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom left of the form
(this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on the Next
button twice. Enter (0,0) and (0,14.8) for the coordinates of the start and finish
of the line, then click Next. Click OK to close the Define Line Segment form
and click OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.

Click on the Add button again and select Construction Lines to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of 7.4m and press Enter on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list
and give it an offset of -7.4m. This has defined construction lines along the top
and bottom edges of the structure.

9-22

Click on Offset E/W of DL/SOL then click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select
SO1: Setting Out Object from the drop down list. Give it an offset of 28m.
Repeat this process to add a line at 56m. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below.

34. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My BS Example
9_3 Layout.sst.
Defining the mesh and supports
35. We will now begin to define the grillage geometry. The first step is to define
the locations of the span ends.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Pane then click on the Add
button. Select Span End Lines from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.

Click on the bottom left and top left hand corners of the left-hand abutment on
the graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this
to locate the piers and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in
the table as above and on the graphics as below:

Click on OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.
9-23

36. The next step is to define the two meshes which make up the grillage.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add
button. Select Mesh from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Name to Span 1 and set Mesh Type to Orthogonal to span.
Click on the four edges of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge and
then set Longitudinal to 6 and Transverse to 11. (You may need to press
Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly
before clicking in the graphics window).
We will rotate the mesh at span 1 to ensure that the beams have the correct
orientation when they are assigned. Click on the Rotate Mesh button twice to
reverse the direction of the longitudinal members of the mesh. Set the
Longitudinal Spacing to set spacing to open the Set Longitudinal Spacing
form. Set the spacing factor to 0.5 on the first and last rows of the table. Click
OK to close the form. Set the Transverse Spacing to set spacing to open the
Set Transverse Spacing form. Set the spacing factor to 0.5 on the first and
last rows of the table. Click OK to close the form. Click OK to close the
Define Mesh form.

Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane again and click on the Add
button. Select Mesh to open the Define Mesh form. Click on the Copy Mesh
Details From button and select M1: Span 1 (2D Model A) from the drop down
list. Change Name to Span 2 and then click on the four edges of the central
span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to close the Define Mesh form.

37. Next we will define which nodes in the structure are supported.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the
9-24

graphics window and set it to Along Span End Lines, then draw a box around
the nodes shown below. In the first row of the support table, change the
support conditions so that only the DZ direction is fixed.
Change Group Type to Variable, which allows each support to have different
constraints applied. Click on the node just below the centre on the left
abutment (node 33). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is
also fixed in DX and DY. Click on the node just below the centre on the right
abutment (node 106) and change the support conditions so it is also fixed in
the DY direction. Click on OK to close the form.

38. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My BS Example
9_3 Mesh and Supports.sst.
Assigning section properties
39. We will now assign section properties to our grillage, starting with the inner
beams.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Steel Composite Design Beam from the drop down menu.
This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and open the
file BS Example 9_3 Inner Beam Span 1.sam created earlier. Click on the
Beam Section Reference... drop down menu and set it to origin, which
ensures that the beam will be imported at such a height that the support is at
the soffit, rather than the centroid, of the beam.
Change Description to Inner Beam Span 1 and click on the four inner beams
in span 1 of the structure. They will be highlighted in red as shown below and
their references added to the Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the
form. (You may need to move the bottom of the graphics window upwards in
order to be able to see the form).
9-25

40. Assign the BS Example 9_3 Inner Beam Span 2.sam beam files to the 4 inner
beams at span 2 in a similar way.
41. Next we will assign properties to the edge upstands using parametric shapes.
Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Description to Edge Section and set Width and Depth to 500mm. Leave the
other properties at their default concrete values. Ensure that the Select field at
the top of the graphics view is set to Inclusive Box. Select the two rows of
edge members in the structure using the mouse to draw a selection box around
each of them. Click on OK to close the form

42. Finally we will assign properties to the transverse members using a continuous
slab property.
Click on the Add button again and select Continuous Slab from the drop down
menu. This will open the Continuous Slab Properties form. Change Depth to
250mm and Description to Transverse Slab. Leave the other properties at
their default concrete values. Click on the Member selection filter drop down
menu and select Transverse Beams. Box around the whole structure and
click on OK to close the form.
9-26

43. Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add button and
select Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities from the drop down menu. This will
open the Define Beam Eccentricities form. Click on the small green + button
then set the Start Z field on the first row to a value of 1275 and press return
on the keyboard. Box around the whole structure to select the transverse slab
members. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select
Longitudinal Beams. Box around the edge upstands to select them. Click on
the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the
filter. Click on OK to close the form. The advanced model view icon can be
used to check that the eccentricities have been applied correctly.
9_3 Section Properties.sst.
Define the construction stages
45. First of all we will create three stages, with all members active and then we will
alter the first stage to contain just the longitudinal beam members (not the edge
upstands) and a connecting member between them.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on Open Construction
Stages... near bottom of the Navigation Pane to open the Construction Stages
form. Ensure that the Select dropdowns at the top of the graphics window are
set to Make Inactive and Inclusive Box. Click on Insert Before twice to
create a total of three rows on the table. Ensure that the top row of the table is
highlighted. Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select
Transverse Beams. Box around the left span of the structure and then the
right, such that the members at the intermediate support are not selected (see
below).

Selection 1 Selection 2
9-27

46. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove the filter. Select the two rows of edge members in the structure using
the mouse to draw a selection box around each of them.
47. We will now create a new stage after stage 1 so that we can add the concrete
slab at span 1 as an active member.
Click on Insert After to create a new row for Stage 2. Ensure that the second
row of the table is highlighted and use the Construction Stage dropdown at the
top of the Navigation Pane to select Stage 2: Construction. Use the Select
dropdown at the top of the graphics window to select Make Active. Box
around the left span of the structure including the members at the central
diaphragm.
48. We will make the edge upstand members inactive at the left hand span.
Use the Select dropdown at the top of the graphics window to select Make
Inactive. Box around the members at the top and bottom edges of the left
span of the structure. Click OK to close the form and click OK on the
Information message that appears.
49. The steel section files will be assigned to the longitudinal beams for
construction stage 1, because the steel beams are the only active members at
this stage.
Use the Construction Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane to
select Stage 1: Construction. Open the Section Properties tab on the
Navigation Pane. Click on the Add button and select Design Section Data
from the drop down menu to open the Import file form. Use the Select
dropdown to select Create. Click on the Browse button and open the file
My BS Example 9_3 Steel Only.sam created earlier. Click on the Section
Reference... drop down menu and set it to origin. Change Description to
Inner Beam Steel Only. Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu
and select Longitudinal Beams. Box around the members of the four inner
beams along the full length of the structure. Click on the Yes to All button on
the Confirm form and click on OK to close the Import file form.
50. We will assign a nominal section property to the transverse diaphragm member
at the intermediate support.
Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Click on the Add button and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
Description to Nominal and set Width and Depth to 10mm. Change the
Elastic Modulus, Shear Modulus and Density fields to a value of 1. Ensure
that the Select field at the top of the graphics view is set to Inclusive Box.
Select the members at the intermediate support of the structure using the
mouse to draw a selection box around them. Click on the Yes to All button on
the Confirm form and click on OK to close the form. Click on the Member
selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the filter.
9-28

51. The steel section file will be assigned to the longitudinal beams in span 2 for
construction stage 2, because the steel beams are the only active members at
this stage in span 2.
select Stage 2: Construction. Click on the Member selection filter drop down
menu and select Longitudinal Beams. Select the Inner Beam Steel Only
section in the Navigation Pane to open the Import file form. Click on the
Section Reference... drop down menu and set it to origin. Box around the
members of the four inner beams of the right span. Click on OK to close the
form.

52. The edge upstand members have not been defined as being inactive at
construction stage 3, although they are not actually an active part of the
structure at this stage. Hence, the nominal section will be assigned to these
members, rather than defining them as being inactive.
select Stage 3: Construction. Select the Nominal section created in the
previous step to open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Box around the
two rows of edge members in the structure using the mouse to draw a selection
box around each of them. Click on the Yes to All button on the Confirm form
and click on OK to close the form.
53. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove the filter. The advanced model view icon and the Construction
Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane can be used to check that
the construction stages have been defined correctly. (see the diagrams for
each construction stage in the introduction to this example).
9_3 Construction Stages.sst.
Defining basic loads
55. We will now apply some basic loads to our model, starting with dead loads for
steel.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down list
9-29

to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Volume and Load
W1 to -77kN/m
3
. Change the Name to Steel Girder Dead Load.
On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
Longitudinal Beams. Draw a box around the internal longitudinal beams to
assign the loads. Click on OK to close the form. Read and click OK on the
warning message if it appears.

We will now apply the dead loads for the concrete slab.
Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to
Length and Load W1 to -21.8kN/m. Change the Name to Span 1 Concrete
Slab and select the 4 inner beams in the left span. Click on OK to close the
form.

Now define the concrete slab load for the right span in a similar way.

9-30

56. The next step is to assign dead loads for the concrete edge upstands to the
model.
Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load| Beam Element Load
Volume and Load W1 to -23.6kN/m
3
. Draw a box around the full length of
the edge beams.

Change Name to Concrete Upstand Dead Load and click on OK to close the
Define Beam Loading form.

57. Next we will create three SDL cases using bridge deck patch loads.
Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 4.63kN/m
2
.
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
deselect Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam
Elements. The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end lines.
Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right hand span end
line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span end line. (See the
screen shot on the following page for details of the carriageway edge
locations). This will apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to SDL
Surfacing. Click OK to close the form.
9-31

2
.
Click on the bottom edge of the bottom footway, the right hand span end line,
the top edge of the bottom footway and the left hand span end line. This will
apply a patch to the bottom footway. Change Name to SDL Footway 1 then
click OK to close the form.

Repeat the process for the top footway. Click on the Add button and select
Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop down list to open the Define Bridge
Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per unit area to 4.8kN/m
2
.
Click on the bottom edge of the top footway, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the top footway and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the top footway. Change Name to SDL Footway 2. On the graphics
window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and select Design /
Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam Elements then click OK
to close the form.

58. We will now define a SDL barrier load.
9-32

Length and Load W1 to -2kN/m.
Longitudinal Beams. Draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to
assign the loads.

Change Name to SDL Barriers and click on OK to close the Define Beam
Loading form.

59. The next step is to define the construction loads. Click on the Add button and
select Beam Member Load| Beam Element Load from the drop down list to
open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load Type
to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Length and Load W1 to
-5.5kN/m. Draw a box around the 4 inner beams of the left hand span to
assign the loads. Change Name to Construction Loads Span 1 and click on
OK to close the Define Beam Loading form.
9-33

Now define the construction loads for the right span in a similar way.
60. The next step is to define the construction stage loading. This defines which
loads are present at each construction stage.
Click on Open Construction Stage Loading... near bottom of the Navigation
Pane to open the Define Construction Stage Loading form. Click on the Stage
drop down on the form and select Stage 1: Construction. In the Construction
Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the Status drop down to
select Add Load for loadcases L1, L2 and L9.

Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select Stage 2: Construction.
In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the
Status drop down to select Remove Load for loadcase L9 and Add Load for
loadcases L3 and L10.
9-34

Status drop down to select Remove Load for loadcase L10 and Add Load
for loadcase L4.

Status drop down to select No Change for loadcase L1, L2, L3, L4, L9 and
L10.

The Show Overview button can be clicked on to show an overview of the
construction stage loading. There is a scroll bar at the bottom of the form which
9-35

can be used to check at what construction stage each load is applied or
removed. Click on the Hide Overview button when you have checked that the
construction stage loading has been defined correctly. Click on OK to close
the form.

9_3 Basic Loads.sst.
Load Compilations
62. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Ensure that the Limit State is set
to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button to input the three
dead loads at stage 1. In the first row of the table change the value of gamma
to 1.05. Click on OK to close the Compile Loading Patterns form.

Click on the Add button and select Dead Loads at Stage 2. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button
to input the three dead loads at stage 2. Click on OK to close the form.
9-36

to input the two dead loads at stage 3. Click on OK to close the form.

to input the four dead loads at stage 4. In the first, second and third rows of the
table change the gamma value to 1.75. In the fourth row of the table change
the gamma value to 1.2. Click on OK to close the form.

63. The next step is to create dead load compilations for SLS.
Right click on the compilation for dead loads at stage 1 and select Copy to
create a copy of the compilation. Click on the Limit State drop down and select
Serviceability. Click on Yes on the confirm form to change the values of the
gamma factor to the correct values. Click on OK to close the form.
9-37

Now define the serviceability compilations for construction stages 2 and 3 in a
similar way.
Right click on the compilation for dead loads at stage 4 and select Copy to
create a copy of the compilation. Click on the Limit State drop down and select
Serviceability. Click on Yes on the confirm form to change the values of the
gamma factor. In the first, second and third rows of the table change the
gamma value to 1.2. Click on OK to close the form.

9_3 Compilations.sst.
Analysis and Exporting Results
65. Select the menu item Calculate|Analyse. The program will open a form
showing the progress of the analysis. Once the analysis has completed, click
on the Done button.

9-38

66. We will now export the results from the analysis to a .sld file.
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam just
below the centre of the left span. It will be highlighted in red. Click on the OK
button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

67. In the Design Load Case column and select Construction stage 1A. Click in
the L/C/E column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case column
and select C1: Dead Loads at Stage 1 ULS. Repeat a similar process in the
other rows. The ULS Factor in the fifth row of the table needs to be set to a
value of 0.

68. When the table is as shown above, click on the Export Loads to File... button
save the results in a .sld file called My BS Example 9_3 DL and SDL Span
1.sld. Click on the OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Loads
form.
Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes and then
assigned section properties to it using beam and section files created earlier in this
example. Construction stages were defined. We then applied some basic dead and
superimposed dead loads to the structure. Load compilations were then defined. The
structure was analysed and the results exported to a .sld file. For a structure such as
this, where construction stages have been defined, the recommended working
procedure would be to follow the steps above and then re-open the file My BS
Example 9_3 Section properties.sst and use the automated load optimisation to
generate live loads for the carriageway on the structure. The results from this .sst file
9-39

would be exported to a second .sld file. In addition, a line beam module file would be
defined and used to analyse the effects of temperature and shrinkage.

Refer to Example 8.1 in this example manual for information on the line beam module.
Note that the differential temperature parameters would have to be set in the beam
module file prior to it being assigned in the line beam module. The line beam module
would be analysed and the results exported to a third .sld file. The three .sld files
would then be imported into the composite beam file so that design checks could be
performed. See Example 5.1 of this example manual for advice on composite beam
design using Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.

9-40

9-41

9.4. Non-Linear Analysis Flat Slab Bridge Deck
Subjects Covered:
Grillage model; Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Slab
Properties; Lift Off Supports; Basic Loads; Dead Load Compilations; Live Load
Optimisation; Non-Linear Analysis; Results
Outline

In this example we are going to model a 2 span concrete flat slab structure with a
constant thickness of 600mm. It is to be modelled as a grillage and because the skew
of the deck is 45 degrees (ie. greater than 15 to 20 degrees), an orthogonal mesh will
be defined. The deck will have 7 discrete bearings at each end of each span. The
bridge will have lift-off supports. The left hand span will be 11 metres and the right
hand span will be 20 metres.

Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. We will then use the
automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After performing a
linear analysis of the load cases, we will examine those load compilations for which
non-linear effects are considered to be significant. The Non-Linear Analysis Control
form will then be used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to the relevant live load compilations. We will then run a non-linear
analysis and look at some results.
9-42

Procedure
1. We start by defining the alignments and outline of our structure.
Start the program and then create a new structure using the menu item
File|New|Structure. Set the correct analysis type using the menu item
Data|Structure Type|Refined Analysis.

2. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to 2 Span Flat Slab
Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Non-Linear Analysis. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (42,0) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next button and
then click OK to define the design line. Click OK to close the Define Design
Line form.

(-5.5, -4.5), (-4.5, 4.5), (4.5, 5.5).

The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
9-43

Navigation Pane.

button. Select the start point, angle and length radio button, then click Next.
Enter (0, -5.5) for the co-ordinates of the point, 45 for the angle and 16 for
the length. Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click
OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.

down list. Give the line an offset of 5.5m and press Enter on the keyboard.
and give it an offset of -5.5m.

9-44

Repeat this process to add a line at 31m. Click on the OK button to close the
of the structure as shown below.

9_4 Layout.sst.

Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the pier and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the
table as above and on the graphics as below:

9-45

9. The next step is to define the two meshes which make up the grillage.
Set Longitudinal to 7 and Transverse to 2 and then click on the four edges
of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge. (You may need to press
before clicking in the graphics window). Click OK to close the Define Mesh
form.
list. Change Name to Span 2 and set Transverse to 6, then click on the four
edges of the right hand span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to
close the Define Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the grillage as shown below:

the entire structure. Click on the Support Type drop down menu on the form
and set it to Lift Off. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that only the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to
Variable then click on the centre node on the left abutment (node 22).
Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in DX and
DY. Click on the centre node on the right abutment (node 93) and change the
support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on OK to close
the form.
11. We will now assign section properties to our grillage.
button and select Continuous Slab. In the Continuous Slab Properties form
change the depth to 600, leave the other fields set to the default values as
9-46

shown below and then draw a box around the entire structure. Click on OK to
close the form.

12. Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
Description to Diaphragm and set both Width and Depth to 10mm. Again,
leave the other properties at their default concrete values and select the
diaphragm members at the leftmost support. Click Yes on the Confirm form to
overwrite these 6 members. Click on OK to close the form.

concrete.
W1 to -24kN/m.
Longitudinal Beams. Draw a box around the entire structure.
9-47

Change Name to Concrete Dead Load and click on OK to close the Define
Beam Loading form. Use the filter drop down menu and select Select All.

unit area to 4kN/m
2
and press Enter on the keyboard.
deselect Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam
Elements. The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end lines.
Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right hand span end
line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span end line. (See the
screen shot below for details of the carriageway edge locations). This will
apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to SDL Carriageway. Click

9-48

unit area to 5kN/m
2
.
Click on the bottom edge of the bottom verge, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the bottom verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the bottom verge. Change Name to SDL Bottom Verge then click

Repeat the process for the top verge, changing the Name to SDL Top Verge.
select Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam Elements
then click OK to close the form.
16. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS and SLS.
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click on the + button near the
bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In the first row of the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the Concrete Dead Load case. Note that
the default gamma is correct at 1.15 and change the Name: to DL ULS.
Close the form with the OK button.
17. Repeat the previous step above but this time set the Limit State: field to
Serviceability (a prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and
the Name: to DL SLS
Click 3 times on the + button near the bottom of the form to add 3 rows to the
table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the three SDL
load cases and change gamma for each to 1.75. Close the form with the
OK button.
The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. When the factors are
changed by the program change them all manually to 1.2. Click the form with
the OK button.
9-49

Live Load Optimisation
Click on the Data|Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence Surface
Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Joint then click on the joints at the top left
corner of span 1 and the bottom left corner of span 1 in the graphics window
(joints 1 and 43 respectively). Set the Scope field to Negative in the top two
rows of the table. This will define influence surfaces for negative support
reactions at these two joints. (Make sure Beam Elements are selected on the
Objects tab).


9-50

just generated.
Square to Design Line for All influences.

Once you have set the options, click on the Compile Loading Patterns button
to carry out the load optimisation. The form will change to show the status of
the load optimisation. When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads
generated and the graphics window will show the loading pattern for the
selected influence surface.

9-51

Click OK on the BD 37/01 Highway Bridge Live Load Optimisation form and
click OK on the Influence Surface Generation form.
form will open. Make sure all tick boxes on the form are ticked and click OK.
Click on Yes to All on the Confirm form that opens.

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, this form will show a line of text stating that Non-linear
effects are significant in 12 compilations. Hence, results will not be available
for 12 compilations until a non-linear analysis has been performed. Click on the
Done button.
9_4 Basic and Live Loads.sst
Results Processing
25. We will now examine the compilations in which non-linear effects are
significant. We will add the relevant dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to those compilations. This is necessary because, by their nature,
the results of compilations in which non-linear results are significant cannot be
simply added together after the linear analysis has been performed. Instead
the loads in those compilations must be added together and then analysed
together in a non linear analysis. When the non-linear analysis has been run
we will look at some of the results produced.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Non-linear analysis. The Non-Linear
Analysis Control form will open. A red circle next to a compilation denotes a
compilation in which non-linear effects are significant. Click on the Include
Controller button to open the Include Controller sub-form. Tick the tickboxes
for compilations C5, C6, C9 and C10. These are ultimate limit state
9-52

compilations so the ultimate limit state compilations C1 and C3 for dead and
superimposed dead load are selected using the tickboxes in the Dead Load
Compilations dropdown. Click on the Apply to All Selected Compilations
button.

Click on the Clear Selection button and tick the tickboxes for compilations C7,
C8, C11 and C12. These are serviceability limit state compilations so the
serviceability limit state compilations C2 and C4 for dead and superimposed
dead load are selected using the tickboxes in the Dead Load Compilations
dropdown. Click on the Apply to All Selected Compilations button. Click OK
to close the sub-form.

Note that live load compilations C5 to C8 continue to be denoted by a red circle
indicating that they are still non-linear, despite the addition of the dead loads.
However, compilations C9 to C12 are now denoted by a green circle indicating
9-53

that they are linear now that the dead loads have been added. This indicates
that the dead loads have counteracted the lift-off effects caused by the live
loads in compilations C9 to C12.
26. Click on the Analyse button on the Non-Linear Analysis Control form to run
the non-linear analysis. Click on the Done buttons on both forms to close both
forms.
27. We will now look at the results produced for the analysis run in the previous
step.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer. Click on the
Result Type drop down and select Compilation from the list of options. In the
Name drop down select compilation C5, set Result For to Joint and Effect to
Support Reactions. Ensure that the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar is set to Fz. Note that the names of the dead and
superimposed dead load compilations which were defined as acting
concurrently with this live load compilation on the Non-Linear Analysis Control
form are displayed in the Dead Load Compilations field.
The results in the table show that the support reactions at 4 of the nodes are
effectively zero. This indicates that there is lift-off of supports at 4 bearings
when this live compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and
superimposed dead compilations.

28. Now click on the Name drop down and select compilation C9. The results in the
table show that the support reactions at all of the bearings are positive, non-
zero values. This indicates that there is no lift-off of supports when this live
compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and superimposed
dead load compilations.
9-54

29. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save the model as My BS Example
9_4 Complete Model.sst and close the program.
Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes and then
assigned section properties to it. We then applied some basic loads to the structure
and used the automated load optimisation to generate specific live loads in order to
investigate lift-off of supports. After running a linear analysis of the structure we found
that non-linear effects were significant in several load combinations. The Non-Linear
Analysis Control form was then used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed
dead load compilations to the relevant live load compilations before running a non-
linear analysis. We then looked at some of the results.

9-55

9.5. Offset Beams For Finite Element Decks
Subjects Covered:
Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Composite Beam
Structures; FE deck with Offset Beams; Member Eccentricities; Dead Load
Compilations; Transfer Results to Beam Design
Outline

In this example we are going to model a single span bridge of 21m span. The bridge
structure is constructed with four Y7 prestress beams acting compositely with a
concrete slab. The structure is modelled using a finite element slab with imported
prestress beams which are assigned as Offset Beams. This process defines the
prestress beam as a beam element with an automatically defined vertical eccentricity
relative to the deck. Upstands are added as edge beam members with an appropriate
vertical eccentricity.

The beam data for the two inner beams will be imported directly from beam files
created in example 4.3. In addition, an edge section with a width and depth of 200mm
will be added to the beam file created in example 4.3 to create a new beam file that
will be assigned to the two outer beams. The slab will have a thickness of 200mm.
The deck will have 4 discrete bearings at each end of the span.

9-56

Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. We will then use the
automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After performing an
analysis of the load cases, we will transfer some of the results to one of the beam
files.
Procedure
Creating the edge beam
1. We start by defining a beam file that will be assigned to the two outer beams of
the deck.
Start the program and open the data file BS Example 4_3.sam created in
section 4.3.

2. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Prestress Beam
Outer Beam. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. Click on the Data|Define Beam... menu item to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form. Click on the Define drop down and select Section. This will
open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form.
Click on the Component column in the third row of the table and select In situ
regular. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to Rectangle already so enter 200mm in both
the width and depth fields and click OK.
Change the X offset to -900 and Y offset to 1470 to put the edge section in
the correct location. Click OK to close both forms.

4. Click on the File|Save... menu item and save the file as My BS Example 9_5
Outer Beam.
9-57

5. Next we define the alignments and outline of our structure.

6. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Single Span Prestress
Beam Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Offset Beams. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of
Line form.

(-3.8, -3.5), (-3.5, 3.5), (3.5, 3.8).


9-58

Navigation Pane.

button twice. Enter (0, -4) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (0, 4) for point 2.
Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click OK again
to close the Define Setting Out Object form.

down list. Give the line an offset of 4m and press Enter on the keyboard.
and give it an offset of -4m.

Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a third row to the table then
click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the
drop down list. Give it an offset of 21m. Click on the OK button to close the
9-59

of the structure as shown below:

9_5 Layout.sst.
12. We will now begin to define the mesh geometry. The first step is to define the
locations of the span ends.

Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the table as
above and on the graphics as below:

13. The next step is to define the mesh.
9-60

Mesh form. Set Member Type to Finite Elements and Mesh Type to
Orthogonal to span. Set Longitudinal to 14 and Transverse to 8 and then
click on the four edges of the deck, starting with the bottom edge. (You may
need to press Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be
input properly before clicking in the graphics window). Change the equal size
option for the Longitudinal elements to set size. In the Set Longitudinal Size
form that should now be visible set the spacing factor for the two end elements
to 0.5 and click OK to close the sub-form. Click OK to close the Define
Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the mesh as shown below:

graphics window and set it to All Joints, then select the 8 nodes shown below.
In the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that only
the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click on the
node just above centre of the left abutment (node 46). Change the support
conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in DX and DY. Click on the node
just above the centre of the right abutment (node 60) and change the support
conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on OK to close the
form.

15. We now need to add beam members along the edges of the slab to represent
the upstand. This is done by clicking on the Sub Model Members node to open
9-61

the Define Sub Model Members form so that additional members can be
created.

16. In the graphics window click on the toolbar button to draw a single member.
Then click on the bottom left corner node of the mesh and then again on the
bottom right node to draw one member. Repeat this on the top edge of the
mesh. These members can then be split into 14 beam element segments by
using the Split Beam Element task in the Define Sub Model Members form.
17. In the split beam elements form select the at nodes along element option, click
on the edge beam and then click on the Apply button. Dismiss the information
window and repeat for the beam on the top edge of the mesh. Click OK to
close the form.
18. We will now import properties to be assigned to our mesh.
button and select Prestress Design Beam. This will open the Import file form.
Click on the Browse button and open the file BS Example 4_3.sam created
in section 4.3 of this guide. We will leave the Beam Section Reference... field
set to the default setting of centroid because the beams will be assigned as
offset beams. Change Description to Inner Beam and click OK to close the
form.
Follow a similar procedure to import the outer beam file created earlier in this
example.

19. We will now assign the beam properties we imported in the previous step as
Offset Beams.
9-62

Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the structure node in
the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add button. Select Offset Beam
from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Offset Beam form. Set
Section Property to Inner Beam then click on the inner beam just above the
centre of the deck. It will be highlighted in red and an Information form will
appear. Click OK on the Information form and click on the Add Additional
Offset Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam form opens with Inner
Beam automatically selected in the Section Property field. Click on the beam
just below the centre of the deck. It will be highlighted in red as shown below.

20. Click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam
form opens. Use the Section Property dropdown to select Outer Beam and
click on the outer beam near the top edge of the deck. It will be highlighted in
red as shown below.

Click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam
form opens with Outer Beam automatically selected in the Section Property
field. Click on the outer beam nearest the bottom of the deck. It will be
highlighted in red. Click OK to close the form.
21. The next step is to reverse the direction of the longitudinal beam nearest the
bottom of the deck to ensure that the beam has the correct orientation.
Click on the Longitudinal Beams node to open the Longitudinal Beams form.
Click on the fourth row in the table then on Reverse Order in the list of Beam
Tasks. The direction of the selected longitudinal beam members will be
reversed as shown by the arrow heads on the graphics window. Click on OK
to close the form.
9-63

Next we need to define a section property for the upstand.
Click on the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Add|Parametric Shapes. Define a section, 200mm wide by
200mm deep. Call the section Edge Upstand and assign it to the two lines of
edge members and then close the form.
22. We will apply an eccentricity to the edge upstand so that the height of the
centroid of the section is at the same height as it is in the beam file.
Go back to the Structure tab and click on the Add toolbar button and select
Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities. Click on the Insert Record button (+)
to add a new row to the eccentricity table. Enter 200mm in the Start Z column
and -100mm in the Start Y column then draw a box around the upstand
members at the top of the deck to select them. Click on the Insert Record
button (+) to add a second row to the eccentricity table. Enter 200mm in the
Start Z column and 100mm in the Start Y column then draw a box around the
upstand members at the bottom of the deck to select them. Call the
eccentricities Edge Upstand and close the form.

23. The next step is to modify the composite members created when the offset
beams were defined to include the upstand edge. To do this, go to the
Calculate|Define Composite Member menu item. Change to a plan view and
make sure the pick mode is set to Beam Element. Select Composite Member
3 and draw a box around the top upstand. Repeat the process for Composite
Member 4, adding the bottom upstand and then close the Define Composite
Member form.
9-64

24. We can check that the structure has been defined correctly by clicking on the
icon to activate the advanced model view. Click on the icon to activate
the dynamic view function.

26. We will now apply some basic dead loads for concrete to the prestress beams
and edge upstand sections of our model. (Other examples in this manual, such
as those in chapter 10, give guidance on applying superimposed dead loads
and live load optimisation).
W1 to -24kN/m.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
prestress beams and edge upstands. (Note that because the deck is a finite
element deck and the load type selected is a beam element load, loads have
only been assigned to the prestress beams and edge upstands. Under different
circumstances the filter tool could be used to ensure that loads are assigned
only to certain members).
9-65

Change Name to Concrete Beam Dead Load and click on OK to close the
Define Beam Loading form.

27. Next we will apply some concrete dead loads to the slab.
Click on the Add toolbar button and select Finite Element Load|External
Load. Draw a box around the entire structure. Change the Load Type to
Force/volume, Direction to Global Z, Load to -24 and Name to Concrete
FE Dead Load. Click OK to close the form.

28. For this example we will create dead load compilations for ULS only.
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click twice on the + button near
the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. In the first row of the table
click on the Load Name column and select L1: Concrete Beam Dead Load
from the list. In the second row, click in the Load Name column and select L2:
9-66

Concrete FE Dead Load from the list. The default gamma values of 1.15 are
correct. Click on OK to close the Compile Loading Patterns form.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... to run the analysis.

analysis has completed, click on the Done button.
31. We will now look at some of the results produced for the analysis.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer. Click on the
Result Type field drop down and select Compilation. Click on the Result For
drop down and select Composite Member from the list. The Name field
should show compilation C1. Click on the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar. You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz
already ticked. Tick the My option as well to add the bending moment diagram
to the plot.
Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Composite Member. Add
Composite Member 4 to the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the
filter form. Click on the icon to change the viewing direction.
When you have finished viewing the results click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select Select All to remove the filter. Select File|Close
Tabular Results to close the Results Viewer.
9-67

32. We will transfer results from the analysis to one of the beams defined in the
prestress beam design module.
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam near
the bottom edge of the deck. Note that Composite Member 4 is shown in the
Composite Member field and it is highlighted in red in the graphics view. Click
on the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

33. We will select the dead load compilation we defined and transfer the results to
one of the prestress beam files.
On the Assign Load Cases form, click in the Design Load Case column and
select Construction stage 1A. Leave Comb. set to 1. Click in the L/C/E
column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case column and select
envelope C1: Dead Loads at Stage 1 ULS. The ULS Factor will be
automatically set to 1.1.
The Assign Load Cases form will look like this:
9-68

Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button to transfer the results to the
prestress beam design module.
34. The beam module will display the load effects we have just transferred in
tabular and graphical form.
Click on the OK button on the Define Composite Beam Loads form and click
Yes on the confirmation box which appears. Click on the File|Save menu
item to save the loads in the beam file.
35. Now that the loads have been transferred, we can check that the beam has
sufficient capacity under all loads.
36. After weve checked the beam design we can save the beam and structure.
Summary
In this example we defined a single span structure. The slab and beam properties
were imported from beam files and assigned as Offset Beams. Using this method to
assign the section properties means that the properties of the slab are assigned to the
FE deck and the properties of the prestress beam are assigned to beam elements
which are offset vertically from the soffit of the deck. We then applied some basic
dead loads to the structure. We analysed the load cases and looked at some of the
results for them. We then exported the results to a beam file where the design of the
beam could be checked following steps similar to those outlined in example 5.2 of this
guide.

Note that the beam files were defined in such a way that the widths of the slabs were
suitable for the widths of the finite elements in the deck to which they were assigned.
Also, the spans of the beams were defined such that they matched the span of the
deck.
9-69

9.6. 3 Sided FE Structure with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D FE Model; Sub Model Planes; Setting Out Objects; Construction
Lines; Meshing; Support Local Axes; Spring Supports; Filtering; Copying Sub Models;
Conforming Sides; Temperature Effects in FE Slabs; Compilations; Hydrostatic Loads;
Soil Pressure Loads; Transfer Results to .sld File
Outline
In this example we are going to model a single span 3 sided structure. Two models
will be defined as described below for two different design situations.

Model 1
This first model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when live loads
and positive temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed
dead load. It is assumed that the passive resistance of the soil will be mobilised when
the live loads and positive temperature effects cause a net outward deflection at the
tops of the abutments. Hence, in this model the horizontal stiffness of the soil is
modelled by spring supports to estimate the effect of the abutments on the span
moments. Each abutment consists of a row of piles acting compositely with a
reinforced concrete wall. It is assumed that the piles are embedded in rock at the
bottom of the walls and therefore the base of each abutment is fully fixed in all
directions.
9-70

The deck will be a concrete flat slab of 800mm thickness and the abutment walls will
be 600mm thick. The skew of the deck is 30 degrees, however because the deck is to
be modelled as a finite element structure, a skew mesh will be defined. The
abutments will also be modelled as finite element structures and conforming sides
will be assigned to both sides of the fold where the deck adjoins the abutments.
Defining these conforming sides will prevent spurious rotations of the nodes along
the fold when load is applied. The span of the deck will be 15 metres and height of the
abutment walls will be 7 metres.

The deck has been defined as a pre-prepared file in which the deck geometry,
carriageway, dead and superimposed dead loads have already been defined. After
the abutments have been defined, dead loads and temperature loads will be applied
manually. We will then use the automated load optimisation to create live loads for
the model. After performing an analysis, the results for a composite member that has
been defined in the deck model will be saved in a sld file.

Model 2
The second model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when negative
temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed dead load. In this
model it is assumed that the active soil pressure will be mobilised when the negative
temperature effects cause a net inward deflection at the tops of the abutments.
Hence, in this model the spring supports of Model 1 are replaced by a uniform
horizontal soil pressure. A hydrostatic load which varies with depth will also be added
to this model to represent the water contained in the soil. The water table will be 2
9-71

metres below the level of the deck. In all other respects, this model will be identical to
Model 1.

Other models would have to be defined to ascertain the load effects to be used in the
design of other elements of the bridge. As with all of the examples in this manual, this
example is primarily intended to be a guide to using Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design. It is recommended that users consult current technical documentation on the
analysis and design of integral bridges if considering such as structure.
Procedure
Setup & Geometry
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file BS Example 9_6
Deck.sst.
2. Set the title to Deck with Abutments using the Date | Titles menu option and
put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. We will define the abutment at the left hand end of the deck. In the Structure
navigation window click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model from the
selection list. This will create an entry in the navigation tree and open the 2D
Sub Model Plane form.
4. We wish to define this frame in a plane parallel to the edge of the deck, so click
on the Define button to define a new origin and plane for the sub model.
5. Define the origin by clicking on the joint at the top left corner of the deck as
shown below and click on the Next button.
9-72

6. The orientation of the plane needs changing for the new sub-model so click on
the joint at the bottom left corner of the deck and click on the Next button
twice. Click OK on both forms.

7. Right click on the first node of the new sub model as shown below and select
Rename. Enter the name Left Abutment and click OK to close the sub
form. The sub model for the deck can be renamed in a similar way.
9-73

8. Next we will describe the edges of the abutment using setting out objects and
construction lines.
Click on the on the 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment node in the Navigation Pane
then click on the Add button. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define
Setting Out Object form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom
left of the form (this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on
the Next button twice. Enter (0, 0) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (0, -7)
for point 2. Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click
OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.

of line types. Click on Offset parallel to SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the
drop down list. Give the line an offset of -11.547m and press Enter on the
keyboard. Click on Perpendicular to SOL to add a new row to the table. Click
in the SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the drop
down list and give it a chainage of 7m. Click on the OK button to close the
of the structure as shown below:
9-74

9. To create a mesh for the abutment click on the 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment
node in the Navigation Pane again then click on the Add button. Select Mesh
from the drop down menu.
This will open the Define Mesh form. Set Member Type to Finite Elements
and Mesh Type to Skew. Set Transverse to 8 and Longitudinal to 11 and
then click on the four edges of the abutment, starting with the bottom edge and
working around in an anti-clockwise direction. (You may need to press Enter
on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly before
clicking in the graphics window). Change the equal size option for the
Longitudinal elements to set size. In the Set Longitudinal Size form that
should now be visible set the spacing factor for the two end elements to 0.5.
Click OK to close the sub-form. Repeat this for the Transverse elements.
Change the Name to Left Abutment and click OK to close the Define Mesh
form. Click OK on the Information form. The graphics will now show a plot of
the mesh as shown below (note that the local axes are annotated in the screen
shot below):

9-75

9_6 Left Abutment Mesh.sst.
Defining supports
11. Next we will define the horizontal spring supports at the abutment. Spring
supports of six different stiffnesses will be defined with stiffnesses in proportion
to the surface area of abutment wall supported. (Note that in many cases the
stiffness of the soil will increase with depth, however for this example a
constant stiffness of 6000kN/m has been assumed over the height of the wall).
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Left
Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the filter form.
graphics window and set it to All Joints, then select the top 2 corner nodes
shown below. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that the DY direction is set to Spring and DX and DZ directions
are free. Set the value in the first row of the Direct Stiffness Y column to 375.

9-76

12. The direction of the spring supports will be defined relative to a defined axis set
to ensure that the springs act in a direction normal to the plane of the abutment
wall.
Click on the icon to change the viewing direction. Click on the + button
next to the Support Constraints about field to open the Define Support Local
Axes sub-form. Click on the joint at the top right corner of the abutment then
click on the joint at the top left corner of the abutment. Note that the angle in
the Beta field has changed to 60 degrees. Click OK to close the sub-form.
Change Name to Spring 375 kN per m and click OK to close the Define
Supported Nodes form.

13. Define the other five supports as described above. Note that Defined Axes
Set needs to be selected in the Support Constraints about drop down on the
Define Supported Nodes form for each new support type. A summary table of
the spring stiffnesses and the nodes to which they are applied is shown below.
Spring Stiffness (kN/m) Node Numbers
375 1 & 144
1125 14, 131, 157, 168, 229 & 240
1500 27, 40, 53, 66, 79, 92, 105, 118, 169,
180, 181, 192, 193, 204, 205, 216, 217
& 228
3375 158, 167, 230 & 239
4500 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166,
170, 179, 182, 191, 194, 203, 206, 215,
218, 227, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,
237 & 238
6000 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178,
183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190,
195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202,
207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214,
219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225 & 226

9-77

14. We will now define the fixed supports at the base of the abutment.
the Define Supported Nodes form. Select the 12 nodes at the base of the wall.
In the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that the
Rotational Restraint is fixed about all 3 axes in addition to the supports being
fixed in DX, DY and DZ. Select Defined Axes Set in the Support Constraints
about drop down and click OK on the sub-form. Change Name to Fixed
Bases and click on OK to close the form.
When these supports have been defined the lower part of the Navigation Pane
will look like this:

Section Properties
15. We will now assign section properties to the finite elements of the abutment.
button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite Element. In the
Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 600. Box around the
whole structure and change the Description: to 600mm Abutment. Click OK
to close the form.
16. Next we will copy the abutment sub model to the right hand end of the structure
to define the right hand end abutment.
Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove the filter. Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Right click
on the first node of the Left Abutment sub model and select Copy. In the
Copy Sub Model form click on the Define button to define a new origin and
plane for the copied sub model.

9-78

Click on the joint at the bottom right corner of the deck then click on the Next
button. The orientation of the plane needs changing for the new sub-model so
click on the node at the top right corner of the deck. Click Next on the next
button twice then OK to confirm. Click Next and OK to close the Copy Sub
Model form. (Note that it is important to follow this sequence in order for the
spring supports to be copied with the correct orientation relative to the
abutment wall). Right click on the first node of the new sub model and select
Rename. Enter the name Right Abutment and click OK to close the sub
form. Also, click on the M1: Left Abutment node of the new sub-model to
open the Define Mesh form. Change the Name to Right Abutment and click
OK to close the form and click OK on the Information form.
17. Conforming sides will now be assigned to both sides of the fold where the
deck adjoins the abutments. Defining these conforming sides will prevent
spurious rotations of the nodes along the fold when load is applied.
button at the top of the navigation window and select Advanced FE
Properties|Conforming Sides. In the Specify FE Conforming Sides form,
ensure that the Both sides of fold radio button is selected and the Stiffness
Factor is set to 1. Click on or near the two folds in the graphics window to
select them. They will be highlighted as shown below. Click OK to close the
form.

9-79

9_6 Supports and Sections.sst.
Basic Loads
19. The dead and superimposed dead loads have already been applied at the deck
in the pre-prepared file. We will now apply the concrete self-weight to the
abutments.
and select Finite Element Load|External Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z and Load to -24kN/m. Change
Name to Concrete DL Abutment.

Abutment and Right Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to
close the filter form.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
abutments. Click OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select Select All to remove the filter.
20. In this model we will apply positive temperature loads to the deck as discussed
in the introduction to Model 1. First we will apply the differential temperature
effects. (The temperature input data has been derived using a procedure
similar to that outlined in Example 7.4 of this manual).
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane, T-Bottom to 2.31
and press Enter on the keyboard.
9-80

Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Deck to
the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the filter form.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign differential temperature loads
to the deck. In the second row set Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to
9.37. Draw a box around the entire structure again to assign the gradient
loads. Change Name to Diff Temperature +ve Loads. Click OK to close the
form.
21. Now we will apply the seasonal load effects to the deck.
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to 10.
Change Name to Grad Seasonal Temp Loads +ve.

Draw a box around the entire structure to assign seasonal temperature loads to
the deck. Click OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter drop
down and select Select All to remove the filter.
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click twice on the + button near
the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to
9-81

select the Concrete DL Deck case. In the second row of the compilation table
use the drop down list to select the Concrete DL Abutment case. Note that
the default gamma is correct at 1.15 and change the Name: to DL ULS.
Close the form with the OK button.
23. The compilation for DL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The factors are changed
by the program 1. Change the Name: to DL SLS. Click OK to close the
form.
24. Click on the Add button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation. Set
the Limit State field to Ultimate. Click 3 times on the + button near the
bottom of the form to add 3 rows to the table. In the compilation table use the
drop down list to select the three SDL load cases. Change the gamma for
each load to 1.75. Change the Name: to SDL ULS. Click OK to close the
form.
25. The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. Change the gamma for
each load to 1.2. Change the Name accordingly and click OK to close the
form.
26. Click on the Add button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to
the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Diff
Temperature +ve Loads load case. Set the gamma for the load to 1. Change
the Name: to Diff Temperature ULS. Click OK to close the form.
27. The compilation for SLS differential temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. Change
the factor to 0.8. Change the Name accordingly and click OK to close the
form.
28. Click on the Add button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to
the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Grad
Seasonal Temp Loads +ve load case. Set the gamma for the load to 1.3.
Change the Name: to Seasonal Temperature ULS. Click OK to close the
form.
29. The compilation for SDL seasonal temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. Change
the factor to 1.0. Change the Name accordingly and click OK to close the
form.
9-82

Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Composite Member Element then click on
the element shown below. Set the Direction/Axis field to y and the Scope field
to Sagging in the top row of the table. This will define an influence surface for
mid-span sagging at this element.

9-83

Set Generate by to Direct (Defined) and set Method to (2) Original. Click on
the Analyse button. A progress box will open. Click on the Done button
when the analysis has completed.

just generated.

selected influence surface.
9-84

Click OK on the Live Load Optimisation form and click OK on the Influence
Surface Generation form.
9_6 Model 1 Loads.sst.
34. Select the menu item Calculate|Analyse and click OK to start the analysis.
Click on Yes to All. The program will open a form showing the progress of the
analysis. Once the analysis has completed, click on the Done button.

35. We will now export the results from the analysis to a .sld file.
9-85

the Select Beam form. Click in the Composite Member field and select
Composite Member: 1. It will be highlighted in the graphics view. Click on
the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

36. Click in the Design Load Case column and select Construction stage 1A.
Click in the L/C/E column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case
column and select C1: DL ULS. Repeat a similar process in the other rows.
The ULS Factor in the seventh, tenth and twelfth rows of the table need to be
set to a value of 0. The SLS Factor in the third row of the table need to be set
to a value of 0. The SLS Factor in the eighth and twelfth rows of the table
need to be set to a value of 1. For this example we will set Method to (2)
Original.

37. When the table is as shown above, click on the Export Loads to File... button
save the results in a .sld file called My BS Example 9_6 Model 1.sld.
Defining Model 2
38. We will now adjust the model we have defined to convert it to Model 2. We will
start by removing the six types of spring support at the abutment.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Right click on the Spring
375kN per m node of the tree and select Delete. Repeat this procedure for
the other five types of spring support but do not delete the Fixed Bases
supports.
39. Now that the spring supports representing the stiffness of the soil have been
deleted we will define some external loads representing the horizontal soil
pressure on the wall.
9-86

NB: In the following steps check the orientation of the horizontal loads applied
to the abutments in the graphics window and compare these with the diagram
in the introduction to Model 2 at the beginning of this example. Alter the sign
convention of the magnitude of the load as necessary to ensure that the loads
have the correct orientation as shown in the diagram.
and select Finite Element Load|External Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to Force/area, Direction to Local Z and Load to -21kN/m
2
. Change
Name to Soil Pressure.

Abutment and Right Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to
close the filter form.
Draw a box around the left abutment to assign soil pressure loads to the left
abutment. In the second row of the table set Load Type to Force/area,
Direction to Local Z and Load to 21kN/m
2
and draw a box around the right
hand abutment. Click OK to close the form.
40. Hydrostatic loads will now be applied to the abutments. The datum height will
be input as being 2 metres below the level of the deck because that is the
height of the water table.
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Hydrostatic Load from
the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first
row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to Below datum, Density to -10 and
Datum to -2. Draw a box around the left abutment to assign hydrostatic loads
to the left abutment. In the second row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to
Below datum, Density to 10 and Datum to -2. Draw a box around the right
abutment. Click OK to close the form.
9-87

41. Next we will adjust the differential temperature loads applied to the deck.
Click on the Diff Temperature +ve Loads node of the tree to open the Define
Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set T-Bottom to 2.08
and press Enter on the keyboard. In the second row set Grad to 1.23.
Change the Name to Diff Temperature ve Loads.

Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Deck to
the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the filter form.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign the altered differential
temperature loads to the deck. Click OK to close the form.
42. Now we will adjust the seasonal load effects at the deck.
Click on the Grad Seasonal Temp Loads +ve node of the tree to open the
Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Grad to -
10. Change Name to Grad Seasonal Temp Loads -ve. Click OK to close
the form. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All
to remove the filter.
9-88

43. The next step is to create a compilation for soil pressure and hydrostatic loads.
button and select Other. Set the Limit State field to Ultimate. Click twice on
the + button near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. In the first
row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Soil Pressure
case and set the Gamma factor to 1.5. In the second row of the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the FE Hydrostatic case and set the
Gamma factor to 1.1. Change the Name: to Soil & Hydro ULS. Click OK
to close the form.
44. The compilation for SLS soil pressure and hydrostatic loads can be created by
copying the ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to
Serviceability. The factors are changed by the program to 1. Set the Gamma
factor on the second row to 1.1. Change the Name accordingly and click
45. We can check that the other compilations have the adjusted loads assigned to
them with the correct gamma factors by opening and closing the Compile
Loading Patterns forms.
9_6 Model 2 Loads.sst.
Follow a procedure similar to that outlined in steps 34 to 37 to analyse the
structure and save the results in a .sld file. Note that dead loads, superimposed
dead loads and live loads should be omitted from the Assign Load Cases form
for model 2. The Assign Load Cases form for model 2 should look like this:

9-89

Summary
In this example we defined an integral bridge consisting of a single span finite
element deck with finite element meshes representing the abutment walls.
Support conditions and loads relating to two different design situations were
defined. In the first model spring supports were defined to represent the stiffness
of the soil. The local axes of these spring supports were defined as being normal
to the plane of the abutment wall. In the second model the spring supports were
replaced by a horizontal soil pressure and a hydrostatic load to represent the
water contained in the soil. The resulting load effects for each design situation
were saved in two .sld files. Load effects from .sld files created in different
analysis files can be imported into the same beam file.
9-90

9-91

9.7. User Defined Vehicles & Convoys
Subjects Covered:
User Defined Vehicles; User Defined Convoys
General background
User Defined Vehicles and Convoys can be used when a vehicle is not included in
the list of default vehicles available in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. It is
worth noting that a user defined Highway vehicle, or a convoy which contains that
user defined Highway vehicle, can be selected on the Load Optimisation form.
However, a user defined Railway vehicle cannot itself be selected on the Load
Optimisation form. Only a convoy containing that user defined Railway vehicle
can be selected. Hence, in this example a user defined railway vehicle is created
for each axle bogie, and then a convoy is defined with the vehicles/bogies
positioned along the length of the convoy. This ensures that the orientation of the
axles in each bogie are radial when the convoy is applied to a structure. The
structure is curved on plan.
Two Assessment Load Wagons as per the Network Rail Structural Assessment of
Underbridges document will be defined. Each of the 4 bogies in the 2 wagons will
be defined as individual user defined vehicles.
Outline
A pre-prepared two span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown
below is supplied with dead and superimposed loads already applied. A convoy
load which will represent two Assessment Load Wagons will also be applied.

Details of the characteristic loads are as follows (4 dead loads already applied):
Dead load of the concrete slab is 24kN/m
3
(fl = 1.15)
Ballast is 0.2m deep and has a density of 20kN/m
3
(fl = 1.75)
9-92

Track and sleepers 5kN/m (fl = 1.2)
Footway loading 7kN/m
2
(fl = 1.75)
2 Assessment Load Wagons as outlined below with dynamic factors of 1.37 for
bending moment and 1.24 for shear (fl = 1.4):

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file with a name of BS
Example 9_8 grillage.sst. Close the Structure overview with the Done
button.
2. Change the title of the example to Curved Grillage Model with Convoy Load
using the Date | Titles menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by:
field before closing the form in the normal way.
User Defined Special Vehicles
The dead and superimposed dead loads of the slab, ballast, track, sleepers
and footways have been applied already in the pre-prepared file. The bogies,
each containing 2 axles, will be defined as user defined special vehicles. (Note
that it is important to enter the data on the Define Special Vehicles form in the
order described in the following steps).

3. Select the menu item Data | Define Special Vehicles... to open the Define
Special Vehicles form.
4. Click on the + button to add a new special vehicle and change the Name to
Wagon Bogie.
5. Set the Number of Axles to 2 and enter a value of 125kN in the Nominal
Wheel Load field. This will ensure that each of the 4 wheel loads has the same
value, although different wheel loads can be entered directly in the Load
column if required.
6. In the Edit field select axle spacing from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter a value of 1.829 on the second row of the table. This
will ensure that the axle spacing in the bogie is 1.829 metres as per the vehicle
load diagram. Click OK to close the sub form.
9-93

7. In the Edit field select track spacing from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter a value of 1.4 on the second row of the table. This will
ensure that the track spacing in the bogie is 1.4 metres as per the standard
track spacing. Click OK to close the sub form.

8. In this example the default value for the Overall Width of Vehicle will be used.
Note that the program automatically alters this default value when the value of
the track spacing is set.
9. We will now define the 4 wheels in the bogie as being at the 4 locations where
the blue construction lines intersect.
Select wheel positions in the Edit field and click Yes on the confirm form.

The 4 wheels in the bogie have been defined and are represented by green
circles on the graphics window. Note that as an alternative the wheels could be
defined by clicking in the graphics window at the locations where the blue
construction lines intersect.
10. Set the Front Axle Overhang and Rear Axle Overhang fields to 1.464m. This
would ensure that the appropriate swept path allowance would be set correctly
if the convoy were to be considered in the Load Optimisation process.
In this example we will use the default value of 0m for the Unloaded Length
Front and Unloaded Length Behind fields. This will ensure that no load is
applied to the structure over that length immediately in front of, or behind, each
bogie/vehicle. However, the unloaded lane length only effects highway vehicles
9-94

and hence it is not directly relevant to the railway loads specified in this
example.

11. Click OK to close the Define Special Vehicles form.
Convoy of Vehicles
The 2 wagons will be defined as a single convoy of 4 bogies. Each of the 4
bogies will consist of a user defined vehicle which was created in the previous
steps.
12. Select the menu item Data | Define Convoy... to open the Define Convoy of
Vehicles form.
13. Click on the + button to add a new convoy and change the Name to Two
Wagon Convoy.
14. Set the Convoy Type to Non-uniform. This will enable bogies to be positioned
at varying distances within the convoy. Set the Vehicle Type to Wagon Bogie
in the top 4 rows of the table and enter the values shown below in the Vehicle
Separation fields. These dimensions position the bogies along the length of the
convoy as per the diagram in the introduction to this example. Click OK to
close the form.

Applying the Convoy Load to the Structure
A rail convoy load can be included in the Load Optimisation process. However,
in this example the convoy load will be applied manually to the structure.
15. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen to Basic
Loads by selecting the button at the bottom.
16. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Railway Load |
Convoy Load to open a Define Railway Loading form. Use the default values
on the form. Position the Convoy Load approximately by clicking twice in the
9-95

north most lane somewhere near the right hand end of span 1 (leave a gap of a
few seconds between clicks). Enter values of 1.37 and 1.24 in the Dynamic
Factor M and Dynamic Factor V fields respectively. Now set the Chainage in
the form to 15m to position it more accurately. Note that the axles in the 4
bogies align radially with the curved deck.

17. It is worth noting that when Defined is selected in the Wheels field the Wheels
Included sub form opens in which tickboxes can be selected or deselected to
include or ignore individual wheel loads in the convoy. This may be useful
when a user wants to ensure that wheel loads which produce relieving effects
are not applied as mentioned in Clause 5.34 of DMRB BD 21/01. Close the sub
form if it has been opened. Close the Define Railway Loading form with the
OK button.

9_8 with Convoy Loads.sst. Close the program.
Summary
This example provides an introduction to defining user defined special vehicles
and user defined convoys.
The user defined a special vehicle and a user defined convoy. The convoy load
was placed on the structure manually. Users can create loading patterns manually
based on engineering experience. The appropriate gamma factors would be input
manually in the Compile Loading Patterns form.
9-96

Alternatively, the convoy could be included in the Load Optimisation process which
is described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Obviously, any additional wagons or locomotives could be defined and included in
the convoy as necessary.

10-1

10. Complete Examples

Contents
10.1. Three Span Steel Composite Grillage ...................................................................... 10-3
10.2. Steel Composite Banana Farm Access Bridge .................................................... 10-27

10-2

10-3

10.1. Three Span Steel Composite Grillage
Subjects Covered:
Grillage model; Carriageway definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines;
Renumber Joints; Reverse Longitudinal Beams; Steel Composite Beam; Basic Loads;
Live Load Optimisation; Results; Dead Load Compilations; Overlay Bending Moment
and Shear Force Diagrams; Results for Multiple Compilations; Enveloped Results;
Transfer Results to Beam Design
Outline

In this example we are going to model a 3 span steel composite bridge with curved
soffits on the beams. The bridge has 5 longitudinal beams as shown in the diagram
below.

We will define a grillage model and then import the beam data from beam files
created in example 4.2. We will assign these beams to the longitudinal members in
the grillage, then apply dead and superimposed dead loads manually. We will then
use the automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After
analysing the load cases, we will look at various results and then transfer some of
them to one of the beam files. We will then go back to the structure and save the
model.
10-4

Procedure
1. We start by defining the alignments and outline of our structure.
2. Next we will add some descriptions to the structure which will be shown on all
printed output.
Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to 3 Span Steel
Composite Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Section 10.1. Set Job Title to
Examples Guide and add your initials in the Calculations by: field.
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (-1,6) for the coordinates of
Line form.
(-5.4, -4.4), (-4.4, 4.4), (4.4, 5.4).

10-5


Navigation Pane.

button twice. Enter (0,0) and (5,12) for the coordinates of the start and finish
of the line, then click Next. Click OK to close the Define Line Segment form
and click OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.
down list. Give the line an offset of 6m and press Enter on the keyboard.
and give it an offset of -6m. This has defined construction lines along the top
and bottom edges of the structure.
10-6

Repeat this process to add lines at 50m and 70m. Click on the OK button to
close the Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show
an outline of the structure as shown below.

10_1 Layout.sst.

Click on the bottom left and top left hand corners of the left-hand abutment on
the graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this
to locate the piers and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in
the table as above and on the graphics as below:
10-7

9. The next step is to define the three meshes which make up the grillage.
Set Longitudinal to 7 and Transverse to 5 and then click on the four edges
of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge. (You may need to press
before clicking in the graphics window). Click OK to close the Define Mesh
form.
list. Change Name to Span 2 and set Transverse to 7, then click on the four
edges of the central span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to close
the Define Mesh form.
list. Change Name to Span 3, then click on the four edges of the right hand
span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to close the Define Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the grillage as shown below:

10-8

the entire structure. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that only the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to
Variable then click on the centre node on the left abutment (node 34).
Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in DX and
DY. Click on the centre node on the right abutment (node 201) and change the
support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on OK to close
the form.
11. The next task is to renumber the joints in the structure.
Click on the Joint Details node to open the Joint Details form. Click on the
Sort... option under Table Tasks to open the Sort form. Set the first sort by
parameter to Y - ascending then the next to X ascending. Click on the
OK button then click on Renumber... under Joint Tasks to open the
Renumber form. Next set Renumber Range to All, Start Number to 1 and
click on the Apply button. This will renumber the joints longitudinally. Click
on the OK button to close the Renumber form. Click on OK again to close
the Joint Details form.
12. The next step is to reverse the direction of the longitudinal beams in the first
span.
Click on the Longitudinal Beams node to open the Longitudinal Beams form.
Click on the first row in the table then hold down the Shift key on your keyboard
and click on the seventh row of the table. The first seven rows of the table will
now be highlighted as shown below:

Click on Reverse Order in the list of Beam Tasks. The direction of the
selected longitudinal beam members will be reversed as shown by the arrow
heads on the graphics window. Click on OK to close the form.
10.1 Mesh and Supports.sst.
14. We will now assign section properties to our grillage, starting with the internal
beams in the central span.
10-9

button and select Steel Composite Design Beam from the drop down menu.
This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and open the
file BS Example 4_2a.sam created in section 4.2 of this guide. Change
Description to Mid Span and click on the five inner beams in the central span
of the structure. They will be highlighted in red and their references added to
the Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the form. (You may need to
move the bottom of the graphics window upwards in order to be able to see the
form).

15. Next we will assign properties to the internal beams in the end spans.
Click on the Add button again and select Steel Composite Design Beam from
the drop down menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse
button and open the file BS Example 4_2b.sam created in section 4.2 of this
guide. Change Description to End Span and click on the five inner beams in
the both end spans of the structure. They will be highlighted in red and their
references added to the Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the form.

16. Now we will assign properties to the edge beams using a section file.
Click on the Add button again and select Design Section Data from the drop
down menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button
and select the file My BS Example 3_5a.sam created in section 3.5 of this
guide. Change Description to Edge Section and select the two rows of edge
members in the structure using the mouse to draw a selection box around each
of them. They will be highlighted in red and their references added to the
Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the form.
10-10

17. The next step is to assign properties to the diaphragm.
Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
Description to Diaphragm and set Width to 600mm and Depth to 1000mm.
Leave the other properties at their default concrete values. Click OK to close
the form.
Go to the Structure window and click on the Member selection filter button. On
the Member Selection Filter form, click on De-select all then set Pick Mode to
Transverse Beam. Click on the four diaphragm beams (you may want to
zoom in on the graphics window in order to ensure that you select only the
diaphragms), then click on Save... Enter Diaphragms in the Save Member
Selection form then click OK. Click OK to close the filter form. Return to the
Section Properties tab then draw a selection box around the entire structure.
The diaphragm members will be highlighted in red and their references added
to the Assigned Members list. Click on OK to close the form.

18. Finally we will assign properties to the transverse members using a continuous
slab property.
Click on the Add button again and select Continuous Slab from the drop down
menu. This will open the Continuous Slab Properties form. Change Depth to
200mm and Description to Transverse Slab. Leave the other properties at
their default concrete values. Click on the Member selection filter drop down
menu and select Transverse Beams. Draw a box around the whole structure
and answer No to All on the confirmation box that appears. This stops the
program from overwriting the diaphragm section assignments. Click on the
10-11

Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the filter
then click on OK to close the form.

concrete.
Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Length and Load
W1 to -9.44kN/m.
assign the loads.

In the second row of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to
Global Z, Load Value to Volume and Load W1 to -23.6kN/m
3
. On the
graphics window, draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to assign
the loads. Click on the Filter toolbar button and click on De-select All in the
Selection Tasks list. Set Select By to Member Selection Set and double-click
on Diaphragms. Click OK to close the Member Selection Filter form. Draw
a box around the whole structure to assign the load to the diaphragm
members. Press Ctrl-A on the keyboard to show all members on the graphics.
10-12

Change Name to Concrete Dead Load and click on OK to close the Define
Beam Loading form.

21. The next step is to assign dead loads for steel to the model.
Length and Load W1 to -4kN/m.
assign the loads. Press Ctrl-A on the keyboard to show all members on the
graphics.

Change Name to Steel Dead Load and click on OK to close the Define
Beam Loading form.
10-13

2
.
deselect Beam Elements. The graphics now shows the carriageway and
span end lines. Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right
hand span end line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span
end line. (See the screen shot on the following page for details of the
carriageway edge locations). This will apply a patch to the carriageway.
Change Name to SDL Carriageway. Click OK to close the form.

2
.
Click on the bottom edge of the bottom verge, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the bottom verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the bottom verge. Change Name to SDL Bottom Verge then click
10-14

Repeat the process for the top verge. Click on the Add button and select
Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop down list to open the Define Bridge
Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per unit area to 3.6kN/m
2
.
Click on the bottom edge of the top verge, the right hand span end line, the top
edge of the top verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a patch
to the top verge. Change Name to SDL Top Verge. On the graphics
window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and select Beam
Elements then click OK to close the form.

23. We will now define a SDL barrier load.
Length and Load W1 to -1.8kN/m.
Longitudinal Beams. Draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to
assign the loads. Press Ctrl-A on the keyboard to show all members on the
graphics.
10-15

Change Name to SDL - Barriers and click on OK to close the Define Beam
Loading form.

button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click on the + button twice to add
2 rows to the table. In the first row of the table click on the Load Name column
and select L1: Concrete Dead Load from the list. In the second row, click in
the Load Name column and select L2: Steel Dead Load from the list. Set
gamma to 1.05 in the second row. Click on OK to close the Compile Loading
Patterns form.

Right click on compilation C1: Dead Loads at stage 1 ULS on the Navigation
Pane, then select Copy to create a duplicate of the first compilation. On the
Compile Loading Patterns form, change Limit State to Serviceability and click
on Yes in the confirmation dialog. Click on OK to close the form.
10-16

25. Finally we will define a superimposed dead load compilation.
Click on the Add button and select Superimposed Dead Loads. Click on the
Find and Add to Table button. This will add all six defined load cases to the
list. Click in the Ref column on the first row of the table and click on the -
button near the bottom of the form to delete load case L1. Repeat this for load
case L2. Change gamma for load case L6 to 1.5. Click on OK to close the
Compile Loading Patterns form.

Right click on compilation C3: SDL ULS on the Navigation Pane, then select
Copy to create a duplicate of the first compilation. On the Compile Loading
Patterns form, change Limit State to Serviceability and click on Yes in the
confirmation dialog. Click on OK to close the form.

10-17

Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Longitudinal Beam then click on the
central beam of the centre span in the graphics window. This will define 13
influence surfaces for My Sagging. (Note that in the Effect column the drop
down can be used to select Combined Effect so that, for example, combined
bending and shear can be selected. However, in this example we will just use
the default Bending Moments influence surfaces).

(You may need to click on the Auto Redraw button in the graphics toolbar to
update the graphics). The graphics window will now show the influence surface
for the first member selected. Change the view to isometric then click in the
Name column on the Influence Surface Generation form. Use the up and down
cursor keys on the keyboard to move through the influence surfaces.

just generated.
10-18


selected influence surface. Note that clicking on the rows of the table on the
Load Optimisation form highlights the individual loads on the graphics window.

If you leave the Load Optimisation form open, you can click in the Name
column on the table in the Influence Surface Generation form and use the up
and down cursor keys on the keyboard to display the loading patterns
generated for the surface. When you have finished looking at the loads, click
OK on the BD 37/01 Highway Bridge Live Load Optimisation form and click
OK on the Influence Surface Generation form.
10-19

form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you want to solve.
Each time the load optimisation is run, a loading set is automatically generated
for the load cases produced by that run. The list also includes any load cases
not included in a loading set. Make sure both tick boxes are ticked and click
OK.

analysis has completed, click on the Done button.
10_1 Basic and Live Loads.sst
Results Processing
32. We will now look at the results produced for the analysis run in the previous
section.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer as shown
below:

10-20

The viewer shows the influence surface for the one of the influence loads.
Click on the Result Type drop down and select Compilation from the list of
options. In the Name drop down select compilation C7, set Result For to
Joint and Effect to Deflected Shape.

33. Since compilation 7 is for SLS we want to add in the dead and SDL effects at
SLS.
Click on the Dead Load Compilations drop down and tick C2 and C4. This will
add the effects of these two compilations to compilation C7 and show the
displacements for the load cases in all three compilations applied together.

34. Next we will look at the member end forces for a line of edge members.
Click on the Result For drop down and select Beam from the list. In the
Name field, select compilation C9. Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the
Member Selection Filter form. Click on De-select all then set Pick Mode to
10-21

Longitudinal Beam. Change the graphics view to plan and click on the
bottom edge member in span 2. Click on OK to close the filter form and
change the view back to isometric. The graphics now shows a plot of the Z
member end forces.
35. We can also overlay a bending moment diagram on the plot.
To do this, click on the Results For drop down menu on the graphics toolbar.
You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz already ticked. Tick the
My option as well to add the bending moment diagram to the plot.
The scale is a bit small for the plot so move the mouse over the Results tab on
the right hand side of the graphics and tick both the Specify Scale tick boxes.
Enter values of 1kN and 10kNm in the two boxes. The Results Viewer will
now look like this:

36. We can also look at the joint displacements for all compilations for the centre
joint of span 2.
To do this, change Result For to Joint then click on the Edit|Multiple Results
Selection menu item. This will open the Multiple Results Selection and Include
Controller form.
10-22

Click on the Select All button then untick the first four compilations. Click on
OK to close the form and display the displacements for the selected
compilations.
Drag Including Dead Load Compilations and Compilation Name off the orange
bar.

Click on the Customise... button at the top right of the results table. Click on
the button marked press the button to add a new condition then click on the
green text and select Joint from the list of options. Click on the blue text
which says <empty> and type 116 then click on the OK button.

10-23

To see which compilation produces this displacement, click on the menu option
to the left of the Reference heading in the results table. Tick Compilation
then click on the menu below and tick Name.

Set the Results For: drop down menu on the graphics toolbar to Joint
Displacement-DZ. Click once on the DZ column header to sort the list from low
to high, then scroll to the top to see the maximum negative displacement for
joint 116.

37. Next, we will look at some enveloped results.
Click on the Result Type drop down and select Envelope. The Name field
should show envelope E1. Click on the Filter button then click on De-select all,
set Pick Mode to longitudinal beam and click on the centre beam of span 2.
Click on OK to close the filter form. Put your mouse over the Results tab on
the right of the graphics and untick the two Specify Scale tick boxes. Put your
mouse over the General tab and tick the Result tick box. This will show the
maximum My moment.
10-24

38. It is worth noting that when the print preview window is opened by clicking on
the icon at the top of the graphic window, a pdf of the graphic window can
be generated by clicking on the icon at the top of the print preview window.
Finally we will close the Results Viewer.
Exporting results
39. We will now transfer results from the analysis to the steel composite beam
design module.
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the centre
beam of span 2. It will be highlighted in red. Click on the OK button to open
the Assign Load Cases form.
40. We will match envelopes produced during the load optimisation with design
load cases.
On the Assign Load Cases form, click in the Design Load Case column and
select BM +associated SF sagging. Leave Index and Comb. set to 1. Click
in the L/C/E column and select Env. Click OK on the warning message
which appears. Click in the Analysis Load Case column and select envelope
E1: HA+HB: U1: Mem 179-190: My Sag. The ULS Factor will be
automatically set to 1 and the SLS Factor field will be blank.
Repeat this process in the next row, setting Comb. to 3 and selecting envelope
E2: HA+HB: U3: Mem 179-190: My Sag.
Repeat this in row 3, this time selecting the SLS Combination 1 envelope E3.
Finally, in the fourth row, selecting envelope E4. The Assign Load Cases form
will look like this (Note the Index numbers):
10-25

Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button to transfer the results to the
beam design module.
41. The beam module will display the load effects we have just transferred in
tabular and graphical form.

Click on the OK button on the Define Composite Beam Loads form and click
Yes on the confirmation box which appears. Click on the File|Save menu
item to save the loads in the beam file.
42. The final step is to go back to the grillage model.
Click on the Data|Define Loading menu item to open the Define Composite
Beam Loads form. Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form:

Click on the Refined Analysis option and click OK. You will be given the
option to save the results in the beam file and be taken back to the grillage
model.
43. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save the model as My BS Example
10_1 Complete Model.sst and close the program.
10-26

Summary
In this example we defined a 3 span grillage consisting of three meshes and then
assigned section properties to it using beam files created in a previous example. We
then applied some basic loads to the structure and used the automated load
optimisation to generate live loads for the carriageway on the structure. We then
analysed the load cases and looked at the results for them. We then exported the
results to a beam file to check its design.

10-27

10.2. Steel Composite Banana Farm Access Bridge
Subjects Covered:
Composite beam structures; FE webs; 3D structures; composite members; member
eccentricities; joint editing;
Outline

This access bridge is constructed with two steel plate girders supported on H piles
acting compositely with a concrete slab. The top flange of the beam has an arched
profile and it is deeper in the centre than at the ends.
The slab, diaphragm and upstand are created with grade 40 concrete and the girder
with grade 355 structural steel.
The structure is modelled using a 3D shell finite element slab (curved in elevation)
with a steel composite beam inserted as an FE web beam to explicitly model the web
as finite elements and the flanges as beam elements. Upstands are added as edge
beam members with the appropriate vertical offset and the diaphragm is represented
with finite elements.
The beam, a 30m span, is assumed to be continuous at its ends as there will be some
hogging at this location and this will affect the effective breadth of concrete flange.
The adjacent spans (the piles) are assumed to be 4m long and fixed into rock at the
remote end.
The girder has uniform thickness of web and flanges throughout (28mm & 50mm
respectively) and the flanges are 500mm wide. The overall depth is set to 1000mm
deep but with a sagging profile such that the overall depth at the ends is 500mm.
This is done with 20 straight segments, as the curved profile is limited to hogging
shapes. The profile points are not exactly on a circular curve but are close to it.
The slab in the beam representation is 2m wide and 0.2m thick, but is offset by 0.5m.
10-28

An edge upstand 200mm wide and 250mm deep is added above the left edge of the
slab and is assumed to be structural and cast with the slab.
The carriageway on the bridge is a single lane of 3.8m with no footway or verges and
is positioned centrally on the bridge.

Procedure
Beam Definition
1. We start by defining the steel composite beam. Start the program, ensure that
the current Project Template: is set to Version 6 Examples and then create a
new beam using the menu item File|New|Beam. Ensure that the beam is a
steel composite beam using the menu item Data|Beam Type|Steel
Composite.
2. Add a title for the beam as Composite banana beam with a sub title of
Section 10 and add your initials in the Calculations by: field.

Profile of Top Of Beam
0.00 0.00
1.50 0.19
3.00 0.36
4.50 0.51
6.00 0.64
7.50 0.75
9.00 0.84
10.50 0.91
12.00 0.96
13.50 1.00
15.00 1.00
16.50 1.00
18.00 0.96
19.50 0.91
21.00 0.84
22.50 0.75
24.00 0.64
25.50 0.51
27.00 0.46
28.50 0.91
30.00 0.00
10-29

3. Open the Define Composite Beam form (Data Menu) and set the MAIN SPAN
to be Continuous-Internal Span with a span of 30m and the SIDE SPANS as
End spans with spans of 4.0m (accept the warning message about spans
being outside expected range). Set the Cross section to uniform and the
Location as Inner beam.
4. Use the drop down selection in the Define field to open the Composite Beam
Section Definition form. Create a Plate Girder component with 500mm wide
flanges and a 1000mm depth overall. The thickness of flange and web are
50mm and 28mm respectively. Close the Component form using the OK
button. Create a second component as a Concrete Slab setting the slab
width to be 2000mm and the thickness to be 200mm. Close the component
form using the OK button. In the Slab Details set the x offset to be 0.5m.
Now add a third component as Concrete Edge and create 5 coordinate points
by using the + button and entering the data as shown below.

5. Close the Define Edge Detail form with the OK button and ensure the material
properties are assigned correctly (grade 40 concrete) and that the edge detail
is structural and it is cast with the slab.

6. Close the Section Definition form and then open the Define soffit profile form
using the appropriate option in the Define field. Enter the profile points into the
table as shown below:
10-30

Proportion
of span
Offset
(mm)
0.0 500
0.1 320
0.2 180
0.3 80
0.4 20
0.5 0
0.6 20
0.7 80
0.8 180
0.9 320
1.0 500

7. The general beam has now been defined lateral restraints, web stiffeners and
shear connecters will be added in the design stage. Close all the open forms
(using the OK button) and save the file as banana_beam.sam using the
Save option in the File menu.
Creating the flat slab
8. We will now begin to define the structural model by defining a flat slab 30m
long by 4m wide. There will be 20 equally spaced elements longitudinally and 6
elements transversely, with the edge element 0.5m and the internal element
0.75m.
9. Start a new Structure using the File|New menu option and enter no for the
warning to save the beam data - if it appears.
10. Add a title for the structure as Composite Banana Bridge with a sub-title
Section 10. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field.
11. Add a new 2D submodel (GCS, z=0.0) to the structure (see example 6.4).
12. Add a new mesh to this submodel and create a Finite Element mesh using a
Mesh Type of Orthogonal to span and pick mode by point. Set the Snap
mode to Grid in the graphics window tool bar and click on the appropriate grid
points in the graphic window to define the boundary of the slab. The display of
the coordinates in the top right hand corner can be used for guidance.
13. Set the number of elements transversely to 6 and longitudinally to 20 then
change the Equal Size option for the transverse elements to Set Size. In
the Set Transverse Size form that should now be visible set the spacing factor
for the two end elements to 0.6666667 and then close this form with the OK
button. Change the name of the mesh to Slab and close the meshing form in
the usual way. A warning message about aspect ratio size may be displayed
but this can be ignored.
10-31

14. We now need to add beam members along the edges of the slab to represent
the upstand. This is done by opening the sub model member form so that
additional members can be created.

15. In the graphics window click on the toolbar button to draw a single member.
Then click on the bottom left corner node of the mesh and then again on the
bottom right node to draw one member. Repeat this on the top edge of the
mesh. These members can then be split into 20 beam element segments by
using the Split Beam Element task in the Define Sub Model Members form.
10-32

16. In the split beam elements form select the at nodes along element option, click
on the edge beam and then click on the Apply button. Dismiss the information
window and repeat for the beam on the top edge of the mesh.
17. At this stage it is worth saving the slab model as an intermediate data file so
that we can come back to this stage if necessary. Close all the open forms in
the normal way and save the model as My BS Example 10_2 Slab.sst.
Creating the curved slab
18. The next step is to alter the z coordinates of the slab nodes to represent the
curved profile. To do this the 2D sub model needs converting to a 3D sub
model (losing all details of the mesh). This is done by clicking on the sub model
in the Navigation Pane and, by using the right mouse button, choosing the
menu option Convert to 3D sub model. Confirm the conversion when asked.
19. Open up the Joint Details form by clicking on this item in the Navigation Pane
and ensure the view direction is a plan view. Draw a selection window round
the left most column of joints to select them. These joints will be displayed as
red. Hold the Ctrl key down and draw a selection window round the right most
row of joints to add these to the selection set. Click on the Edit... joint task to
display a secondary form to allow editing of the coordinates.
20. Choose the Specific value option and enter -1.000 in the Z field before
clicking on the Apply button.
21. Without closing the Edit Joint Coordinates data
form, select the second column of joints from each
end in the same way as before, and change the z
coordinate to -0.810 before clicking the Apply
button.
22. Repeat this with appropriate Z values (given in the
table) for the other columns of joints. Close the
Edit Joint Coordinates form and use the graphic
toolbar button to set the view as isometric.
23. We will now add a design line, carriageway and
span end lines to the structure. First of all close the Joint Details form in the
normal way.
24. In the Navigation Pane click on the Structure node and use the Add toolbar
button and select Design Line to open the Define Design line form. The
structure will be displayed in an xy view. Click on the middle node at the left
hand edge of the structure, then on the middle joint at the right hand edge of
the slab to create a design line DL1. Click on OK to close the Define Design
Line form.
25. To create the carriageway use the Add button (when Structure is highlighted)
and select Carriageway. In the Define Carriageway form set the design line to
DL1 and change the offsets to +/- 1.9m on either side of the design line for
Row of joint Z Coord (m)
1 -1.000
2 -0.810
3 -0.640
4 -0.490
5 -0.360
6 -0.250
7 -0.160
8 -0.090
9 -0.040
10 0.000
11 0.000
10-33

both footway and carriageway. Click on OK to close the Carriageway form.
The program will display an information box. Click on OK to close it.
26. Span end lines are added in a similar way and are created by clicking on the
corner nodes of the mesh at the left and then at the right. You may need to
change the snap mode. Click on OK when the span end lines have been
defined.
27. Close the data forms in the normal way and save the data file as My BS
Example 10_2 Curved Slab.sst.
Assigning the composite beam
28. The next step is to define the section properties to be used in the model. To do
this click on the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane then click on
the Add toolbar button and select Steel Composite Design Beam from the list.
29. Open the file banana_beam.sam created earlier and click OK then close the
Import file form.
30. Go back to the Structure tab, click on the Add button and select FE Web
from the list. Check that the correct composite beam is selected and that the
Mirror tick box is not selected. Change to a plan view and click on the bottom
edge of one of the top row elements. Accept the three information messages.
31. Click on the Add Additional FE Web... button and tick the Mirror Design Beam
button. Click on the top edge of one of the bottom row elements and accept the
information message, then close the form. Click OK on the Define FE Web
form.
32. We will now change the descriptions for the section properties created when
we assigned the composite beam. Go to the Section Properties tab and select
Parametric Shape S2. Change its description to Flanges and close the form.
Next select Finite Element S3. Change the description to Slab. Close the
form. Repeat this for Finite Element S4, changing the description to Webs.
33. The next step is to modify the composite members created when the FE webs
were defined to include the upstand edge. To do this, go to the
Calculate|Define Composite Member menu item. Change to a plan view and
make sure the pick mode is set to Beam Element. Select Composite Member
1 and draw a box around the top edge beams. Repeat the process for
Composite Member 2, adding the bottom edge beams and then close the
Define Composite Member form.
34. Next we need to define a section property for the upstand. Add a rectangular
parametric shape, 200mm wide by 250mm deep. Call the section Edge
Upstand and assign it to the two lines of edge members and then close the
form.
35. Go back to the Structure tab and click on the Add toolbar button and select
Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities. Click on the Insert Record button to
add a new row to the eccentricity table. Enter 225mm in the Start Z column
10-34

then draw a box around the upstand members to select them. Call the
eccentricities Edge Upstand and close the form.

36. The final step is to add supports to the model. Go to the Add toolbar button and
select Supported Nodes. Use the Dynamic View to rotate the structure
so that the four bottom corner joints are visible.

Change the selection mode on the graphics window to All Joints and click on
the four bottom corner joints. Change the support directions so that the
supports are just fixed in the Direct Z direction then change the Group Type to
Variable. Change one support so that it is fixed in the DX, DY and DZ
directions and the support at the other end of the same beam to be fixed in the
DY and DZ directions then close the form. (The support nodes will change
colour when selected in the table).
37. Save the file as My BS Example 10_2 FE Web Deck only.sst.
Adding the pile and diaphragm sub models
38. The next step is to define the pile and diaphragm sub models. Before we do
this we need to delete the supports we defined previously. Right click on SN1:
Supports on the Navigation Pane list and select Delete from the popup menu.
(You may need to right click twice to get the popup menu to appear).
39. Next create a 2D sub model at the left hand end of the structure. Click on the
Add toolbar button and select 2D Sub Model. Click on the YZ button then
click OK.
Insert Record button
Inserted Record
10-35

40. Click on Sub Model Members in the 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A node to open
the Define Sub Model Members form. Click on the Single Member draw
mode toolbar button and click on the bottom left hand node on the beam web.
Click on the Draw to a specific position or offset toolbar button then click on
the Offset value button. Enter a v offset of -4m. Repeat the process to define
the other pile.
41. Click on Split Beam Element from the list of Member Tasks then click on the by
specified divisions button, set the number of new elements to 8, then click on
the Apply button. Click on the first pile and click on the Apply button again,
then close both the forms.
42. Click on the 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A node in the Navigation Pane then click
on the Add toolbar button and select Mesh from the drop down list. Set the
Member type to Finite Elements, the Transverse Number to 2 and the
Longitudinal Number to 4. Set Pick to by point. On the graphics window put
the mouse on the General tab and tick the Show Nodes option (if it is not
greyed out). The nodes will show up as blue dots. Set the Snap mode to
Node in Plane and click on the 4 nodes highlighted in the screenshot below,
starting with the bottom left then bottom right, top right and top left. This will
create a finite element mesh. Change its name to Diaphragm and close the
form, clicking Yes on the confirm form.

43. We now need to assign properties to the sub model. Go to the Section
Properties tab and click on the Add toolbar button and select Parametric
Shapes. Set Shape Reference to H and enter a width and height of 450mm.
Enter a thickness of 28mm for both horizontal and vertical. Change the material
properties so that Elastic Modulus is 205, Shear Modulus is 78 and Density
is 77. Go to the graphics window and click on the Filter drop down arrow.
Select 2D Model A from the list then box round the pile members. Change
Description to H Piles and click OK to assign the properties. Click OK on
the warning message that appears.
44. Click on the Add toolbar button again and select Finite Element from the drop
down list. Set Thickness to 500mm and then select the finite elements in the
diaphragm. Change Description to Diaphragm, set the filter to Select All
and close the forms.
10-36

45. Go back to the Structure tab and use the Add button to add supported nodes.
Change the Select Box Type on the graphics toolbar to All Joints and click on
the two bottom nodes of the piles. Fix the joints in all six directions then click
46. The next step is to copy the sub model to the other end of the structure. Right
click on 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A and select Copy from the popup menu.
Click on the Define button and set X to be 30m, leaving Y and Z at their
current values. Click on the Next button 3 times on the Define Plane form
and then the OK button. Click on the Next button on the Copy Sub Model
form to copy the sub model. A summary of the new members, elements, joints
and supports created is then displayed. Click on OK to close the Copy Sub
Model form.
47. The final step in creating the structure is to make sure all the elements in the
slab have consistent local axes. Click on the Structure node in the Navigation
Pane then click on the Add toolbar button and select Advanced FE Set|Local
Axes. Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the filter form and de-select all
members. Set Select By to Section Property, select section property S5:
Slab and click on the single arrow to select the group. Click OK and then
draw a box around the slab. Click on Yes to All on the confirmation message
and then click on OK to close the form.
48. Save the file as My BS Example 10_2 Full Structure.sst.
Adding dead and superimposed dead load
49. The next step is to define the dead and superimposed dead loads. Go to the
Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane, click on the Add button and select
Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down list.
50. Click on the Filter toolbar button then click on De-select all. Set Select By to
Section Property and add S2: Flanges and S4: H Piles to the Selected
Groups list. Click on the Save button and save the member selection as
Steel Beams. Close the Member Selection Filter form and then draw a box
around the entire structure. Change Direction to Global Z in the first row of
the table, Load value to Volume, Load W1 to -78 and the Name to Steel
Beam Dead Loads. Close the Define Beam Loading form.
51. Add another Beam Element Load. Click on the Filter button and de-select all.
Set Select By to Section Property and add S3: Edge Upstand to the
Selected Groups. Click on the Save button, and save the selection as
Concrete Beams and close the Member Selection Filter form. Draw a box
around the structure to select the beams. Change Direction to Global Z, Load
value to Volume, Load W1 to -23.6 and the Name to Concrete Beam Dead
Loads. Close the Define Beam Loading form.
52. Click on the Add toolbar button and select Finite Element Load|External
Load. Click on the Filter button and de-select all. Set Select By to Section
Property and add S6: Webs to the Selected Groups list. Click on the Save
button and save the member selection as Steel FE. Close the Member
Selection Filter form and then draw a box around the entire structure. Change
10-37

the Load Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z, Load to -78 and
Name to Steel FE Dead Loads. Close the Define Finite Element Loading
form.
53. Click on the Add toolbar button and select Finite Element Load|External
Load. Click on the Filter button and de-select all. Set Select By to Section
Property and add S5: Slab and S7: Diaphragm to the Selected Groups list.
Click on the Save button and save the member selection as Concrete FE.
Close the Member Selection Filter form then draw a box around the entire
structure. Change the Load Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z,
Load to -23.6 and Name to Concrete FE Dead Loads. Close the form.
54. The next step is to define the dead load compilations. Go to the Compilations
tab in the Navigation Pane, click on the Add button and choose Dead Loads at
Stage 1. Click on the Find and Add to Table button and change gamma to
1.05 for load cases L1 and L3. Close the form.
55. We need to repeat the process for SLS. Click on the Add button and chose
Dead Loads at Stage 1. Change Limit State to Serviceability then click on
the Find and Add to Table button. Close the form to save the compilation.
56. The next step is to define the superimposed dead loads. Go back to the Basic
Loads tab and click on Add and select Bridge Deck Patch Load. Change
Define Loading by to coordinate and Load per unit area to 2kN.m
2
. Change
Snap mode to Intersection and click on the four corners of the deck to define
the patch. Change Name to Surfacing. Close the form.
57. Go to the Compilations tab, click on the Add toolbar button and select
Superimposed Dead Loads. Click on the + button to add a row to the table.
Click in the Load Name drop down list and select L5: Surfacing, change
gamma to 1.7 and close the form.
58. Right click on C3: SDL ULS on the Navigation Pane and select Copy.
Change Limit State to Serviceability and answer Yes when prompted to
change the factors. Close the form.
59. Save the file as My BS Example 10_2 Dead and SDL.sst.
Automated loading using influence surfaces
60. The next step is to create an influence surface and generate a live load pattern
for it. Use the Member Selection Filter button to set the filter to Select All.
Select the Data|Influence Surface menu item. Set the Pick Mode to
Composite Member Element. Change the graphics view to plan and click on
the location indicated by the arrow below:
10-38

This will add composite member element 2-11 to the list of influence surfaces
to be generated. Set the Method field to (1) Smoothed.

61. Click on the Analyse button to create the influence surface. When the
analysis is completed the influence surface will be displayed on the graphics.
Click on the Done button.

10-39

62. Set Type to BD 37/01 Highway and then click on the Run Optimisation
button to open the BD 37/01 Highway Bridge Live Load Optimisation form. In
the Combinations list tick Comb 1 and Comb 3 in both the ULS HA+HB and
SLS HA+HB sections. Set KEL Direction to Square to Design Line and For to
the right of the field to All. Click on the Compile Loading Patterns button to
run the load optimisation.

Details of the load optimisation run will be shown together with the loads
created both on the form and in the graphics window.

Click on OK on the load optimisation and influence surface generation forms
to save the loads that have been created.
10-40

63. We now need to analyse the load cases that have been created. To do this,
click on Calculate|Analyse. This will open the Activate Loading Sets form.
Each run of the load optimisation will create its own loading set. We can use
this form to select which load optimisation runs we want to produce results for.
In this case we only have one run so leave the form as it is and click OK.
This will start the analysis. Progress will be displayed in a status box. When
the analysis is complete click on the Done button.

64. Save the file as My BS Example 10_2 Dead SDL Influence.sst
Transfer analysis results to the beam design module
65. The next step is to transfer the results of the analysis to the beam being
designed. To do this, select the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam
menu item. This will open the Select Beam form.
66. Click on the graphics window anywhere along the centreline of the bottom
beam, for example at the location indicated by the arrow shown below.

The selected beam will be highlighted and its details shown in the Select Beam
form.
10-41

67. Click on the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases form. This form is
used to assign load cases, compilations or envelopes from an analysis to their
corresponding design load cases in a beam design.
68. Click in the Design Load Case column and select Construction stage 1A.
Click in the L/C/E column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case
column and select C1: Dead Loads at Stage 1 ULS. Repeat the process in
the second row, this time setting Analysis Load Case to C2: Dead Loads at
Stage 1 SLS and set the ULS Factor to 0.
69. In the third row, set Design Load Case to Superimposed dead load, L/C/E to
Comp and Analysis Load Case to C3: SDL ULS. Repeat the process in the
fourth row, this time setting Analysis Load Case to C4: SDL SLS and set the
ULS Factor to 0 and the SLS Factor to 1. The Index number on the fourth
row should be set to 1.
70. In the fifth row, set Design Load Case to BM +associated SF - sagging, L/C/E
to Comp and Analysis Load Case to C5: CM2-11; Cp My Sagging; U1.
Repeat the process in the sixth row, this time setting Index to 1, Comb to 3,
L/C/E to Comp and Analysis Load Case to C6: CM2-11; Cp My Sagging;
U1.
71. In the seventh row, set Design Load Case to BM +associated SF - sagging,
Index to 1, L/C/E to Comp and Analysis Load Case to C7: CM2-11; Cp My
Sagging; S1 and set the ULS factor to 0. Repeat the process in the eighth
row, this time setting Index to 1, Comb to 3, L/C/E to Comp and Analysis
Load Case to C8: CM2-11; Cp My Sagging; S3 and set the ULS Factor to 0.
The table in the Assign Load Cases form will now look like this:

10-42

Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button to transfer the load effects to
the steel composite beam. Once the load effects have been transferred, click
on the OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form.
72. Now that the loads have been transferred, we can check that the beam has
sufficient capacity under all loads.
73. After weve checked the beam design we can save the beam and structure.

Structural Bridge Design UK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Structural Bridge Design UK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

November 2013

Structural Bridge Design 2014

Structural Bridge Design 2014. There are ten

Structural Bridge Design 2014 may be used numerous times within a

Structural Bridge Design 2014. Particular emphasis is placed on the

Structural Bridge Design 2014 and the data file

Structural Bridge Design 2014.

. The single drawing file contains data about

Structural Bridge Design are used in the analysis then

You might also like